JP5126953B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention provides a game area formed on the front surface of a game board and into which a game ball fired from a launching means is driven, a plurality of types of winning holes provided in the game area, and a first of the plurality of types of winning holes. 1st profit grant determination which judges whether it controls to the profit grant state which gives a predetermined profit to a player based on having established the 1st start condition after a game ball has entered the 1 start winning opening And a profit granting state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the game ball has entered the second start winning opening among the plurality of types of winning openings. A second profit grant determining unit that determines whether or not to perform the determination, and a plurality of types of symbol information are variably displayed based on the determination made by the first profit grant determining unit, and a predetermined display result is derived and displayed. 1 display means and the second profit grant determination means Second display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information based on the determination made, and deriving and displaying a predetermined display result; an open state provided in the game area and accepting a game ball; A special winning opening opening / closing means that can be changed to a closed state in which it is difficult to accept, and specifying the first display means based on the fact that the first profit grant determining means determines that the profit grant state is controlled. A display result is derived and displayed, and a specific display result is derived and displayed on the second display means based on the determination that the second profit grant determining means controls the profit grant state, and the special prize opening opening / closing means is provided. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that changes to the open state and controls to the profit granting state.

  Conventionally, in general, a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device performs a variable display of symbols on the symbol display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening, and the symbol display result is a big hit symbol Then, a big hit gaming state (a specific gaming state) is generated and the special winning opening device is controlled to open (special operation), whereby a large amount of prize balls are paid out to the player.

  In addition, when the game ball is won at the start winning opening, when the symbol display device cannot start the variable display of the symbols, it stores up to four reserved balls, and the number of stored balls stored. Is displayed to notify the player of the number of times the symbols in the standby state are displayed, and the game is stopped without knowing the presence of the holding ball so that the player is not disadvantaged.

  In addition, there are two start winning ports including a first start winning port that can always accept a game ball and a second start winning port having a blade member that can change the rate of entering the game ball by opening and closing. Based on the fact that the above condition is satisfied, the normal symbol display device different from the symbol display device is used to display the variation of the normal symbol, and when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the winning symbol, the blade member of the second start winning opening is Some move to improve the rate of game balls entering the second starting prize opening.

In such a gaming machine, the first start winning opening that can always accept the game ball and the game ball is accepted only when the blade member is opened based on the display result of the normal symbol display device being the winning symbol. A second start winning opening, and the first display is variably displayed on the symbol display device based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening, and the game ball wins in the second starting winning opening. Based on the above, by displaying the second symbol variably on the symbol display device, a total of a maximum of four as the reserved balls of the first symbol and a maximum of four as the reserved balls of the second symbol There has been proposed a gaming machine that can store and display eight reserved balls, which is twice the number of machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
JP 2007-175083 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the first start winning opening is configured to always accept a game ball, while the second starting winning opening is set only when the display result of the normal symbol display device is a winning symbol. Since the game balls can be received, winning of the game balls at the second start winning opening is unlikely to occur with respect to winning of the game balls at the first start winning opening. That is, the degree of change in the number of reserved balls in the second symbol is small with respect to the change in the number of reserved balls in the first symbol, and the number displayed as the reserved balls in the second symbol is rarely increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that the gaming interests may be lowered despite the fact that more reserved balls can be stored than the conventional gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of storing a larger number of holding balls than a conventional gaming machine and capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest. Is to provide.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

(Solution 1)
A game area (game area 255) formed on the front surface of the game board (game board 4) and into which a game ball fired from the launching means (hit ball launching device 300) is driven;
A plurality of types of winning holes provided in the game area (upper start winning port 1270, middle start winning port 1330, lower start winning port 1340, left normal winning port 1440, decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465, 1470);
The first start condition is satisfied after the game ball has entered the first start winning port (medium start winning port 1330) among the plurality of types of winning ports (a big hit gaming state and a small hit gaming state described later are executed) Detected by the middle start port switch 1360 in the start information storage block 0 when the special symbol change display is being executed by either the upper special symbol display 1480 or the lower special symbol display 1490. First profit granting to determine whether or not to control to a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) that grants a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that start information indicating that the player has been played is stored) Determination means (part for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on a special symbol determination random number and a normal determination table or a high probability determination table by the main control MPU 1700a (step S86 A),
The second start condition is satisfied after the game ball has entered the second start winning port (lower start winning port 1340) among the plurality of types of winning ports (executes the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state described later) Detected by the lower start port switch 1370 in the start information storage block 0 when the special symbol change display is being executed by either the upper special symbol display 1480 or the lower special symbol display 1490. Second profit granting to determine whether or not to control to a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) that grants a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that start information indicating that the player has been played is stored) Determination means (part for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on a special symbol determination random number and a normal determination table or a high probability determination table by the main control MPU 1700a (step S8 )) And,
First display means (upper special symbol display 1480) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information (special symbols) and deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the determination by the first profit grant determining unit. When,
Second display means (lower special symbol display 1490) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information (special symbols) and deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the determination by the second profit grant determining unit. and, with a,
A specific display result (specific mode) is derived and displayed on the first display means based on the determination that the first profit grant determination means controls the profit grant state, and the second profit grant determination means displays the profit. a grant state specific display result to the second display means on the basis that is determined to control the (specific aspects) show the derivation, the gaming machine to control before Symbol interests applied state (pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first state (open state) that facilitates entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening, and a second state (closed state) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening; A movable member (opening / closing blade 1380) that can be changed to
The movable member is changed to the first state based on a predetermined condition being satisfied (a detection signal from the gate switch 1460 is input to the main control MPU 1700a based on a game ball passing through the gate 1455). Movable determination means for determining whether or not (the part for determining whether or not to win based on the random number for determination per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol by the main control MPU 1700a) (step S88);
Based on the fact that the movable determining means determines that the movable member is to be changed to the first state, the movable member is changed to the second state after being changed to the first state for a predetermined period. A control means (a portion for outputting the drive signal to the open / close blade solenoid 1390 by the main control MPU 1700a and stopping the output of the drive signal (step S88));
A front Stories second start winning hole (hold balls corresponding to the upper special symbol display device 1480) first pending that still the first starting condition of the game ball that ball entrance to the first starting winning opening is not established the composite hold and second hold ball entrance was still the second starting condition of the game ball is not satisfied (hold balls corresponding to the lower special symbol display device 1490) in the first hold and the second predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) to the coercive Tomesu storage means you can identify stores the order of occurrence (startup information storage area) for each of the hold,
Controls pending count display unit (the number of holding the display unit 2100 of the liquid crystal display device 1315) in accordance with the first coercive Tome及 beauty before Symbol second pending stored in said number of holding memory means, said composite pending The number- of-holds display control means for displaying the total number of the number- of-holds (holding number display areas 2100a to 2100e of the number-of-holds display unit 2100 based on the start winning command, the special 1-holding number designation command, and the special-two-holding designation command by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a) A display control part), and
The number of holding the display unit includes a display unit of the maximum number of sequences in a predetermined order (8) a predetermined number smaller than (one of the number of two to seven),
The predetermined number of display portions are arranged so that each has a similar shape and is close to each other at substantially equal intervals,
The holding number display control means includes:
When the total number of the composite holds is equal to or less than the predetermined number (for example, when it is equal to or less than 5), the predetermined number for each occurrence of a game ball entering the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening Among the display units, the number of display units that can be specified is increased in a predetermined order (the order of the hold number display area 2100a → the hold number display area 2100b →... → the hold number display area 2100e), and the predetermined number of displays is increased. the barometer displays to allow identifying the total number of complex hold by identifiable to scale in which these display portions of the increase or decrease of the parts,
Wherein (when it is for example 5 or more) the total number of composite pending the time is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, can be identified at the end of the display portion of Rutotomoni predetermined number displays identifiable in all the display unit of the predetermined number The total number of the composite holds is numerically displayed on a composite display portion (for example, the number-of-holds display area 2100e) displayed on the screen and every time a game ball enters the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening A gaming machine, characterized in that a total display of the composite hold displayed numerically on the composite display section is updated and displayed so that the total number of composite hold can be specified.

According to the gaming machine described in Solution 1, the first hold number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the second hold number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number. Further, the number-of-holds display means for displaying the total number of holds that is the sum of the first number of holds and the second number of holds is configured by a first number of display units smaller than the total number of holds, and the total number of holds is equal to or less than the first number. If this is the case, display a plurality of display units in a predetermined order according to the number of holds, and display a barometer that makes it possible to specify the total number of holds by increasing or decreasing the number of display units that can be specified. If the number is one or more, the total number of reservations is displayed on one of the display units displayed on the barometer, and the total number of reservations is displayed by updating the total number of reservations.
In order to display the total number of holdings without specifying a display unit corresponding to each of the total number of holdings, the number of display units of the holding number display means can be changed even for a gaming machine having an increased upper limit of the number of holdings. It is possible to make the player recognize the increase / decrease in the number of holds without saving the space.
In addition, when a display unit corresponding to each of the total number of holdings is provided and the total number of holdings is displayed as a barometer, the number of display units that can be specified with respect to the number of display units is small, and there is a possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered. However, it is possible to specify the total number of holdings less than the first number by displaying the barometer, and to specify the total holding number more than the first number by counting, so it corresponds to each of the total number of holdings. Compared with the case where a display unit is provided, it is possible to increase the proportion of display units that can be specified with respect to the number of display units that can be specified, thereby eliminating the blockage with respect to the second reserved number, Decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Solution 2)
The plurality of display units are arranged and arranged in the order in which they can be specified (for example, arranged in a line as shown in FIGS. 173 (A) to 173 (E)),
The holding number display control means displays the total number of holdings on the display unit (holding number display area 2100e) that is displayed in a finally specified manner among the plurality of display units that are displayed in the predetermined order. The gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein the count is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution 2, since the plurality of display units are arranged in the order in which they can be specified, it is easy to grasp the increase or decrease in the total number of holds that can be specified by the barometer display. In addition, the total number of holds is displayed on the last displayable display unit among a plurality of display units that are specified in a predetermined order, and the total number of holds can be specified by updating the total number of holds. In order to display the count, it is possible to associate the barometer display with the count display and display the total number of holds. That is, when displaying the total number of holdings in a barometer display so that the number can be specified, the player can specify the display unit that can be specified last in a plurality of display units that can be specified in a predetermined order. It is judged whether the total number of pending is large or small depending on whether it is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp both the large number of pending and the total number of pending by displaying the total pending count on the display section that can be specified last and displaying the count to update the total pending count. The barometer display and the count display can be associated with each other so that the total number of holds can be specified.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine according to Solution 1 or Solution 2, wherein the first number is a number (5) obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of the first reserved number.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution means 3, the number-of-holds display means is constituted by the number of hold sections obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of the first hold number. Since the number of holding units is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the first hold number, the upper limit number of the hold number is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the first hold number, and at least the upper limit number equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the first hold number Can be grasped.

(Solution 4)
The plurality of display units are configured to have a common form (size, shape, outline, etc.) that is common during normal times when the reserved number is not displayed in an identifiable manner (as shown in FIG. 173 (A)). And the number-of-holds display areas 2100a to 2100e are common to each other).

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution 4, the plurality of display units are configured so as to have a common form at the normal time when the number of holdings is not displayed so as to be able to be specified. The display unit that can be specified last in the order to be displayed, that is, the display unit that displays the total number of holds in the count display can be configured to have a form common to other display units, In the barometer display, the display unit that displays the total number of reservations can be displayed in a identifiable manner without giving a sense of incongruity in the same manner as other display units.

(Solution 5)
The hold number display control means displays the first hold number and the second hold number on the hold number display means in different modes (characters having different colors, sizes, shapes, colors, patterns, etc.) ( As shown in FIG. 173 (C), the holding sphere corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 and the holding sphere corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 are displayed with different display colors). Thru | or the game machine in any one of the solution means 4.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution 5, the first hold number and the second hold number are displayed as one hold number in order to display the first hold number and the second hold number on the hold number display means in different modes. Even if it is displayed by means, it is possible to recognize whether the number is the first holding number or the second holding number.

  According to the present invention, in order to display the total number of holdings in a barometer display and a count display so that the total number of holdings can be specified, the number of display units is smaller than the total number of holdings obtained by adding the first holding number and the second holding number. 2 It will be possible to eliminate the stagnation with respect to the number of reserved special symbols, and to prevent a decline in the entertainment interest.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. 3 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the rear of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5. FIG. 7 shows the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 as viewed from the front.

  1 and 2, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A glass that is a transparent plate that allows a player to visually recognize a main body frame 3 to be obtained and a game area 255 (see FIG. 7) that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed and into which a ball is driven. The door unit 5 includes a glass unit 50 having a plate 60 and a storage tray 30 that is disposed below the glass unit 50 and stores a ball to be paid out as a result of a game. .

A lower front cover plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. In addition to the game board 4 being detachably mounted on the main body frame 3 as described above, the ball hitting device 300 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the bottom of the back surface thereof. A door frame opening switch 3a for detecting that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is mounted by mounting a board unit 650 on which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided. And a body frame opening switch 3b for detecting that the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, and a cover body 750 covering the rear opening 222 (see FIG. 6) of the body frame 3 is detachably provided. . The main body frame 3 includes a door frame opening switch 3a for detecting that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, a main body frame opening switch 3b for detecting that the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, and Is provided. Furthermore, in addition to the storage tray 30 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 50 and a handle device 70 so as to close the game window 42. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one storage tray 30 provided in the door frame 5, and the handle device 70 that is conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described in detail.
[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B of the front view, and FIG. 3C is a cross-sectional view of side frame plate 12 cut along the line A-A of the front view.

  The outer frame 2 connects the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 with corner metal fittings 14 to 16 and upper support metal fittings 17 for connecting respective end portions. It can be assembled into a square shape. Specifically, the upper part on the open side is connected by screwing the upper end and rear face of the upper frame plate 10 and the corner metal fitting 14 passed to the outer side and rear face of the end portion of the side frame plate 13 to open and open. The lower part on the side is connected by screwing a corner metal fitting 15 that is passed to the bottom face and rear face of the lower frame plate 11 and the outer side face and rear face of the end part of the side frame plate 13, and the upper part on the pivot support side is The upper support fitting 17 that is passed between the end upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the end outer surface of the side frame plate 12 is connected by screwing, and the lower part on the pivot support side is the bottom surface of the end of the lower frame plate 11. And the rear surface is connected by screwing the corner metal fitting 16 passed to the outer surface of the end portion of the side frame plate 12 and the rear surface.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a light metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. It is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the nail, but such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that the nail is easily made. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extrusion-molded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the side walls 190 to 193 (see FIG. 36) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. For this reason, the game board 4 having a large left-right direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 255 of the game board 4 can be formed large. However, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24 is formed so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased. Of course, the thickness h1 is smaller than the conventional wooden thickness.

  Further, the lower front cover plate 6 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The surface of the lower front cover plate 6 is covered with the decorative plate 6a as described above, but the fastening protrusion 6b (FIGS. B) is projectingly provided, and the fixing projection 6b is attached to the lower front cover plate 6 by being passed through an attachment hole penetrating the lower front cover plate 6. Further, a back plate 7 is fixed to the upper part of the back surface of the lower front cover plate 6 to reinforce the strength of the lower front cover plate 6 on which the main body frame 3 is placed.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, it is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support bracket 17 and the lower front cover plate 6 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A support fitting 18 is provided. The upper support bracket 17 is formed with a support hole 20 bent in the support protrusion piece 19 protruding forward, and a shaft support pin of an upper shaft support bracket 152 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is formed in the support hole 20. 153 (see FIG. 38) is engaged. Further, the lower support fitting 18 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support protrusion 21 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 155 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 21. The support hole formed in FIG. 38) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support holes formed in the frame support plate 155 of the main body frame 3 with the support protrusions 21 of the lower support bracket 18, By pivoting the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support bracket 152 in the support rod hole 20, the shaft can be supported in a freely openable and closable manner.

  On the other hand, closing projections 22 and 23 are fixed to the upper and lower sides of the open side frame 13. The closing protrusions 22 and 23 are hook portions 614 and 624 (see FIG. 86) of the lock device 560 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To engage. Then, as will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 614, 624 and the closing projections 22, 23 are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 Can be opened to the outer frame 2.

When the upper support plate 17 and the corner brackets 14 to 16 for connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2 are respectively attached at predetermined positions, As shown in FIG.8 and FIG.9, each corresponding to the attachment part of each metal fitting 14-17 so that the outer surface of each metal fitting 14-17 and the outer surface of each frame board 10-13 become substantially the same plane. End portions of the frame plates 10 to 13 are formed in a concave shape. Even when the lower support fitting 18 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 18 are substantially flush with each other.
[1-1-1. Other Embodiments of Outer Frame]
The outer frame 2 described above is composed of the L-shaped corner brackets 14 to 16 and the upper support bracket 17 when the end portions of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are viewed from the back. Although what was comprised by connecting was shown, with reference to FIG. 12 thru | or FIG. 20 about embodiment (henceforth "the outer frame 2A which concerns on 2nd Embodiment") from which the structure which connects four frame boards differs. explain. 12 is a front perspective view of an outer frame 2A according to another embodiment, FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2A, and FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame 2A. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame 2A, and FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 14 (A) and a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. D sectional view (C), EE sectional view (D), FIG. 17 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting 152 of the main body frame 3 and the upper support fitting 17A of the outer frame 2A. 18 is an exploded perspective view (A) showing a mounting state of the lock member 25 provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting 17A of the outer frame 2A, and a perspective view (B) seen from below. FIG. 20 is a rear view of the upper support bracket 17A for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin 153 and the lock member 25. FIG. It is a rear view of the upper support bracket 17A portion for explaining the. 12 to 20, members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 8 to 11 (hereinafter referred to as “the outer frame 2 according to the first embodiment”) have “A” at the end of the same reference numerals. ".

  12 and 13, the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment is for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10A and 11A and the left and right side frame plates 12A and 13A with their respective end portions. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the connecting member 14A. Specifically, the connecting member 14A is formed as a podium with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10A and the lower frame plate 11A. The side frame plates 12A are fitted to the portions 10B and 11B and the left and right portions of the upper frame plate 10A are brought into contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step and the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered one step. , 13A are in contact with each other. In this state, the insertion holes 10C and 11C and the connecting member 14A are respectively lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 10B of the upper frame plate 10A and on both sides of the engagement notch 11B of the lower frame plate 11A. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 16A (shown on the connecting member 14A connecting the upper frame plate 10A and the side frame plate 12A in FIG. (They also exist in the member 14A) and are fixed by a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 16B from above or below, and further drilled in the upper and lower ends of the side frame plates 12A and 13A. A plurality (three in the figure) of connection holes 15A (upper frame plate in FIG. 13) formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the plurality of (two in the figure) mounting holes 12B, 13B and the connection member 14A. Connecting member 1 that connects 10A and side frame plate 13A The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 </ b> A are displayed by matching them with a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting screws 15 </ b> B from the outside of the side. The lower frame plate 11A and the left and right side frame plates 12A and 13A are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 15B, one connecting screw 15B does not connect the side frame plates 12A, 13A and the connecting member 14A, but the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the connecting member 14A. Are directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the side frame plates 12A, 13A constituting the outer frame 2A, the upper frame plate 10A and the lower frame plate 11A are the same wooden as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12A, 13A Is made of an extruded plate of a light metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 </ b> A and the lower frame plate 11 </ b> A are made of the same wood as the conventional one is the same reason as the outer frame 2 of the first embodiment. Also, in the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment, if the side frame plates 12A and 13A are made of aluminum alloy flat plates, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. A space portion 12G (the space portion 13G of the side frame plate 13A is shown in FIG. 15) whose back is opened by a rib is formed inside the rear portion of the plate 12A (the side frame plate 13A has the same structure), and the rear portion. It is drawn and molded so that the thickness h2 of the film becomes thicker. Of course, the thickness h2 is equal to or slightly smaller than the thickness of a conventional wooden. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16D, in the front of the space portion 12G of the side frame plate 12A, the groove portion 12F (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14A is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 13F of the frame plate 13A is formed as shown in FIG. From the groove 12F to the front end of the side frame plate 12A, as shown in FIGS. 16B to 16D, the inner surface of the side frame plate 12A comes into contact with the other portion of the left and right portions where the connecting member 14A is lowered by one step. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 12F is formed, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 16B, the concave portion 12H (side) into which the hanging piece portion 17E of the upper support fitting 17A is inserted. A recess 13H of the frame plate 13A is formed in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14A, the shaft support side frame 12A formed as described above has a hanging piece 17E of the upper support fitting 17A on the outer side of the side frame 12A. A mounting hole 12C for fixing with the mounting screw 17B is drilled in the mounting screw 18B, and the mounting hole 18C is formed at the lower part thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 18C formed in the side bent portion of the lower support fitting 18A. A mounting hole 12D is provided. Further, a mounting hole 12E for fixing the side frame plate 12A and the lower front cover plate 6A with a fixing screw 6E is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 12D and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12A. On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14A, the open side frame portion 13A is provided with an attachment hole 13C for attaching the closing projection 22A with the attachment screw 22B, and closed at the lower part thereof. A mounting hole 13C for mounting the projection 23A for mounting with the mounting screw 23B is drilled, and a mounting hole 13D for fixing the side frame plate 13A and the lower front cover plate 6A to the lowermost position with the fixing screw 6E. Is formed. The closing protrusions 22A and 23A are locks that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2A, like the outer frame 2 of the first embodiment. The hook 614 engages with the hook portions 614 and 624 (see FIG. 86) of the device 560. As will be described later in detail, a hook is inserted into the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 and rotated to one side, thereby the hook portion 614. 624 and the closing projections 22A and 23A are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2A.

  The lower front cover plate 6A fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11A and the left and right side frame plates 12A and 13A has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface when closed, and the lower front cover. The front and side surfaces of the plate 6A are covered with a decorative plate 6B as in the outer frame 2 of the first embodiment. 15) is projected, and the fixing projection 6C is attached to the lower front cover plate 6A by passing through the fixing hole 6D that penetrates the lower front cover plate 6A. In addition, a guide plate 6F for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the decorative plate 6B of the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment. Yes.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, it is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support bracket 17A and the lower front cover plate 6A that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10A and the side frame plate 12A. The lower support bracket 18A is provided. In the upper support fitting 17A, a support protrusion 20A that protrudes forward is formed with a support hole 20A that is bent from the side of the support protrusion 19A toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 153 (see FIG. 38) of an upper shaft support fitting 152 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 20A. The engagement relationship between the support hole 20A and the shaft support pin 153 will be described in detail later. Further, the lower support fitting 18A is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support projection 21A is projected upward on the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 155 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support projection 21A. The support hole formed in FIG. 38) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support holes formed in the frame support plate 155 of the main body frame 3 with the support protrusions 21A of the lower support metal fitting 18A, It is the same as the outer frame 2 according to the first embodiment in that the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support bracket 152 can be supported in a freely openable and closable manner by being hooked on the support hole 20A.

  The upper support bracket 17A is attached to the mounting step portion 10D formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and front surface of the upper frame plate 10A on the shaft support side, and is formed on the upper support bracket 17A when mounting. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 17D and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 10E formed in the mounting step portion 10D are aligned to insert the mounting screws 17B from above, and the upper frame The upper support bracket 17A is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10A by being fastened to the clamping plate 17C pressed from the back surface of the plate 10A. Further, on the outer side of the upper support bracket 17A, there is a hanging piece 17E that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12A, and a mounting hole 17D (see FIG. 18A) is also drilled in the hanging piece 17E. By fixing the mounting hole 17D and the mounting hole 12C with mounting screws 17B, the upper support bracket 17A and the side frame plate 12A are fixed, and the upper frame plate 10A and the side frame plate 12A are fixed. The upper support fitting 17A is connected. On the other hand, the lower support bracket 18A is fixed by the mounting screw 18B in a state where the mounting hole 12D and the mounting hole 18C of the side frame plate 12A coincide with each other as described above, and further, the middle of the horizontal plane of the lower support bracket 18A. By inserting a mounting screw 18E into a mounting hole 18D drilled in the bottom, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6A via the decorated 6B.

  In the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment configured as described above, by connecting the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the side frame plates 12A, 13A, which are the constituent members, with the connecting member 14A, Compared with what was connected with the corner metal fittings 14-16 like the outer frame 2 which concerns on 1st Embodiment, 14 A of connecting members are closely_contact | adhered to the inner surface of side frame board 12A, 13A, and it is connected with 14A of connecting members. Since the upper frame plate 10 </ b> A and the lower frame plate 11 </ b> A are fastened in an engaged state, the frame can be formed into a strong and strong rectangular frame. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 14A with the upper frame plate 10A and the lower frame plate 11A, when the connecting member 14A is attached to the side frame plates 12A and 13A, the left and right sides of the connecting member 14A are lowered by one step in the groove 12F. Since one of the portions is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 14A to the side frame plates 12A and 13A is strengthened, which can improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done. Further, when the upper support plate 17A is attached to a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the side frame plates 12A and 13A are connected by the connecting member 14A, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10A, 11A, 12A, 13A, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a pachinko island platform (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 18A is attached, the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6A and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 18A are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 18, a lock member 25 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 17A for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, the support protruding piece 19A of the upper support fitting 17A is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 19A. A drooping wall 19B is formed. The hanging wall 19B can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 19A of the upper support fitting 17A, improve the appearance so that the lock member 25 described below is not visible when viewed from the front, and Then, the lock member 25 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 25 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 19A. Further, the support hole 20A formed in the support protruding piece 19A is bent and formed so as to be inclined slightly from the opposite side where the hanging wall 19B is not formed to the inside and further toward the center of the tip. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20 </ b> A is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 153. Further, the above-described hanging wall 19B is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 19A and the upper support fitting 17A from the front end of the support pothole 20A, and the support pothole 20A. A stop drooping portion 19 </ b> C is formed by being bent inward at an entrance end portion in front of. Further, a mounting hole 19D is formed in the approximate center of the support protruding piece 19A, and a lock member 25 is rotatably supported by a rivet 26 in the mounting hole 19D. The lock member 25 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 25a and the operation portion 25b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 25c is integrally extended on the opposite side to the operation portion 25b. It is installed. An attachment hole 25d through which the rivet 26 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 25a and the operation portion 25b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 25 is attached to the attachment hole 19D by the rivet 26 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support projecting piece 19A, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner surface of the hanging wall 19B, and the stopper portion 25a closes the inclined hole portion of the supporting saddle hole 20A. At this time, the tip portion of the stopper portion 25a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support metal 152 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20A.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 153 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20A, and the tip side of the stopper portion 25a faces the stop hanging portion 19C at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 25a and the stop hanging portion 19C, the support hole 20A is bent and formed. The centers of the shaft support pin 153 and the tip end surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are in a state of facing each other in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 153 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hole 20A. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a, no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the lock member 25 is formed in an arc shape so as to smoothly rotate when the distal end surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a is rotated by operating the operation portion 25b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 25e is the center of the rivet 26 (the rotation center of the lock member 25). For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 153 is removed along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 25e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 25e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 153 and the arcuate tip end surface 25e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 153 and the support rod hole 20A Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 26 (the rotation center of the lock member 25) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 25 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 25a in the direction away from the support protruding piece 19A (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 153 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 25a of the lock member 25 and the support flange 20A. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole Holding the state. Therefore, the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state in which the acting force of the shaft support pin 153 is applied to the lock member 25, and is elastically formed integrally with a synthetic resin. Plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 25c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 153 can be prevented from dropping from the support bore 20A over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 25a of the lock member 25 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 19A (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 25a. Does not rotate in such a direction as to come into contact with the stop drooping portion 19C and further disengage, the lock member 25 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 19A.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 19A, the center of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a is the center of the rivet 26 (the center of rotation of the lock member 25). Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 25 even when the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 25f of the portion 25a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 26 of the lock member 25 is set to the inside of the support projecting piece 19A, the shaft support pin 153 is inclined to the support hole 20A. When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming out along the inclination of the hole and contacts the arcuate tip surface 25f, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support pin 153 and the arcuate tip surface 25f. It acts on the contact portion between the component force F1 acting on the contact portion (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 25f) and the shaft support pin 153 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A. In the case of dividing into the component force F2, a rotation moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 25 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Even if the lock member 25 rotates, the stopper portion 25a Since one side of the tip only abuts against the stop drooping portion 19C, the lock member 25 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 19A, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25. .

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B is that the acting force in the direction in which the shaft support pin 153 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A. When F is applied and comes into contact with the end faces 25e and 25f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 25 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pivot pin 153 and the end faces 2525e and 25f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 26) of the lock member 25 at a position where no rotation occurs or at a position where a rotation moment is generated where the tip of the lock member 25 rotates toward the outside of the support protruding piece 19A. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 at all times, and even if the lock member 25 rotates, one side of the front end of the stopper portion 25a stops. Since only it abuts against the part 19C, the lock member 25 nor protrudes to the outside of the support projecting piece 19A. Even if the shape of the distal end surface of the stopper portion 25a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 25 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 19A. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 25 (the axis fixed by the rivet 26) at a position where the rotation moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 25 does not protrude outside the supporting projection piece 19A because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 25a abuts against the stop drooping portion 19C even when the rotation 25 is rotated. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 25 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2A so as to be openable and closable, the support protrusion 21A of the lower support bracket 18A is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 155 (see FIG. 38) of the main body frame 3. It must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support bracket 152 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 25a of the lock member 25, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 20 (B), the lock member 25 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 25c, so that the shaft support pin 153 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20A. When the pivot pin 153 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A, as shown in FIG. 20C, the pivot pin 153 and the distal end side surface of the stopper portion 25a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 25 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 25c and rotates clockwise, and the stopper portion 25a of the lock member 25 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20A. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 25a faces the shaft support pin 153 so that the shaft support pin 153 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20A. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 153 from the support hole 20A, as shown in FIG. 20 (E), the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 19A, and the operation portion 25b of the lock member 25 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 25 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 25c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 25a is retracted from the support rod hole 20A. It can be taken out from the hole 20A. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 can be detached from the outer frame 2A by releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 155 and the support protrusions 21A of the lower support fitting 18A. .

As described above, in the lock member 25 provided on the upper support fitting 17A of the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 25a, the operation portion 25b, and the elastic piece 25c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 17A, and since it has an extremely simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivot pin 153 comes off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 25e and 25f, the pivot pin 153 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 25 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 2525e and 25f, or the front end portion of the lock member 25 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 19A. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 25 (the axis fixed by the rivet 26) at the position where the rotational moment is generated, the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 is not constantly loaded, and is integrated with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 25c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 153 from dropping from the support bore 20A over a long period of time. With wear, the lock member 25 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 25a also rotates and abuts against the stop suspended portion 19C, the lock member 25 nor protrudes to the outside of the support projecting piece 19A. Although not described in detail, the lock member 25 is also applied as it is to the upper support fitting 17 of the outer frame 2 according to the first embodiment.
[1-2. Door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 2 and FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame 5 and the glass unit 50 separated from each other, and FIG. 23 is detachable from the door frame 5. FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a manufacturing process of the glass unit 50 to be attached, FIG. 24 is an enlarged perspective view of a desiccant insertion portion of the glass unit 50, and FIG. 25 is a side view (A) of the completed glass unit 50; FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 25B (A) and a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 70 to which the door frame 5 is attached. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion 71 and the joint unit 90 constituting the handle device 70, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of 71, and FIG. FIG. 31 is an operation view for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion 71 and the joint unit 90, and FIG. 32 is a handle device 70. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a state in which the handle device 70 and the hitting ball launching device 300 are connected to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 4, the door frame 5 is formed in a square shape, a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 42 is formed on the upper portion thereof, and a storage tray 30 is provided on the lower front surface of the gaming window 42, An operation handle 71 constituting the handle device 70 is protruded and fixed on one side (open side) of the storage tray 30, and the balls stored on the lower side of the storage tray 30 are discharged to a receiving box (dollar box) not shown. A ball discharge button 30a is provided. Further, a glass unit 50 as a transparent plate unit is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 so as to close the gaming window 42, and a joint unit constituting the handle device 70 on the back surface corresponding to the operation handle portion 71. 90 is also attached. In addition, although the detailed structure about the glass unit 50 and the handle apparatus 70 is explained in full detail later, the whole structure of the door frame 5 is demonstrated below.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the door frame 5 includes an upper opening / closing bracket 32 and a lower opening / closing bracket 33 provided on one side of the door frame 5, and a door shaft support hole 154 (see FIG. 38) of the upper shaft support bracket 152 of the main body frame 3. It is inserted and supported in a shaft support hole 157 (see FIG. 38) of the door support plate 156, and is supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. For this reason, the upper opening / closing bracket 32 is provided with a sliding shaft support pin (not shown) inserted into the door shaft supporting hole 154 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 has a shaft supporting hole 157. A shaft pin (not shown) inserted through is projected downward. Thus, in order to attach the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, the shaft pin of the lower opening / closing bracket 33 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the shaft support hole 157 of the door support plate 156 of the main body frame 3, and then the upper and lower of the door plate is opened and closed. In a state where the sliding shaft support pin of the metal fitting 32 is slid downward, the sliding shaft support pin is slid upward (usually a spring) so as to coincide with the door shaft support hole 154 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 152 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the storage tray 30 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is different from a conventional pachinko gaming machine and corresponds to a single tray (a conventional so-called “upper plate”) below the gaming window 42. ), The storage tray itself can be positioned lower than in the prior art. For this reason, the dimension of the up-down direction of the game window 42 can also be enlarged. Further, as described above, the door frame 5 is formed to have substantially the same width as the left and right widths of the main body frame 3, so that the size of the gaming window 42 in the left and right direction can also be increased. That is, since the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the game window 42 can be formed large, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the game area 255 of the game board 4 that can be seen through the game window 42 are also increased. Can do. An effect selection switch 31 that can be operated when the game content realized by the gaming device provided on the game board 4 is of the player participation type is provided almost in front of the storage tray 30. Further, the storage tray 30, the game window 42 on the front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 are covered with a lamp cover or a decorative plate incorporating door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h for providing a game effect. ing. The lamp cover and the decorative plate are formed with irregularities as shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, iron reinforcing plates 35 to 38 are fixed to the rear surface of the door frame 5 along a rectangular outer periphery. Speakers 34 are fixedly attached to the speaker box at both lower ends of the upper reinforcing plate 35 attached to the upper back surface, and the lower reinforcing plate 36 attached to the lower back surface is attached to the lower reinforcing plate 36 directly below the game window 42. A prize ball opening 39 is established on the branch side. The prize ball port 39 is for letting out the prize balls discharged in communication with an outlet 536 (see FIG. 70) of the full tank unit 520 described later to the storage tray 30. Further, the side reinforcing plate 37 attached to the open side rear surface is attached from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the rear surface of the door frame 5, and hook locking pieces 37 a are formed at the upper portion, the central portion, and the lower portion thereof. Yes. The hook locking piece 37a engages with a glass door hook 601 (see FIG. 86) of the locking device 560, which will be described in detail later, and locks the main body frame 3 of the door frame 5. Further, the side reinforcing plate 38 attached to the rear surface of the pivot support side is also attached from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the rear surface of the door frame 5, the upper opening / closing bracket 32 at the upper end portion, and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 at the lower end portion. Is fixed. The reinforcing plates 35 to 38 also serve as a ground connection plate that removes noise and the like due to electrostatic discharge from the sphere stored in the storage tray 30 from the door frame 5. Specifically, since the reinforcing plates 35 to 38 are made of iron and are electrically connected, the noise that has entered the reinforcing plates 35 to 38 is caused by the upper opening metal fittings of the side reinforcing plates 38. 32 and the lower opening metal fitting 33. As described above, the upper opening / closing bracket 32 and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 include the door shaft support hole 154 (see FIG. 38) of the upper shaft support bracket 152 of the main body frame 3 and the shaft support hole 157 of the door support plate 156 (see FIG. 38). ) Is supported by insertion. For this reason, noise that has entered the strong plates 35 to 38 is transmitted to the upper shaft support bracket 152 and the door support plate 156 of the main body frame 3 via the upper opening metal fitting 32 and the lower opening metal fitting 33 of the side reinforcing plate 38. A grounding connector 690 (see FIG. 96) of a power supply board 686, which will be described later, is grounded to the outside.

Further, on the back surface of the door frame 5, a glass stop lever 43 for attaching a glass unit 50 as a transparent plate unit, a positioning projection 44, and a hook recess 45 are formed, and a cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 is inserted. And a hitting ball supply port 40 to which a hitting ball that flows down in a line on the downstream side of the storage tray 30 is supplied, and is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 40 below the hitting ball supply port 40 Supply swing pieces 41 for supplying the hit balls one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 164 described later are respectively formed or provided. As shown in FIG. 21, the glass stop lever 43 is provided below the installation positions of the left and right speakers 34, and is provided so that the upper end is fixed with a screw and rotated. As shown in FIG. 22, the lower portion where the shaft is supported is formed in a concave shape so that a stopper piece 52 of the glass unit 50 to be described below is fitted, and is formed in the stopper piece 52 in the concave portion. A positioning protrusion 44 that engages with the positioning hole 53 is provided. In addition, the latching recess 45 is formed in an L shape with the upper part opened to the left and right of the lower part of the game window 42, and the latching protrusion piece 54 of the glass unit 50 is inserted from above and engaged. . Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the key hole 46 is formed on the open side and below the lower reinforcing plate 36. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 2, the front end surface of the cylinder lock 570 of the locking device 560 faces the key hole 46, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. In this case, the cylinder lock 570 is positioned away from the key hole 46 as shown in FIG. Further, the supply swinging piece 41 comes into contact with an operating piece 308 (see FIG. 50) provided in the hitting ball launching device 300 described later, and from the hitting ball supply port 40 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball 336 of the hitting ball launching device 300. The supplied hit ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 164.
[1-2-1. Transparent plate unit (glass unit)]
Next, the glass unit 50 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 23, the glass unit 50 includes two annular hexagonal unit frames 51 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 42, and two on the front and rear surfaces of the outer periphery of the opening of the unit frame 51. It is comprised by adhere | attaching the glass plate 60 (It may be not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate.) As a transparent plate of this. First, the unit frame 51 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 22, stop pieces 52 in which positioning holes 53 are formed projectingly toward the outside of the ring on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the unit frame 51, On the left and right sides of the lower portion, latching protrusions 54 are formed so as to protrude toward the outside of the ring. The stopper piece 52 and the latching protrusion piece 54 are for attaching the glass unit 50 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a glass contact step 55 for fitting the glass plate 60 is provided around the outer peripheral front and back surface portions of the unit frame 51. When 60 is bonded with an adhesive (hot melt adhesive), the two glass plates 60 are accommodated within the width dimension of the unit frame 51. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the unit frame 51 has a desiccant-filling space 56 for enclosing the desiccant 57 therein, and a lower side of one side so as to communicate with the inner peripheral surface of the unit frame 51. An open / close lid 59 formed so as to protrude outwardly in a ring shape and formed with a number of vent holes 59b to close the desiccant-containing space 56 is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the unit frame 51 with a locking claw 59a. Can be attached detachably. Further, a single air hole 58 communicating with the outside is formed in the desiccant enclosing space portion 56. The desiccant enclosing space 56 may be formed so as to protrude to the outside of the annular unit frame 51 at any part of the diagonal left, right, upper and lower parts excluding the upper, lower, left and right parts.

  Thus, to assemble the glass unit 50, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), the desiccant 57 is enclosed in the desiccant enclosure space 56 of the unit frame 51, and then, as shown in FIG. 23 (B). In order to close the desiccant enclosing space portion 56, the opening / closing lid 59 is inserted from the inner peripheral surface side of the unit frame 51 to lock the locking claw 59a. Further, as shown in FIG. The glass plate 60 is bonded and adhered to the glass contact step 55 from both sides of the frame 51 with an adhesive. When the second glass plate 60 is bonded, the air in the sealed space sandwiched between the two glass plates 60 passes through the vent hole 59b of the opening / closing lid 59, the desiccant enclosing space portion 56, and the air hole 58. Since it escapes to the outside, the bonding operation of the second glass plate 60 can be easily performed without being affected by the pressure of the air in the sealed space sandwiched between the two glass plates 60. Finally, FIG. As shown to (D), the glass unit 50 which integrated the two glass plates 60 can be assembled | attached easily. When it is necessary to completely seal the desiccant-enclosed space 56 and the sealed space formed by the two glass plates 60, the sealed state can be obtained by a simple operation of simply sealing the small air hole 58. Can be completed. Instead of sealing the air hole 58, a valve through which air flows only in one direction from the space portion of the two glasses to the outside may be provided in the air hole 58.

  In order to attach the glass unit 50 assembled as described above to the door frame 5, the latching protrusion 54 of the glass unit 50 is latched on the latching recess 45 of the door frame 5 from above, and then the glass unit 50. While the positioning hole 53 formed in the stopper piece 52 is inserted into the positioning protrusion 44 protruding from the concave portion of the main body frame 5, the stopper piece 52 and the concave portion are matched, and the glass stopper lever 43 is turned to the closed position. It moves and presses the back surface of the stop piece 52. Thereby, the glass unit 50 can be easily attached to the back surface of the door frame 5. Note that when the glass stopper lever 43 is rotated to the closed position, a recess (not shown) formed on the back surface of the glass stopper lever 43 and the tip of the positioning protrusion 44 are engaged. Conversely, when removing the glass unit 50, the glass stopper lever 43 is rotated to the open position, and then the upper portion of the glass unit 50 is moved rearward so as to remove the positioning hole 53 from the positioning projection 44, and then the glass By lifting the entire unit 50 upward, the latching protrusion 54 can be removed from the latching recess 45 and the glass unit 50 can be easily detached from the door frame 5.

  As described in detail above, the glass unit 50 as the transparent plate unit in the present embodiment encloses the desiccant 57 in the desiccant enclosure space 56 of the unit frame 51 in advance, and then attaches the glass plate 60 to the unit frame 51. Since it can be assembled simply by sticking to both sides with an adhesive, after attaching the glass plate to the unit frame as before, the desiccant is inserted into the unit frame from the outside to seal the periphery of the desiccant insertion port Compared to the structure, since only the very small air holes 58 need to be sealed even when sealed, the glass unit 50 can be manufactured easily, and the productivity of the glass unit 50 is improved. is there. In this case, since the desiccant enclosing space 56 is integrally formed so as to protrude to the outside of the annular unit frame 51, it is not necessary to prepare a specially shaped glass plate, and is extremely versatile. A high glass unit 50 can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the vent hole 59b is formed in a small component such as the opening / closing lid 59 as compared with the conventional case where the vent hole is formed in the unit frame itself, the molding is easy and after molding. Even if the granular desiccant 57 is enclosed in the desiccant enclosing space 56, the air desiccant 57 is sealed by the two glass plates 60. It does not fall into space.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the desiccant enclosing space portion 56 is formed so as to protrude to the outside of the ring at any part of the diagonal left and right upper and lower parts excluding the upper and lower left and right parts of the annular unit frame 51. In addition, the desiccant-filled space 56 can be disposed in a region that is not used as the gaming window 42 in the diagonally left, right, upper and lower parts of the gaming window 42 that is generally formed in a circular shape, and as a result, the gaming window 42 is formed larger. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the glass unit 50 is attached to the door frame 5, the latching protrusions 54 formed on the left and right sides of the unit frame 51 are inserted into the latching recesses 45 of the door frame 5. The positioning holes 53 of the stopper pieces 52 formed on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the frame 51 can be attached by a simple operation of engaging the positioning protrusions 44 of the door frame 5 and rotating the glass stopper lever 43.
[1-2-2. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 70 attached to the lower part of the open side of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle device 70 is assembled to the operation handle portion 71 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 71, and according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 71. It is composed of a joint unit 90 that is linked to the rotating shaft 75 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 75 into a slide motion.

  First, as shown in FIG. 27, the operation handle portion 71 is protruded from a decorative plate (for example, a decorative plate that is also used as an outer component plate of the storage tray 30) that constitutes the front surface of the door frame 5. It is inserted into and fixed to the cylindrical handle support cylinder 5a. The handle support cylinder portion 5a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the operation handle portion inserted into the handle support cylinder portion 5a is fixed. 71 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined so as to be directed to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 5. In this way, by tilting the operation handle portion 71 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 71, and the rotation operation is not uncomfortable and the rotation operation is easy. In this embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 71 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 75 of the operation handle portion 71 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 300 The structure which can adjust is adopted. After the operation handle portion 71 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 5a, the handle support tube portion 5a and the operation handle portion 71 (more precisely, the rear grip portion 73) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 71 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 5a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the operation handle portion 71 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front grip member 72, the rear grip member 73, and the front grip member 72 and the rear grip member 73. The operation member 74 includes a rotation shaft 75 having a linear cylindrical shape whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 74, and a cam 76 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 75. The rear grip member 73 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 5a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole through which the rotation shaft 75 passes is formed at the center. 78 is formed. When the rotating shaft 75 is inserted into the shaft through hole 78, the bearing bush 77 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 78, and the rotating shaft 75 is inserted into the bearing bush 77. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 75 that is passed through the shaft through hole 78 via the bearing bush 77 passes through the bearing hole 84 of the fixed bearing member 83 that is fixed to the front side of the rear gripping member 73, and the center of the rotation operation unit 74. Is fitted into a shaft fitting hole 86 formed in

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 73, there are provided a touch switch 80, a firing stop switch 82, a protrusion and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the hook 88, and the single button 81 is swingable. A swing pin (not shown) to be supported is formed, and a touch switch 80, a firing stop switch 82, a hook 88 and a single button 81 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes and swing pins. In addition, a wiring through hole 79 formed on the side of the shaft through hole 78 of the rear gripping member 73 by collecting the wiring from the touch switch 80 and the firing stop switch 82 with the hook 88 in a state where they are attached, which will be described later. It is led out from the wiring through cylinder member 108 (see FIG. 27) and the wiring opening 100 (see FIG. 30) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 71a (see FIG. 32). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 71a is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board described later. In addition, an urging spring 85 is provided between the fixed bearing member 83 and the rotation operation member 74 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 75. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 87 is provided on the outside of the shaft fitting hole 86 of the rotation operation member 74, and the switch contact is made when the rotation operation member 74 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 85. When the projection 87 comes into contact with the actuator of the firing stop switch 82 to turn off the firing stop switch 82 and the turning operation member 74 is turned by the player, the switch contact protrusion 87 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 82. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 81 can be swung while the firing stop switch 82 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 82 can be turned OFF by pressing the single button 81. ing. It should be noted that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 74 is subjected to conductive plating so that the touch switch 80 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 74. Then, when the player rotates the turning operation member 74 and the firing stop switch 82 is turned on and the touch switch 80 detects contact, a firing motor 344 (to be described later) of the ball striking device 300 (see FIG. 51). Is driven to rotate.

  The cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and a cam contact portion of a slide body 93 (see FIGS. 30 and 31) of the joint unit 90 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 75. 107 is pressed and slid in one direction. In the present embodiment, the operation handle 71 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 and the slide body 93 of the joint unit 90. It is possible.

  Then, the joint unit 90 which is the other component of the handle device 70 connected to the operation handle portion 71 will be described next. As shown in FIG. 30, the joint unit 90 includes a storage body 91, a slide body 93 stored in the storage body 91 and slidable in the lateral direction, and a storage body in a state in which the slide body 93 is stored. And a cover body 92 covering the front surface of 91.

  The storage body 91 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose front surface is open, and a cam insertion opening 94 is formed on the rear surface thereof. In addition, two mounting boss holes 95 for attaching the joint unit 90 to the back surface of the door frame 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the housing 91 so as to protrude outward, and the cover body 92 is formed on both the left and right sides. A mounting hole 96 for mounting is attached to the outside. Further, the inner side surfaces of the upper side and the lower side of the container 91 are in contact with the outer side surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 93 so that the slide body 93 can move smoothly. (In FIG. 30B, only the lower-side abutment convex portion 97 is shown, and the upper-side abutment convex portion 97 is not shown).

  The cover body 92 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with an open rear surface, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 104 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 93 is inserted on the front surface thereof to guide the movement of the slide body 93. Two guide horizontal grooves 98, an insertion horizontal hole 99 through which the slide protrusion 102 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 93 is inserted, and a rear end of the rear grip member 73 of the operation handle portion 71. A wiring opening 100 is formed in which the rear end portion of the wiring through cylinder member 108 inserted from the insertion opening 94 faces. Further, mounting holes 101 corresponding to the mounting holes 96 of the housing 91 are formed on the left and right sides of the cover body 92, and screws (not shown) are attached in a state where the mounting holes 96 and 101 are in correspondence with each other. The cover body 92 can be attached to the storage body 91 by being fastened.

  Further, a slide body 93 that is housed in a space formed by the housing body 91 and the cover body 92 so as to be movable in the left-right direction is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a smaller rear surface than the housing body 91. On the front surface of the front wall, two guide projections 104 inserted into the guide lateral groove 98 and a slide projection piece 102 inserted through the insertion lateral hole 99 project. The slide projecting piece 102 is formed in a thin plate shape, and the traveling direction at the time of sliding is an inclined side 103. In addition, a cylindrical member through opening 105 through which the wiring through cylindrical member 108 passes is formed between the two guide protrusions 104 in the front wall of the slide body 93. The tubular member through-opening 105 is a horizontally long rectangular opening so that the wiring through tubular member 108 in a fixed state does not interfere with the sliding of the slide body 93. On the other hand, on the back surface of the front wall of the slide body 93, a cam engaging recess 106 in which a cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 is housed is formed in an inverted L shape by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engaging recess 106 is formed as an arc-shaped rib so that the cam engaging recess 106 protrudes into the cam engaging recess 106, and the cam contact part 107 that abuts the cam 76. It has become.

  To assemble the storage body 91, the slide body 93, and the cover body 92 described above, the slide body 93 is stored in the storage body 91, and the cover body 92 is covered from the front in that state. When covering, the guide protrusion 104 is covered so as to pass through the guide lateral groove 98 and the slide protrusion 102 is inserted through the insertion lateral hole 99. After the covering, the mounting holes 101 and 96 are screwed with screws, and the assembly of the joint unit 90 is completed with the slide body 93 housed inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 32, the joint unit 90 assembled as described above is attached to the mounting recess 110 (see FIG. 6) formed corresponding to the mounting position of the operation handle portion 71 on the back surface of the door frame 5. And the mounting boss hole 95 is screwed with a screw or the like to attach the joint unit 90 to the door frame 5.

  As described above, the operation handle 71 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder 5a, and the joint unit 90 is attached to the mounting recess 110 from the back side of the door frame 5, thereby FIG. As shown, the cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 is housed in the cam engaging recess 106 of the slide body 93. In this case, the operation handle portion 71 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 76 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the engagement recess 106 is a predetermined space in the front-rear direction. Since it has a width, the entire inclined cam 76 can be accommodated in the space of the engaging recess 106. Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, the retracted state is such that the rotation center of the cam 76 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 107 and the tip of the slanted cam 76 is below the cam engagement recess 106. It is located in the space.

  Accordingly, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71, the rotation shaft 75 rotates and the cam 76 rotates accordingly. As shown in FIG. The slide body 93 is moved in one direction (in the case of FIG. 31, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 107 of the engagement recess 106 and one outer surface of the cam 76 (the outer surface in front of the rotation). Move the slide. That is, the rotational movement of the rotary shaft 75 is converted into the sliding movement of the slide body 93. Therefore, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 76 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide projecting piece 102 of the slide body 93 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 102 of the joint unit 90 is transmitted to the slide member 350 of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 90 and the ball hitting device 300 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 300 is described.

The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 71 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 79, the wiring through cylinder member 108, and the wiring opening 100 is supported along the lower side of the back surface of the door frame 5. And then connected to the operation handle terminal 724 (see FIG. 96) of the payout control board 715 that is attached to the board unit 650 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3.
[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and the hitting ball launching device 300, a prize ball tank 400 for dispensing a prize ball, a tank rail member 410, a ball path unit 420, and a prize ball unit 450. And the full unit 520, the locking device 560 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the electrical provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4. About the main body frame 3 on which various components such as a substrate unit 650 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling the components are collectively provided, a cover body 750 that covers the rear opening 222, and the like are mounted. This will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the main body frame 3 itself on which the above-described various components are mounted will be described. 34 is a front view of the main body frame 3 before attaching the components, FIG. 35 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 before attaching the components, and FIG. 36 is a side view of the main body frame 3 before attaching the components. FIG. 37 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 before attaching the parts, FIG. 38 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached, and FIG. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front, FIG. 40 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached, and FIG. 42 is a perspective view of the attached main body frame 3 as viewed from the back, and FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko gaming machine cut along the horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game control board box 268 portion).

  In FIG. 34, shafts for attaching an upper shaft support bracket 152 and a lower shaft support bracket 158 (both see FIG. 38) for opening and closing the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 on one side of the body frame 3 are shown. In the state in which the bracket mounting step portions 150 and 151 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 152 and the lower shaft bracket 158 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 150 and 151, the upper side and the side sides of the main body frame 3 are the upper side. The upper and side sides of the shaft support bracket 152 are substantially flush with each other, and the lower side and side sides of the main body frame 3 are substantially flush with the lower side and side sides of the lower shaft support bracket 158 (see FIG. 40). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 152 and the lower shaft support bracket 158 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 40. The upper shaft support bracket 152 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 153 is erected and fixed to the upper surface protruding forward, and the side of the shaft pin 153 A door shaft support hole 154 is formed in the door. On the other hand, the lower shaft support fitting 158 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame 3 and two support plates 155 and 156 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly above. The support plate 155 positioned below constitutes a frame support plate 155 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 155 of the outer frame 2. The support plate 156 positioned above the A door support plate 156 for supporting the lower opening / closing metal fitting 33 on the main body frame 3 is constituted. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 21 of the lower support bracket 18 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 155, and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 of the door frame 5 is formed on the door support plate 156. A shaft support hole 157 for inserting a projecting shaft pin (not shown) is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 159 for installing the game board 4 (see FIG. 38). A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 159 is a plate portion 160. First, the configuration of the plate portion 160 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 160 is a game board placement part 161 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 161 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 161. A passage support protrusion 162 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 256 (see FIG. 43) formed in the game board 4 when placed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34, a rail mounting boss 163 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 160 toward the end on the open side at a predetermined interval, and the firing rail 164 ( 38) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 165 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 160 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 164, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 159, the inner running of the game board 4 is performed. It is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 259 (see FIG. 43) which is the downstream end of the surface 252. Further, at the side position of the rail connecting member 165 (position opposite to the firing rail 164), the upper end of the elliptical game board fixture 168 (see FIG. 38) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixture mounting boss 166 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 167 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 168 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 166, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 161 to play the game. The board fixture 168 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Moreover, when removing a game board, it can carry out simply by turning the game board fixing tool 168 counterclockwise and removing. In this case, the game board fixing tool 168 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 167.

  Further, the lower portion of the open side of the plate portion 160 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launcher mounting portion 169 that protrudes in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). The ball striking device 300 is fixed to the mounting portion 169 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 172 for accommodating a slide member 350 (see FIG. 55) associated with the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 169 described above. A shaft hole 178 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 172 so that the end face of the bearing 338 (see FIG. 51) of the ball striking rod 336 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 169 is formed with a notch-penetrating opening 171 for projecting the hitting ball basket 336 of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300 upward. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 170 through which the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35, the back surface of the plate portion 160 is formed with a ball discharge passage 173 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the center portion of the plate portion 160 and then goes downward. . The ball discharge passage 173 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball discharge connection passage 515 (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, from below the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inside of the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 174 protrudes rearward above the launcher mounting portion 169 described above, and a guide hole 675 (see FIG. 92) of a substrate unit 650 described later is inserted into the guide protrusion 174. This facilitates the mounting of the board unit 650. In addition, attachment holes 175 for attaching the board unit 650 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 160, and the attachment pieces 671 of the board unit 650 are associated with the attachment holes 175 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 177 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 300 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 169, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown, when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion having a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while abutting against the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6. A piece 176 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 160 is provided with a ball removal connection opening 179 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 173 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 515 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 179. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 179 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 180 for mounting a full unit 520 (see FIG. 38), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 160. A unit engagement groove 181 that engages with an engagement piece 539 (see FIG. 72) of the full tank unit 520 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 180. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 536 of the full tank unit 520 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 160 in front of the full tank unit mounting part 180. An opening / closing device 224 is provided. Although the outlet opening / closing device 224 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door frame 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 536. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 520 do not fall down from the outlet 536.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 159 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 38, the gaming board installation recess 159 has a front side face part that does not accommodate the game board 4 in the upper side part and a part of the open side, and the upper side part. In the open side, there are three upper, middle, and lower door hook holes 199 through which the glass door hook 601 of the lock device 560 penetrates. In other words, the lock device 560 is fixed to the back surface of the heel surface portion on the open side.

  Thus, the game board installation recess 159 includes a first side wall 190 provided around the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the upper side portion and the open side surface portion on the open side, and a rear side from the first side wall 190. A second side wall 191 provided around, a third side wall 192 provided rearward from the second side wall 191, and a fourth side wall 193 provided rearward from the third side wall 192; Thus, the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape. The first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 are formed so that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) extend straight backward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 5) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 190 toward the fourth side wall 193. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 194 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 on the left side (open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 190 to the fourth side wall 193 on the open side are smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done. At the same time, the lock device 560 is attached along the first side wall 190 on the open side, and the attachment is performed using a lock attachment hole 198 (see FIG. 35) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 190. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 198, the fourth side wall 194 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 190 on the open side. Further, the step size between the first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 must be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 to be described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 191 to the fourth side wall 193 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  The side walls 190 to 193 described above are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, d4, respectively, as shown in FIG. 36. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 190 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 191, third side wall 192, and fourth side wall 193. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated. That is, the first side wall 190 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 191 to the fourth side wall 193 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts and extends rearward from the first side wall 190 substantially in parallel with the first side wall 190 and accommodates a rearward protruding portion of the gaming device provided in the game board 4 It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 191 to the fourth side wall 193 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be substantially at the same position as the rear wall 400b of the storage part for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 400. Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 191, the third side wall 192, and the fourth side wall 193 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 37, the left rear wall 194, the upper rear wall 195, and the right rear wall are located on the left side, the upper side, and the right side when viewed from the rear side from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 193. The rear wall 196 protrudes inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The front surface of the right rear wall 196 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 34), and a ball path unit 420 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 450 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface thereof. It has become. Therefore, it is sufficient for the protruding width to the inside of the right rear wall 196 to have a width for attaching the ball path unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450. Further, the upper rear wall 195 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 34), and a tank rail member 410 (to be described later) is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 195, so that the lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the width of the protrusion to the inside of the upper rear wall 195 to be the height width of the tank rail member 410 attached in an inclined manner. Further, the front surface of the right rear wall 914 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 34), and a cover body support cylinder portion 220 that pivotally supports a cover body 750 described later is formed on the rear surface. Therefore, it is sufficient that the projecting width to the inside of the right rear wall 194 has a width dimension that forms the cover body supporting cylinder portion 220.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the left rear wall 194, the upper rear wall 195, and the right rear wall 196 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 193 are formed in a flat plate shape, and this flat plate portion Corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, and as described above, the second side wall 191, the third side wall 192, and the fourth side wall 193 reach the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space to be formed is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the whole area of the gaming board 4 is attached, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device Can be stored easily. The inside of the left rear wall 194, the upper rear wall 195, and the right rear wall 196 is a rear opening 222, and the rear opening 222 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a cover body 750 described later. .

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 159 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 199 through which the glass door hook 601 of the lock device 560 penetrates is formed in the upper flat portion on the open side. The lower three places are opened, and a lock locking hole 198 (see FIG. 35) into which a locking projection 564 (to be described later) of the lock device 560 is engaged is further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 199. Is formed. Further, the lock device 560 is attached along the first side wall 190 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 197 (see FIG. 35) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 190. It is formed in the middle. It should be noted that the locking device 560 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws but also by a screw fixing hole 596 formed in a lock mounting piece 568 described later and a lock mounting hole formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 170 above. The lower part of the lock device 560 is also attached by fixing 208 with a screw.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 190, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 An abutting guide arc projection 202 protrudes, and a relief recess 201 communicating with a notch 401 of a prize ball tank 400, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 190. A tank mounting groove 200 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 191. When the mounting flange 407 of the prize ball tank 400 is attached to the tank attachment groove 200, the notch 401 of the prize ball tank 400 communicates with the escape recess 201 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. Further, when the prize ball tank 400 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 400b on the back side and the rear end side 193a of the fourth side wall 193 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 400 in plan view (see FIG. 5)). The guide arc projection 202 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2, and the lower front cover of the main body frame 3. This is to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with the plate 6 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  The above-described upper rear wall 195 is formed with rail locking grooves 203 for attaching the tank rail member 410 along the opening edge of the rear surface opening 222, and the fourth side wall 193 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 204 is formed in the bent portion of 195. The tank rail member 410 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 418 and 419 (see FIG. 59) of the tank rail member 410 in the rail locking grooves 203 and 204. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 205 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 195 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 410 is attached, and the tank rail member 410 is locked in the rail locking grooves 203 and 204. When the protruding pieces 418 and 419 are locked and the tank rail member 410 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 205 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 410 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top. When the tank rail member 410 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 205 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 203 and 204 and the locking protrusions 418 and 419. What is necessary is just to lift 410 upwards. Further, a clearance hole 206 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 205, and a ground wire connector 207 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 205. The escape hole 206 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 417 of the alignment gear 416 provided in the tank rail member 410, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 410. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, wiring connected to a ground connector 690 (see FIG. 96) provided on a power supply board 686 described later is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 37, vertical standing walls 210 are erected on the right rear wall 196 at both the left and right ends on the right rear wall 196, and the ball passage unit 420 is awarded between the standing walls 210. A ball unit 450 is attached. However, the standing wall 210 on the rear surface opening 222 side is formed only up to slightly above the notch 218 formed below the right rear wall 196, whereas the opposite standing wall 210 is on the side of the right rear wall 196. It is formed in an L shape from the side to the lower side.

  Also, a prize ball guide protrusion 211 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 210 to slightly above the middle stream part. The prize ball guide protrusion 211 corresponds to the ball path 422 (see FIG. 61) of the ball path unit 420 when the ball path unit 420 described later is attached, and guides the prize balls in a line. is there. In addition, a path unit mounting boss 212 for fixing the ball path unit 420 with screws and a positioning pin 226 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the winning ball guide projection 211, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 213 is provided so as to face 426 (see FIG. 61). The passage unit mounting boss 212 and the positioning pin 226 will be described in detail later.

  Further, an engagement protrusion 215 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 474 (see FIG. 61) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 450 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 210, A lock elastic claw 214 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 471 (see FIG. 61) of the prize ball unit 450 is formed, and the rotation shaft 458 (see FIG. 66) of the sprocket 457 of the prize ball unit 450 is formed. A relief hole 216 is formed to receive the end. A cutout opening 218 is formed below the right rear plate 196, and a payout motor 465, which is a four-phase stepping motor as a drive motor for the prize ball unit 450, faces the cutout opening 218. (See FIG. 38). The prize ball unit 450 then locks the lower end of the locking groove 219 formed at the lowermost lower end of the back surface of the right rear plate 196 and attaches to the right rear plate 196 by the engagement protrusion 215 and the locking elastic claw 214. It can be attached detachably. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later. In addition, a cover body abutting groove 217 into which the open side end of the cover body 750 enters is formed at the open end of the right rear wall 196.

  As described above, the configuration of the main body frame 3 including the game board installation concave portion 159 and the plate portion 160 has been described. In addition to the above description, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower ends of the walls 191, 192, 193 are configured as notched portions 221. As shown in FIG. 34, the positioning recesses of the game board 4 are arranged above and below the inner periphery of the first side wall 190 on the pivot support side. A board positioning protrusion 223 to which 261 (see FIG. 44) is engaged is formed, and an end of the game board stopper 260 provided on the game board 4 above and below the boundary between the flat part on the open side and the game board installation recess 159 A board stopper insertion hole 225 with which the parts are engaged is formed.

As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 300, the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, the ball path unit 420, the prize ball unit 450, the full tank unit 520, the lock device 560, and the board unit. 650 and the cover body 750 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.
[1-4. Game board]
The configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4, FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 45 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. Note that there are game boards 4 to which a function display unit described later is attached (see FIGS. 101 and 115).

  In FIG. 43, the game board 4 includes a substantially square veneer board 250 and a decorative frame 251 attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 so as to surround the game area 255. On the surface of the veneer board 250, a decorative plate called a decorative cell is affixed, and various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 255. After these gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the decorative frame 251 is attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250. The decorative frame 251 has a circular hollow shape so as to surround the periphery of the veneer board 250. The outer surface is formed in a shape that follows the outer shape of the veneer board 250, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper portion past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer sliding surface 252. An inner sliding surface 253 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 258 provided at the end of 252 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 254 of the upper stopper 258 is provided. The outer running surface 252 has a connecting passage portion 259 that is connected to a rail connecting member 165 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 164 at an initial end portion thereof, and is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 259. A foul port 257 is formed. Further, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer sliding surface 252 from the upstream end of the foul port 257 to the stop portion 258. The stopper 258 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hit ball hitting the inside of the game area 255 when the hit ball that has slid on the outer sliding surface 252 collides with force. The backflow prevention member 254 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken into the game area 255, from flowing back to the outer sliding surface 252 again.

  In addition, an out port 256 is provided at the lower center of the inner sliding surface 253, and the shot ball that is fired is played between the inner sliding surface 253 and the outer sliding surface 252 from the out port 256 to the backflow prevention member 254. Although it constitutes a guide passage that leads to the region 255, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer running surface 252 without reaching the game region 255 is taken into the foul port 257 and is entered into the foul ball entrance of the full tank unit 520 described later. It is guided to 538 and discharged to the storage tray 30 again. The game area 255 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner running surface 253.

  By the way, a positioning recess 261 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into the board positioning protrusion 223 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 260 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 225 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 260 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 225 when the game board stopper 260 is pushed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after the insertion of the positioning recess 261 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 223, the game board 4 as a whole is inserted. Is pushed into the first side wall 190 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 260 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 225 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixture 168 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with speaker cutouts 262 on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to accept the rearward protruding portions of the speakers 34 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A passage cutout 263 into which a part of the front guide passage 535 portion of the full tank unit 520 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the decorative frame 251, a certificate sticking unit 264 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, a winning is achieved by aligning and guiding the balls won in various gaming devices provided in the gaming area 255 (for example, a winning opening such as a big winning opening device or a general winning opening) on the downstream side. A liquid crystal control board 1750 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display 1315 as a display device disposed on the back surface of the winning space forming cover body 265 at substantially the center of the game area 255 is attached to the space forming cover body 265. An effect control board box 266 that houses a sub-integrated board for controlling various lamps, speakers 34, and the like is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 267 is fixed to the back side of the game board 4 below the winning space forming cover body 265. The board substrate holder 267 has a space portion (the width of the space portion in the front-rear direction is the width of the winning space forming cover body 265 so that the winning balls aligned and guided by the winning space forming cover body 265 are collected in front of the board substrate holder 267. The drop port 272 (see FIG. 42) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 272 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 256 and communicates with an out ball passage 668 (see FIG. 92) formed in the substrate unit 650 described later. The board substrate holder 267 has a game control board box 268 for storing a main control board for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 715 and a power supply board 686 (FIG. 97) provided in a board unit 650 described later. And a relay terminal plate 269 for connecting to the terminal. The relay terminal plate 269 is provided with drawer connectors 270 and 271 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 730 and 732 provided on the board unit 650 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3. The board substrate holder 267 is formed with a joining guide protrusion 273 that protrudes rearward so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 269 from between the drawer connectors 270 and 271. The joint guide protrusions 273 are provided on the drawer connectors 730 and 732 provided on the board unit 650 side and the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 270 and 271 are inserted into the joint guide holes 676 formed in the frame substrate holder 651 of the substrate unit 650 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 102). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

  The above-described game board 4 is housed and arranged in a game board installation recess 159 (see FIG. 38) surrounded by the first side wall 190 of the main body frame 3, and the main body frame is constituted by the game board stopper 260 and the game board fixing tool 168 and the like. 3 and the game board 4 can be detached from the main body frame 3 by simply releasing the fixation. In this case, a configuration for preventing unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 can be achieved by changing a part of the game board 4 and a part of the main body frame 3. This removal preventing mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4 incorporating the removal prevention mechanism, FIG. 48 is a partial perspective view of the main body frame 3 incorporating the removal prevention mechanism, and FIG. 49 is a removal prevention mechanism. It is an expansion perspective view of a part.

  First, as shown in FIG. 47, the anti-removal mechanism provided in the game board 4 is for mounting through the front and rear of the game board 4 at the lower end opposite to the passage notch part 263 below the game board 4. A notch 280 is formed (more precisely, the mounting notch 280 is formed in the decorative frame 251), and the fastening bar 281 is stretched and fixed horizontally below the mounting notch 280. The fastening bar 281 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 282 for latching a fastening band 283 described later at substantially the center thereof. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3 is a game board mounting portion 161 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 160 below the main body frame 3 and the firing rail 164. A fastening hole 185 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the launching portion, and a fastening linkage 186 for hanging the fastening band 283 is passed to a front portion of the fastening hole 185.

When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 159 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 49, the fastening bar 281 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 161. At the same time, the fastening portion 282 and the fastening linkage 186 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of the fastening band 283 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 281 is inserted into the passage notch 263 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 282 and the fastening linkage 186 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 185 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 283. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 283 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 283 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 260 and the game board fixture 168 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 283, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 283 unique to a pachinko parlor, a game It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.
[1-5. Hitting ball launcher]
The ball striking device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting ball launching apparatus 300, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor portion removed, and FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300, and FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hitting ball launcher 300 and the launching rail 164, and the perspective view (B) of the launching motor part, and FIG. 54 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 300 and the firing rail 164, and FIG. 54 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 300 and the firing rail 164 in a state where the operation handle portion 71 is operated. 55 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 350 provided in the ball hitting device 300 It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 300 pivotally supports the hitting ball rod 336 on the launching base frame 301 and attaches a shooting motor 344 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 336 to the firing base frame 301, and further hits the hitting ball rod 336. The firing base frame 301 includes a slide rod 326 and a slide member 350 that adjust the biasing force of the biasing spring 333 that applies the biasing force that returns to the initial position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, the launch base frame 301 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 38 of a ball striking rod 336 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 302 is formed, and rubber stopper members 303 and 304 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 336 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 303 and 304 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 336 when the hitting ball rod 336 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 333. A slide guide hole 305 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 301 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 164), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 305. 306 is formed. The slide guide hole 305 is provided with a guide locking piece 327 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 326, which will be described later, and guides the slide movement of the slide rod 326. The member 350 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 326 is guided by a guide bush 330 fixed to a guide hole 329 formed in front of the slide rod 326 in a stop hole 312 formed in the firing base frame 301 by a set screw 331. This is done by penetrating through. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a rectangular connection opening 314 is formed in the bottom surface of the slide storage space 306.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 301 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 301, and an operating piece opening 307 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 302. ing. The operating piece opening 307 has an operating piece 308 that contacts the supply swinging piece 41 provided facing the hitting ball supply port 40 on the downstream side of the storage tray 30 of the door frame 5. The mounting portion 310 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge is swingably provided by a stop pin 309. The actuating piece 308 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 309, and the base plate that rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 336 from the pivotal support portion to the lower arc portion. 339 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 342 projecting from 339, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 41 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball 336. Balls flowing out from the supply port 40 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 614.

  Further, on the firing base frame 301, motor mounting bosses 311 for fixing a motor cover 343 incorporating a firing motor 344 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a oscillating piece boss 313 into which a shaft hole 322 at the lower end of the oscillating piece 321 connected to the slide member 350 is slidably provided in the lower rear of the slide member storage space 306 is projected. Has been.

  In order to increase the rigidity of the hit ball launching device 300, the metal plate 315 is attached to the launch base frame 301 so as to be in close contact therewith. Therefore, the metal plate 315 has through holes 316, 317, 318a, 318b, 320 corresponding to the bearing tube 302, the lower rubber stopper member 303, the slide guide hole 305, the guide bush 330, and the swing piece boss 313, respectively. And a horizontally long elliptical through hole 319 through which the connecting convex portion 352 of the slide member 350 penetrates. In the metal plate 315 configured as described above, after the slide member 350 is stored in the slide member storage space 306, each of the through holes 316 to 320 passes through the corresponding members 302, 303, 305, 313, and 352, or It is fixed to the launch base frame 301 by being brought into close contact with the launch base frame 301 and screwed so as to match.

  The tip of the oscillating piece boss 313 of the firing base frame 301 to which the metal plate 315 is attached protrudes from the through hole 320, and the shaft hole 322 of the oscillating piece 321 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 321 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 51, the swing piece 321 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 322 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 352 of the slide member 350 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 323 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 323 serves as a contact portion 324 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 326. Thus, the rocking piece 321 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 313 and the connecting hole 323 is inserted into the connecting projection 352 of the slide member 350 protruding from the through hole 319 to connect the pin 325 with washer. The rocking piece 321 is attached to the firing base frame 301 by being fixed to the convex portion 352. The attached swing piece 321 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 350 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 326 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 315 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 327 protruding from the rear upper part of the slide rod 326 is engaged with the through hole 318a of the metal plate 315, and the guide elongated hole 329 formed in front of the slide rod 326 The guide bush 330 having the set screw 331 is passed through, and the set screw 331 is fixed to the set hole 312. The slide rod 326 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 301 via the metal plate 315 by the guide locking piece 327 and the through hole 318a, and the guide long hole 329 and the guide bush 330. The slide rod 326 has a contacted portion 328 that contacts the contact portion 324 of the swing piece 321 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 333 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 332 for projecting the locking ring 334 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 302 of the launch base frame 301 to which the metal plate 315 is attached protrudes from the through hole 316. The bearing cylinder 302 is fitted so that the bearing 338 of the hitting ball 336 does not fall off. The lower end of the hitting ball 336 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 338 and at the same time, the base plate 339 is fixed. The base plate 339 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 342 that abuts on the operating piece 308 on the front rear surface side thereof, and is used to latch the locking ring 335 at the other end of the biasing spring 333 on the front front surface. A spring locking portion 341 is provided in a protruding manner, and a motor abutting protrusion 340 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 346 of the firing motor 344 is provided on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin tip 337 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 336, and this tip 337 is a firing position formed by a lower end portion of the firing rail 164 and a firing position stopper 359 fixed above the tip. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, the firing motor 344 housed in the motor cover 343 is attached to the motor mounting boss 311 of the firing base frame 301 described above. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the motor cover 343 has a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 344 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 347 and a motor cam at the tip of the motor shaft 345 of the firing motor 344, which are integrally formed with an attachment portion in which an attachment fixing hole 348 for attachment to the boss 311 is formed. 346 is fixed. A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 347. The reverse rotation prevention cam 347 engages with a stopper piece 349 (see FIG. 53) that is swingably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 349a. Prevents reverse rotation. This is to prevent the motor cam 346 from rotating in the reverse direction and causing the motor cam 346 and the motor contact protrusion 340 to mesh with each other to prevent a failure that prevents the ball striking device 300 from being driven. Further, the motor cam 346 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 336 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor contact protrusion 340 as the firing motor 344 rotates. When the motor cover 343 is attached to the motor attachment boss 313, as shown in FIG. 50A, the main configuration of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 55, the slide member 350 housed in the slide member housing space 306 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 351 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 352 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 351. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 353 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 306. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 350 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 354 into which the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted. Thus, the insertion space 354 has a first inclined surface 355 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes inward from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface slightly toward the rear of the first inclined surface 355. A sandwiching piece 356 is formed and is provided with a predetermined interval between the tips. A second inclined surface 357 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 356, which is inclined like a letter C when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide projecting piece 102 is inserted into the insertion space 354, as shown in FIG. 55B, one end side of the slide projecting piece 102 on the inclined side 103 side comes into contact with the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 356. In addition, although the space part 358 is formed in the side of the insertion space 354 of the slide member 350, this space part 358 does not necessarily have a function.

  Thus, the slide member 350 configured as described above is in an oval shape formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 306 as shown in FIG. The insertion space 354 is formed so as to face the connection opening 314, and the slide member 350 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 306 (in FIG. 52A, the left inner wall is abutted). Although they are shown in contact with each other in a normal state, they are in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  Therefore, first, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the biasing spring 333 of the slide member 350 and the ball striking device 300 will be described. The slide member 350 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 306 (FIG. 52A). 53, the swing piece 321 connected to the connecting projection 352 of the slide member 350 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 326 that is in contact with the swing piece 321 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 53) by the biasing force of the bias spring 333 and the contact portion 324 of the swing piece 321. In this state, the contacted portion 328 of the slide rod 326 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 333 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball 336 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 344, the return force of the hitting ball 336 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 255 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 350 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 306 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 52A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 321 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 322 at the lower end, the slide rod 326 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 54) by the contact between the contact portion 324 and the contacted portion 328. Slide towards you. Then, the urging spring 333 locked to the spring locking portion 332 of the slide rod 326 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 333 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball 336 when the hitting ball 336 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the shooting motor 344 is increased, and the hitting ball at the shooting position is The game is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 255 of the game board 4. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide of the slide member 350 in the slide member storage space 306.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 350, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball hitting device 300. The movement of the slide member 350 is performed by the operation handle 71 of the handle device 70 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 93 of the joint unit 90 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 74. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 27, 28, 32, and 33. FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71 of the handle device 70 is rotated, the slanted cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 75 is also rotated. 93 slides in the storage body 91 in one direction (leftward in FIG. 33). For this reason, the slide protrusion 102 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 93 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 102 of the slide body 93 penetrates the connection opening 314 formed in the launcher mounting portion 169 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 350. It is inserted into the space 354. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 103 side of the slide projecting piece 102 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 356 as described above. (State shown in FIG. 33A). Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 102 slides in one direction, the slide member 350 also slides in the same direction. In the drawing, the state shown in FIG. 33A is changed to the state shown in FIG. At this time, as described above, the slide rod 326 also slides as the slide member 350 slides, so that the biasing force of the biasing spring 333 can be adjusted. That is, the resilience of the hit ball of the hitting ball launcher 300 can be adjusted by rotating the turning operation member 74 of the handle device 70.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 70 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 300 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 102 of the handle device 70 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 350 of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 102 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 354 of the slide member 350 and the handle device 70. The hitting ball launching device 300 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 102 is separated from the insertion space 354 and separates the handle device 70 and the hitting ball hitting device 300. Therefore, the handle device 70 and the ball striking device 300 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 102 is inserted into the insertion space 354, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 102 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 356 projecting in the insertion space 354 is provided. The slide protrusion 102 is smoothly inserted into the holding position by the surface 357.

In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 102 is merely separated from the insertion space 354. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, FIG. As shown, although the position of the slide protrusion 102 is slightly shifted in one direction (a state shifted to the left side in FIG. 33), the inclined side 103 of the slide protrusion 102 and the first inclination of the slide member 350 are shown. Due to the cooperative action with the surface 355, the slide projecting piece 102 and the slide member 350 are finally engaged while the slide member 350 is moved in one direction in accordance with the closing operation of the door frame 5. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 70 and the hitting ball launching device 300 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71. It is.
[1-6. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 400 attached to the upper back of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 56 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 400. FIG. As described above, the prize ball tank 400 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 200 (see FIG. 37) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 400 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a notch 401 is formed in the front wall 400a, and the bottom surface is inclined from one to the other. It is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 402 and a second inclined bottom surface 403 inclined toward a discharge port 404 described below. In addition, a discharge port 404 is formed at the lower inclined end of the second inclined bottom surface 403, and this discharge port 404 protrudes outward from the rear wall 400b of the prize ball tank 400 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is formed to do. In addition, on both outer sides of the front wall 400 a of the prize ball tank 400, attachment flanges 407 that engage with the tank attachment groove 200 are formed, and the main body frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 400. Placement contact pieces 405 and 406 that place and contact the fourth side wall 193 project, and a ball leveling member 413 (described later) is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface wall 400b on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 400. The ball leveling mounting shaft 409 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 408 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 400b and the upstream side wall of the prize ball tank 400 excluding the discharge port 404.

  In the prize ball tank 400 configured as described above, the mounting flange 407 is attached to the tank mounting groove 200 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 405 and 406 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 194. As a result, the prize ball tank 400 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3, and in this attached state, as shown in FIG. 41, the notch 401 and the main body frame 3 of the front wall 400a. A relief recess 201 formed on the back surface of the tank rail communicates with each other, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 404 faces an upstream end portion of a tank rail member 410 described below. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 400, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion that stores the ball (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 402 and the second inclined bottom surface 403) is the second side wall 191-1 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 193, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 191-193. Thus, as described above, the first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 of the main body frame 3 are formed deep so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral portion of the game board 4, and thus the side wall 191. Although the depth of the storage part of the prize ball tank 400 placed on the upper part of ˜193 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, even if the prize ball is stored and the weight increases, the prize ball tank Since the entire 400 is supported by the side walls 192 to 193 of the main body frame 3, the stored spheres can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 404 without deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 402 and 403. Further, since the discharge port 404 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 400b of the prize ball tank 400, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage unit flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 403. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which an opening is provided in a part of the inclined bottom surface as a discharge port as in the prior art, a ball break-up portion for eliminating ball clogging is not formed in the storage portion in the vicinity of the discharge port. A structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 400 storage portion is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 191 to 193 that house the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus, and the award Since the discharge port 404 of the ball tank 400 is provided so as to protrude outward from the rear wall 400b of the storage unit, the tank rail member 410 is located outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 400 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Since the tank rail member 410 and the storage portion of the prize ball tank 400 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper side of the rear side walls 191 to 193 can be protruded rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 191-193.

Further, regardless of whether the storage part of the prize ball tank 400 is placed on the upper outside of the rear side walls 191 to 193 that house the rearward protruding part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 404 is located behind the prize ball tank 400. Only the configuration of being provided outside the face wall 400b provides a unique effect not found in conventional prize ball tanks. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 400. In this case, when a discharge port 404A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage unit as in a conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. A prize ball tank in which a discharge port 404A is formed on the opposite side, or, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when the discharge port 404A is formed adjacent to the ball breaker 400B, a portion of the discharge port 404A In this case, the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure are always applied to the discharge port 404A from four directions. For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere polymerization, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the discharge port 404A, and sphere clogging may occur. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 400 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 404 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 400b of the prize ball tank 400, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere at the discharge port 404 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, only the acting force from the storage portion toward the discharge port 404 and its reaction, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the conventional case. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 404 portion, and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur.
[1-7. Tank rail member]
The tank rail member 410 disposed below the prize ball tank 400 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 58 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, the ball passage unit 420, the prize ball unit 450, and the full tank unit 520 as seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, the ball passage unit 420, the prize ball unit 450, and the full tank unit 520 as seen from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view (A) and a plan view (B) showing the relationship between the downstream portion of the tank rail member 410 and the upstream portion of the ball passage unit 420.

  As described above, the tank rail member 410 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 203 and 204 (see FIG. 35) of the upper rear wall 195 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 410 is provided with a plurality of locking projections 418 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 203 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side, and the upper side of the rear surface side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 419 that is hooked on the rail locking groove 204 from above is provided. Thus, the tank rail member 410 is formed in a slanted bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 404 of the prize ball tank 400, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 410 forms a ball passage unit 420 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 410 is a passage 412 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 411 as shown in FIG. The bottom surface of the passage 412 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll along the passage 412 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is affixed to the side wall of the passage 412, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 207 (see FIG. 35). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 410 is grounded to the outside from the metal plate via the ground connector 207 via the ground connector 690 (see FIG. 96) of the power supply board 686 described later. It is like that.

Further, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 413 having a weight on the middle downstream side of the tank rail member 410 is provided so as to be swingable. The ball leveling member 413 is pivotally supported on the ball leveling mounting shaft 409 of the award ball tank 400 described above, and moves toward the respective passages 412 in the two rows of the tank rail member 410. The spheres that hang down and flow down the respective passages 412 flow in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 410 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 413 is covered with a ball pressing plate 414. The ball holding plate 414 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 413 is forced to be one step. Further, at the downstream end of the tank rail member 410, a pair of alignment gears 416 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 417 so as to face the respective passages 412. The alignment gear 416 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 417 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 416 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere flowing down each passage 412 of the tank rail member 410 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 416, the spheres in the two rows of passages 412 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 412 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 412a formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 412 while meshing with the alignment gears 416. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of the passages 412 fall alternately in a line at the upper end inlet 422d of the sphere dropping passage 422 of the sphere passage unit 420 described below. The alignment gear 416 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 415 on its upper surface.
[1-8. Ball passage unit]
The ball passage unit 420 for guiding the balls dropped in a line from the tank rail member 410 to the winning ball unit 450 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450, and FIG. 62 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450. 63 is a perspective view seen from the back of the ball passage unit 420, FIG. 64 is a front view of the ball passage unit 420, and FIG. 65 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450. It is a side view for demonstrating. 62 and 63, the prize ball unit 450 portion is the one in which the gear cover 510, the aluminum heat radiating plate 491, and the unit sub plate 475 are deleted and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 451 is drawn in an easily understandable manner. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 420, a spherical drop passage 422 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 421 that are bent on the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is called the front surface). As shown in FIG. 60A, the ball drop passage 422 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 422a whose upstream portion is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 422a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 422b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 422c that communicates with the left and right bent passage portion 422a and is substantially vertical. As shown in FIG. 60A, the front / rear bent passage portion 422a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 412 as described above because the position of the upper end inlet 422d falling from the tank rail member 410 is the main body frame. 3 is located away from the surface of the upper rear wall 195 and the right rear wall 196 on the back side, and the ball is formed by the front and rear bent passage portion 422a and the prize ball guiding projection 211 projecting from the right rear wall 196. The fall passage 422 is bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the right rear wall 196. Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the left and right bent passage portion 422b is formed in a U shape so as to be almost full in the width of the ball passage unit 420 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 410 to the front and rear bent passage portion 422a. It is formed by bending. Further, although the vertical passage portion 422c is also formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 423 is formed in one bent passage wall 421 constituting the vertical passage portion 422c. A ball breakage detecting piece 424 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 425 is attached to 423 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 426 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 424, and an actuator 427 of the ball break switch 426 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 424.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 422c, the ball breakage detection piece 424 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 422c and the actuator 427 is pressed to turn on the ball breakage switch 426. When the ball ceases to exist in the portion 422c due to clogging or lack of the ball, the ball breakage detecting piece 424 swings toward the vertical passage portion 422c, and the actuator 427 turns off the ball breakage switch 426. When the ball-out switch 426 is turned off, the rotation of a payout motor 465 of a prize ball unit 450, which will be described later, stops and the payout of prize balls is stopped. A stopper protrusion 428 is formed at the lower end of the notch 423 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 424 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball of the ball passage unit 420 is A ball clogging insertion groove 429 is formed in the vertical passage portion 422c corresponding to the cut detection piece 424. The ball clogging insertion groove 429 inserts a pin from the rear side of the ball passage unit 420 when the ball breakage detecting piece 424 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 421 that faces the broken piece detection piece 424 is formed in a slightly bulging shape toward the broken piece detection piece 424 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 422c, the ball break detection piece 424 is surely pressed and the ball break switch 426 is turned on.

  Further, a stop hole 430 and a positioning boss 431 are formed in the ball path unit 420 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 422. The positioning boss 431 is engaged with a positioning pin 226 formed on the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 430 corresponds to the passage unit mounting boss 212 formed on the right rear wall 196. Is. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 420 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 61, the passage unit attachment boss 212 and the stop hole 430 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 431 is engaged with the positioning pin 226. In this state, the screw 432 can be screwed from the stop hole 430. Further, the ball passage unit 420 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 433 that engages with an engagement piece 752 (see FIG. 3) of the cover body 750 in the middle of one side thereof, and a prize ball unit at the lower part. A connecting lid member 434 for connecting to 450 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the connecting lid member 434 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 438 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 420 The projecting shaft 437 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 436 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 434 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 435 serving as the shaft support projecting from both the left and right ends of Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 434 is extended below the spherical passage unit 420 when closed, and the passage formed by the passage wall 438 communicates with the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 422 (see FIG. 65B). The state shown in FIG. 65 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 438 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 422 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 65A). A guide projection 439 that guides the support piece 436 of the connecting lid member 434 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 420.

Thus, the ball path unit 420 is fixed to the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3, and the award ball unit 450 is also mounted on the right rear wall 196 as shown later (shown in FIG. 65A). In the state), the connecting lid member 434 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 470 provided in the prize ball unit 450, so that the ball drop path 422 of the ball path unit 420 and the bent path of the prize ball unit 450 are 453 is communicated with the passage wall 438 so that the sphere falling in the ball dropping passage 422 of the ball passage unit 420 can be guided to the bending passage 453 of the prize ball unit 450. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 434 is provided in the ball passage unit 420 is that the prize ball unit 420 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450 from being attached to the ball from hindering a smooth drop of the ball.
[1-9. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 450 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball passage unit 420 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 450. FIG. 67 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 465 and the sprocket 457 as a payout member. FIG. 69 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 450, and FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  In FIG. 66, a prize ball unit 450 as a prize ball payout mechanism is a unit base body 451 in which a bent passage 453, a prize ball passage 460, and a ball removal passage 461 are formed by a pair of bent passage walls 452. A unit sub-plate 475 covering the rear surface of the unit base body 451, a prize ball in-unit relay terminal plate 480 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 475, and a substantially center of the unit sub-plate 475 A gear group 493, 494, 497 provided in the surface area (rear surface area) and a gear cover 510 that covers the detection disk 500 (rotation transmission member) are configured. Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 451 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 475 side. A bent passage 453 is formed by the wall 452. The bent passage wall 452 protrudes from the upper center of the unit base body 451 to approximately the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both sides of the unit base body 451 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 452 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 455 in which a sprocket 457 as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 451 from the lower portion of the distribution space 455. A passage partition wall 459 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 452 divided to the left and right until the downstream end. That is, the left and right bent passage wall 452 and the passage partition wall 459 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 455, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 460, The other passage forms a ball passage 461. The passage partition wall 459 is also largely divided on the left and right sides, and a motor storage space 464 for storing the payout motor 465 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 459. That is, the payout motor 465 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 464 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 453 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 457 of the spheres staying in the passage 453 and reaches the distribution space 455, but the upstream side of the distribution space 455. An elliptical opening 454 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 454 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 453, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 450 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 455, a sprocket 457 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably arranged. A bearing cylinder 456 that supports the other end of the rotating shaft 458 to which the 457 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 455. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 459 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 455 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 457, and on the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 460 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 462 is detachably attached. The counting switch 462 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes is formed at the front end portion, and by forming an attachment portion that matches the shape of the rear end portion with the bent passage wall 452, It can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 462 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 452 constituting the prize ball passage 460, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 509 a formed on the passage lid plate portion 509 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 475. A plurality of 463 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 463, the locking claw 463 that engages with one locking portion 509a at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 509 is formed on the passage partition wall 459 side.

  A circular motor storage space 464 for storing the payout motor 465 is formed below the unit base body 451 and between the prize ball passage 460 and the ball removal passage 461. This motor storage space 464 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 465 is accommodated in the interior of the. However, the payout motor 465 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 491 attached below the unit sub plate 475 by a pair of mounting pieces 466 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 467. In a state where the payout motor 465 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 491 of the unit sub-plate 475, the motor shaft 468 of the payout motor 465 passes through the shaft insertion hole 492 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 491 and enters the first. The gear 493 is fixed. Further, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 453, the prize ball passage 479, and the ball removal passage 461 are formed by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 451 with the unit sub plate 475 and the aluminum heat radiating plate 491. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 465 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 464 for storing the payout motor 465 and the distribution space 455 in which the sprocket 457 is disposed are formed in a very close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the vertical direction of the unit base body 451 is The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 450 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 451 is provided with a guide protrusion 469 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 461 to the back side of the prize ball unit 450. The guided ball is guided to a ball pulling connection passage 515 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 470 that locks the connecting lid member 434 of the ball passage unit 420 described above projects from the upper portion of the unit base body 451, and the prize ball unit 450 is attached to the right rear wall of the main body frame 3. A button insertion engagement hole 471 and a hook-like engagement portion 474 for detachably attaching to the 196 and an attachment boss 473 for connecting the gear cover 510 with the unit base body 451 and the unit sub plate 475 being sandwiched are provided. It has been. The button insertion engagement hole 471 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 451, and is attached with a rod-like detachable button 472 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction. This corresponds to the lock elastic claw 214 formed on the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3. In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 471 has a concave shape so that the front end portion of the lock elastic claw 214 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 474 engages with an engaging protrusion 215 formed on the right rear surface wall 196 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 450 against the right rear surface wall 196 to push downward. By lowering, the hook-like engagement portion 474 and the engagement protrusion 215 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 214 and the button insertion engagement hole 471 engage with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 450 is not allowed. Note that the hook-shaped engaging portions 474 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 451. In addition, the mounting boss 473 for connecting the unit base body 451 and the gear cover 510 with the unit sub plate 475 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface side, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub plate 475. After passing through 508, the unit base body 451 and the gear cover 510 are connected in a state where the unit sub plate 475 is sandwiched by fitting screws 512 from the surface of the gear cover 510 so as to correspond to the mounting holes 511 of the gear cover 510. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub plate 475 that covers the unit base body 451 will be described. The unit sub plate 475 covers the bent passage 453 portion, the distribution space 455 portion, and the prize ball passage 460 portion of the unit base body 451. A payout motor 465 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 491 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 461 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 475, a relay board region 476 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 is formed at the upper part, and a plurality of gears 493 are provided below that. A gear region 490 to which 494 and 497 and the detection disk 500 are attached is formed. The relay board region 476 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 477 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 project along the square shape, and will be described below above and below the one side vertical side. An engagement groove portion 478 that engages with the engagement protrusion 486 of the substrate cover 485 is formed, and a locking claw portion 479 that engages with the locking projection 487 of the base cover 485 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. . The relay board region 476 is formed with a button insertion hole 484 through which the attach / detach button 472 is inserted and a mounting boss 482 for fixing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 with screws (not shown). .

  The above-mentioned prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 attached to the relay board area 476 includes the count switch connector 480a for relaying the wiring from the count switch 462 and the payout motor connector for relaying the wiring from the payout motor 465. 480b, a rotation angle switch connector 480c that relays wiring from a rotation angle switch 505, which will be described later, a ball break switch connector 480d that relays wiring from the ball break switch 426, and a grounding connector 480e of the payout motor 465, which will be described later. A payout control board connector 480f that relays wiring (harness) from the payout control board 715 (see FIG. 96) is provided, and corresponds to the button insertion hole 483 through which the detachable button 472 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 482. A mounting hole 481 is formed. Thus, the award ball unit relay terminal plate 480 is placed on the placement rib 477 of the relay board region 476, and the mounting hole 481 and the mounting boss portion 482 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). The in-sphere relay terminal plate 480 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 475.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 485. The substrate cover 485 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 486 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side and a locking projection 487 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 488 and a connection opening 489 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 485. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 486 of the substrate cover 485 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 478 of the relay substrate region 476 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 487 and the engagement claw portion 479 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 480 can be covered with the substrate cover 485. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 479 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 487 and the substrate cover 485 is pulled obliquely forward to engage the engagement projection 486 and the engagement groove 478. The engagement with can be released. When the substrate cover 485 is covered, the head of the detachable button 472 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 471 passes through the button insertion holes 483 and 484 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 488. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 480 in the prize ball unit is drawn out from the connection opening 489 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 493, 494, 497 and the detection disk 500 provided in the gear region 490 formed in the unit sub plate 475 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 468 of the dispensing motor 465 passes through the shaft insertion hole 492 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 491 of the unit sub plate 475 and projects to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 475. The first gear 493 (drive gear, number of teeth Z1 = 30) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 493, a second gear 494 (rotation transmission gear, number of teeth Z2 = 30) meshing with the first gear 493 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 510 and an aluminum heat sink A shaft 495 that is supported at the other end by a shaft hole 496 formed in the shaft 491 is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 494, a third gear 497 (rotational transmission) that meshes with the second gear 494 is provided. A gear and the number of teeth Z3 = 20) are rotatably provided on a shaft 498 press-fitted into a shaft hole 499 formed in the unit sub-plate 475. Further, above the third gear 497, a detection disk 500 having a gear portion 502 (driven gear, number of teeth Z4 = 34) meshing with the third gear 497 rotates on a rotating shaft 458 that supports the sprocket 457. It is provided freely. 69, the tip of the motor shaft 468 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 510. The rotating shaft 458 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 456 formed on the unit base body 451 and supported by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 510 at the other end. The sprocket 457 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 455 through a shaft through hole 514 formed slightly below the center of the 490, and the detection disk 500 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub-plate 475 and the gear cover 510. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 69, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 457 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 500, the sprocket 457 and the detection disk 500 are integrated around the rotation shaft 458. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the payout motor 465 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500.

  Here, the rotation speed of the sprocket 457 is obtained by reducing the rotation speed of the payout motor 465 by the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500. This reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z1 (= 30) of the first gear 497 / the number of teeth Z4 (= 34) of the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 by calculation based on the mechanism. In this embodiment, the payout motor 465 is a four-phase stepping motor that rotates once in 48 steps. Therefore, in order for the sprocket 456 to rotate once, the payout motor 465 rotates approximately 54 steps. In this case, the dispensing motor 456 rotates 7.5 degrees (= 360 degrees / 48 steps) in one step, and the sprocket 456 is approximately 6.6 degrees (7.5 degrees × reduction ratio n) in one step of the dispensing motor 456. It will rotate.

  The first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 have play (backlash). Specifically, (1) backlash between the first gear 493 and the second gear 494, (2) backlash between the second gear 494 and the third gear 497, and (3) detection with the third gear 497. There is a backlash with the gear portion 502 of the disk 500. The size of each backlash of (1) to (3) is 1.75 degrees, and the total backlash of (1) to (3) is 5.25 degrees (1.75 degrees × 3). Therefore, the rotation angle of the sprocket 457 due to the total backlash is 5.25 degrees, and the sprocket 457 is stopped at a fixed position (in this embodiment, the position of the sprocket 457 shown in FIG. 67 is the fixed position). However, it rotates in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction in FIG.

  Thus, the rotation angle (5.25 degrees) of the sprocket 457 due to the total backlash is close to the rotation angle (about 6.6 degrees) of the sprocket 457 due to one-step rotation of the payout motor 456. For this reason, the sprocket 457 fixed position determination is performed in consideration of the rotation angle (5.25 degrees) of the sprocket 457 due to total backlash, as will be described in detail later.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 500 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 502, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 502 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 457 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 501 are formed. This detection notch 501 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 505 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 504 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 507 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 475. (The detection signal of the rotation angle switch 505 is transmitted to the prize ball unit terminal plate 480 via the wiring connecting the connector 506 and the rotation angle switch connector 480b). The rotation angle switch 505 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 457 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 501 within a predetermined time during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 505 (in many cases, the ball is engaged by the sprocket 457), the sprocket 457 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 462 provided in the prize ball passage 460 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 69, the other end of the sensor substrate 504 is also sandwiched by a substrate attachment portion 507 formed on the gear cover 510.

  Here, as described above, the detection notches 501 are three in the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 457, and are formed on the outer periphery of the detection disk 500 equally (every 120 degrees). The payout motor 465 rotates the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500. Since the sprocket 457 rotates once by the delivery motor 465 rotating about 54 steps, the rotation between the detection notches 501 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 500 (sprocket 457) is 18 steps (= about 54) of the delivery motor 465. Step / 3) rotation.

  As described above, among the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 490, only the second gear 494 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 495 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 510 side, so that the gear cover 510 that covers the gear region 490 is provided. A mounting hole 511 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 473 that protrudes from the unit base body 451 and passes through the through hole 508 of the unit sub-plate 475. The mounting hole 511 and the mounting boss 473 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 494 provided on the gear cover 510 side with the teeth of the first gear 493 and the third gear 497 provided on the unit sub-plate 475 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 510 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 475 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 512 from the rear surface of the gear cover 510. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 510, wiring connected to the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 (for example, wiring connecting the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 and a payout control board 715 described later). A wiring processing piece 513 is provided so as to be hooked and gathered.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 450 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 451, the unit sub board 475, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 480, the board cover 485, and the gear cover 510 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 465 is positioned below the bent passage 453 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 451 includes a sprocket 457 disposed in a ball passage (bending passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 465 housed in a motor housing space 464 formed therein, and the rotation of the sprocket 457 rotates the motor shaft 468 of the payout motor 465 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub plate 475. Rotation transmitting members (first gear 493, second and third gears 494, 497, and gear portion 502 of detection disk 500) that transmit to shaft 458 are provided, and in distribution space 455 of dispensing motor 465 and bending passage 453, A plurality of gears 493, 494, 49 provided in the gear region 490 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 475 with the sprocket 457 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 500 (502). That is, the sprocket 457 and the payout motor 465 are accommodated within the depth width of a ball passage (bent passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) formed between the unit base body 451 and the unit sub plate 475. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 493, the second and third gears 494, 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500) that connect the sprocket 457 and the payout motor 465 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 475. Accordingly, the prize ball unit 450 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage. Further, such a prize ball unit 450 has a ball passage (bending passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) in the prize ball unit 450 formed in a single passage shape. Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 465 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, the prize ball is attached to the rear side of the right rear frame 196 of the main body frame 3. Any part of the unit 450 may be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 69, the front end portion of the payout motor 465 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 451. This protruding portion is located below the right rear wall 196, as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the notch opening 218, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the right rear wall 196 from the protruding dimension, and from the right rear wall 196. However, the amount of protrusion toward the front is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the gaming device provided in the gaming board 4 between the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 450 is attached and the back surface of the gaming board 4. The storage space for storing the rear projecting portion can be increased in the depth width direction.

  In addition, in order to attach the prize ball unit 450 configured as described above to the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 61, the hook-shaped engaging portion 474 and the engaging protrusion 215 correspond to each other. After the positioning, the lower end of the prize ball unit 450 is latched to the locking groove 219 and the prize ball unit 450 is placed on the right rear wall 196 in order to engage the hook-like engagement portion 474 and the engagement protrusion 215. Press down while keeping it in close contact. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 450 and the locking groove 219 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 474 and the engaging protrusion 215 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 450 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 214 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 471. It is supposed to be. That is, the lock elastic claw 214 and the button insertion engagement hole 471 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 450 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 450 is attached, the connecting lid member 434 of the ball path unit 420 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claws 470, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 420 is dropped. The downstream end of the passage 422 and the upstream end of the bent passage 453 of the prize ball unit 450 can be communicated with each other through a passage formed by a pair of passage walls 438. When the prize ball unit 450 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 460 is connected to the prize ball entrance 542 of the full tank unit 520 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal passage 461 is connected to the ball removal connection passage. Connected to the upstream end of 515.

On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 450 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 470 is released, the connecting lid member 434 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 472 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 214. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 214 and the button insertion engagement hole 471, and then the prize ball unit 450 is pulled upward while the detachable button 472 is pressed, and the prize ball unit 450 The prize ball unit 450 is pulled out by releasing the engagement between the lower end of the ball and the locking groove 219 and the engagement between the hook-like engagement part 474 and the engagement protrusion 215 and pulling the prize ball unit 450 forward. Easy to remove.
[1-10. Full tank unit]
The full tank unit 520 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 450 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 450 and the full tank unit 520, FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the full tank unit 520, and FIG. 72 is a view of the balls in the full tank unit 520. 73 is a perspective view showing the flow, FIG. 73 is a plan view for explaining the operation of the full tank swing plate 531, and FIG. 74 is a partially broken view showing the relationship between the full unit 520 and the foul port 257. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 520 and the foul port 257, similarly.

  The full tank unit 520 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 180 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 71, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 521 and a lid body 541 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 521. The box main body 521 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 460 is guided in a zigzag manner and discharged from the outlet 536. For this reason, a side guide passage 522 is formed by the partition wall 526 to guide a sphere that has flowed from the winning ball inlet 542 formed in the lid 541 sideward from one end toward the other end. A side guide receiving portion 523 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 522 directly below the prize ball entrance 542, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 524 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 522 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 522 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 524 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 522 is changed in direction to the downstream side, and then the ball of the side guide passage 522 is formed by the inclined side wall 527 formed on the downstream side. It is induced to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of That is, the reverse side guide passage 525 is formed by the partition wall 526 and the inclined side wall 527. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 525 is then guided to the front guide passage 535 formed forward, and the award of the storage dish 30 described above from the outlet 536 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 535 is obtained. Guided to the ball port 39.

  Meanwhile, a switch housing space 528 is formed at one end portion of the reverse side guide passage 525 on the downstream side of the buffer member 524 so as to protrude outward. A support shaft pin 529 protrudes from the lower front position of the switch storage space 528, and the shaft hole 533 of the full tank swing plate 531 is inserted into the support pin 529 so that the full tank swing plate 531 swings. It is provided freely. The full rocking plate 531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 525, a shaft hole 533 is formed at the lower end of the plate shape, and the detection piece 532 is integrated on the back surface thereof. Is formed. The detection piece 532 is formed by vertically projecting a rear end portion of a fan-like connection plate connected to the back surface of the full tank swinging plate 531, and the projected detection piece 532 is a projection that will be described in detail later. The ON / OFF state of the full tank switch 545 is detected by shielding or conducting between the light projector and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 545. A shaft spring 530 is also inserted into the support pin 529, one end of the shaft spring 530 is locked to the back surface of the full tank swing plate 531, and the other end is erected rearward of the support pin 529. By being locked by the spring locking pin 549, the upper end portion of the full rocking plate 531 is always urged toward the reverse side guide passage 525. However, two stopper pieces 534 are formed in the upper portion of the switch storage space 528 at the downstream extension position of the other end side wall of the side guide passage 522 and the rear position thereof. The upper end only swings about the support shaft pin 529 between the two stopper pieces 534. In addition, a wiring drawing recess 547 for drawing the wiring 546 from the full tank switch 545 to the outside is formed in the rear part of the upper side wall of the switch storage space 528.

  Further, a foul ball passage 537 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 525. As shown in FIG. 74, the foul ball passage 537 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 538 communicates with the foul port 257 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 535. Has been. For this reason, the foul sphere taken into the foul mouth 257 is guided to the front guide passage 535 through the foul sphere passage 537 bent from the foul sphere inlet 538, and further through the outlet 536 and the prize ball mouth 39 to the storage dish 30. Returned to

  The box main body 521 includes engaging pieces 539 engaged with unit engaging grooves 181 formed in the full unit mounting portion 180 on both sides of the outlet 536 and one side of the foul inlet 538. And a latching protrusion 540 that engages with a latching piece 548 formed on the lid body 541 is formed. The latching protrusion 540 is appropriately formed on the left and right side wall upper portions of the box main body 521.

  On the other hand, the lid body 541 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 522, the reverse side guide passage 525, the switch storage space 528, the front guide passage 535, and the foul ball passage 537 of the box main body 520. A square prize ball inlet 542 is opened in the side guide passage 522 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. In addition, a switch mounting portion 543 for mounting a full light switch 545 of the light projecting / receiving type is formed at a position corresponding to the switch storage space 528. The full tank switch 545 can be easily attached to the switch mounting portion 543 by locking the locking claw formed with the full tank switch 545 to the locking portion of the switch mounting portion 543 from the lower surface of the lid 541. It has become. Further, a latching piece 548 for engaging with the latching projection 540 of the box main body 521 is provided around the lid 541 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 520 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 72, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 460 of the prize ball unit 520 are located upstream from the prize ball entrance 542 to the side guide passage 522. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 523 and collides with the buffer member 524. The ball colliding with the buffer member 524 hits the inclined side wall 527 toward the downstream side as it is, and is guided through the reverse side guide passage 525 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 522 and guided to the front guide passage 535, From the outlet 536 of the front guide passage 535, the prize ball port 39 is led to the storage tray 30. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball inlet 538 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 537 and merged with the front guide passage 535, and stored through the award ball port 39 from the outlet 536 of the front guide passage 535. Guided to the dish 30.

  As described above, when the ball naturally flows in the full tank unit 520, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), when the ball moves from the side guide passage 522 to the reverse side guide passage 525, The ball hits the buffer member 524 and is reflected toward the substantially central position of the inclined side surface 527, so that the ball hardly hits the full tank swing plate 531. For this reason, since the upper end of the full rocking plate 531 is in contact with the front stopper piece 534 by the biasing force of the shaft spring 530, the detection piece 532 is connected to the projector of the full light switch 545 of the light emitting / receiving type. It is in a state (OFF) where the switch does not conduct due to entering the light receiver. On the other hand, when the prize ball is stored in the storage tray 30 and the full tank unit 520 is filled with the ball, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the front guide passage 535 and the reverse side guide passage 525 are filled. Due to the pressure of the stored sphere, the full swing plate 531 swings in the clockwise direction against the biasing force of the shaft spring 530 and comes into contact with the subsequent stopper piece 534. In this state, the detection piece 532 is removed from between the light projector and the light receiver of the full light switch 545 of the light projecting / receiving method, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 545 is turned ON, the rotational drive of the payout motor 465 of the prize ball unit 450 is stopped (if an ON signal is derived while a predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after it has been paid out). Even when the balls are stored in the front guide passage 535 and the reverse side guide passage 525, the bottom of the foul ball passage 537 has a very strong inclination, so that the stored ball flows back through the foul ball passage 537. Thus, there is no back flow from the foul bulb inlet 538.

As described above, the full unit 520 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the full unit mounting part 180 of the main body frame 3, so that the full unit is attached to the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the formed dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 520 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide to the storage tray 30 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball path 460 of the prize ball unit 450. The awarded ball does not jump out of the storage tray 30. In addition, the full tank swinging plate 531 for operating the full tank switch 545 is provided at a position below the lower end of the flow of the side guide passage 522 that is not affected by the normal flow of the sphere. The winning ball payout is not stopped by the tan, and the winning ball payout can be reliably stopped only when the tank is full. Further, in the full tank unit 520 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 537 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 535 for paying out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.
[1-10-1. Other embodiment of full tank unit]
In the full tank unit 520 according to the above-described embodiment (hereinafter referred to as “full tank unit according to the first embodiment”), the full tank rocking plate 531 that operates the full tank switch 545 is affected by the flow of a normal ball. Although the thing provided in the position below the flow lower end of the side guidance passage 522 which does not receive is shown, the embodiment (following and below) which can detect a full tank more reliably at the time of a full tank , “Full unit according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. 76 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit and the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment. These are the cross-sectional views cut | disconnected by the bottom opening-and-closing plate 551 part provided in the full tank unit 520A which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In addition, in the figure, in the part code | symbol which concerns on the full tank unit 520A which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, in the part which has the same function as the part which concerns on the full tank unit 520 which concerns on 1st Embodiment, "A ".

  The major difference between the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment and the full tank unit 520 according to the first embodiment is that the full tank swing that activates the full tank switch 545 of the full tank unit 520 according to the first embodiment. The plate 531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 525, whereas the bottom rocking plate for operating the full tank switch 545A of the full unit 520A according to the second embodiment. 551 is provided in almost the entire area of the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 525A. A small difference other than the above is that a member corresponding to the partition wall 526 of the full tank unit 520 according to the first embodiment is not provided in the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment, and the full switch 545A is The mounting structure of the full switch 545A attached to the switch storage space 528A due to the fact that the rocking plate to be operated is the bottom rocking plate 551 is slightly different, and there is almost no difference other than the above.

  Therefore, the full unit 520A according to the second embodiment will be described mainly with respect to the configuration related to the bottom rocking plate 551. As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 525A is formed with a bottom surface opening 550 that opens over the entire area of the bottom surface, and the bottom surface opening 550 is defined as the bottom rocking plate 551. Is swingably closed. The bottom surface opening 550 is formed in a substantially square concave shape with an open top surface, and a pair of axial projections 554 are provided on the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 555 for positioning the lower end of the spring 556 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 550. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 551 that closes the bottom opening 550 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular shape that is pivotally supported by fitting to the shaft projection 554 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 552 is formed to project. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, a spring locking projection 551a for locking the upper end of the spring 556 protrudes downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 551. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 551 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 556. The spring 556 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 551 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 551 at a time. It is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when a predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the number of payouts are placed on the bottom swing plate 551. Further, a detection protrusion 553 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 551. The detection projecting piece 553 is positioned in the switch housing space 528A when the bearing portion 552 of the bottom rocking plate 551 is pivotally supported by the shaft projection 554.

  Further, a switch storage space 528A for storing the full tank switch 545A is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 525A. In order to mount the full switch 545A in the switch storage space 528A, a switch mounting portion 543A is formed on the outer side surface of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 525A above the switch storage space 528A. A full switch 545A is fixed to the portion 543A with screws 557. The full tank switch 545A is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 553 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  In the full tank unit 520A configured as described above, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 520A, the sphere moves from the side guide path 522A to the reverse side guide path 525A. The bottom rocking plate 551 falls to the bottom rocking plate 551. However, when the number of normal award balls is paid out, the spring 556 has a strong resilience. As shown, the detection protrusion 553 enters between the light projector and the light receiver of the full tank switch 545A of the light projecting / receiving method, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize ball is stored in the storage tray 30 and the full tank unit 520A is also filled with the ball, the bottom surface fluctuation formed on the entire upstream side of the front guide path 535A and the reverse side guide path 525A. The bottom rocking plate 551 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 556 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 551, and the detection protrusion 553 is thrown as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving type full switch 545A is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 545A is turned ON, the rotation drive of the payout motor 465 of the prize ball unit 450 is stopped (ON signal during the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls), like the full unit 520 according to the first embodiment. Is derived after the predetermined number of award balls are paid out).

As described above, in the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment, the bottom surface swings substantially the same width as the width of the passage bottom surface of the passage through which the sphere flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide passage 525A). The full switch 545 is actuated by the plate 551, and the biasing member (spring) is adapted to swing the bottom rocking plate 551 when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. 556), the ball is placed in a part of the passage portion as compared with the conventional case in which a ball is detected due to the ball placed on the bottom surface of the passage. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation that is not detected due to clogging. This can reliably detect a full tank.
[1-11. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 560 that is attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 650 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 82 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 650 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 84 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 84 shows the detailed relationship between the lock device 560 and the side walls 190 and 191 of the main body frame 3. FIG. 85 is a side view (A) of the locking device 650, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 86 is a perspective view (viewed from the back side of the locking device 560). A) Perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 600 and a body frame sliding rod 610 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 561 of the lock device 560. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 560, and FIG. 88 shows a door frame sliding rod 600 and a body frame sliding rod 61. Is a front view for explaining the operation of FIG. 89 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud member 582.

  The locking device 560 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 190 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated case) lock locking holes 198 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 190 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 190 The U-shaped base 561 of the lock device 560 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 197 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 208 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 170. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 560 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the lock device 560 includes a U-shaped base 561 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 561. The sliding frame 600 for the main body, the sliding frame 610 for the body frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 561, and the sliding frame 610 for the body frame cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 582 and 590 attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 561.

  The U-shaped base 561 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and providing a sliding slide 600 for a door frame and a sliding rod 610 for a body frame in the interior thereof. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, since the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 190 to 193 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the side walls 190 and the main body frame 3 A mounting structure that allows the locking device 560 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 560 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 561 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 560 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 561 is completely covered except for the hook portions 601, 614 and 624.

  First, rectangular hook penetration openings 562 through which the hook portions 614 and 624 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 pass are opened above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 561, and on the closed side. In addition, a screw fixing portion 563 protrudes horizontally in the middle of the upper portion and the middle of the side surface 561b (see FIG. 87) that is in close contact with the first side wall 190, and further, the side surface 561a (not in close contact with the first side wall 190 on the open side). A locking projection 564 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper and middle portions of FIG. Screw fixing portions 563 and locking protrusions 564 are for attaching the locking device 560 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking protrusions 564 are inserted into the lock locking holes 198 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward ( 82), since the screw fixing portion 563 and the lock mounting hole 197 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 560 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. be able to. The locking device 560 is attached not only by the upper and middle screw fixing portions 563 but also by a screw fixing hole 596 formed in a lock mounting piece 568 described later and in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 170. The lower part of the lock device 560 is also attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 208 to the corresponding lock attachment hole 208 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, at the time of the mounting, the locking projections 564 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 561 are inserted into the locking holes 198 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 563 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base 561 and screw fixing holes 596 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 561 are connected to the lock mounting holes 197, Since it is structured to be fixed to 208 with a screw, the front portion of the locking device 560 is locked by a locking projection 564 and a locking locking hole 198, and the rear portion of the locking device 560 is locked by a screw locking portion 563 and a locking mounting hole 197. Since the lower portion of the lock device 560 is fixed by the screw fixing hole 596 and the lock attachment hole 208, the lock device 560 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 560 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 561 having a very small width, the locking device 560 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 560. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 564 that forms the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 561a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base 561. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 563 and the screw fixing hole 596 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 561b closely contacting the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base 561. Therefore, the locking device 560 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 561b in close contact with the first side wall 190. is there.

  Also, insertion holes 565 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 561a and 561b of the U-shaped base 561, and the glass door sliding member 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 are provided in the U-shaped base 561. The glass door sliding member 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 561 by inserting and crimping a rivet 566 into the insertion hole 565 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 602 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 600 and the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 are respectively formed in the body frame sliding rod 610. By passing the rivets 566 through the rivet slots 615 and 620, the door frame sliding rod 600 can be moved upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 610 can be moved downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the rivet 566 passes through the lower end portions of the rivet slots 615, 620 of the main body frame sliding rod 610, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 566 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 602 of the sliding rod 600.

  Further, a tamper-proof cutout 567 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 561, and at the front end of the side 561b that is in close contact with the first side wall 190 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attaching piece 568 for attaching the cylinder lock 570 protrudes laterally, and an insertion vertical opening 579, a spring locking piece 580, and a clearance side hole 581 are provided on a side face 561b in close contact with the first side face wall 190. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 567 is configured such that a stopper piece 585 of a first fraud prevention member 582 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the front end of the side surface 561b of the U-shaped base 561 is arranged so that the lock attachment piece 568 is positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 159 in a state where the lock device 560 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 568 is formed with a lock insertion hole 569 through which the cylinder lock 570 passes, and a mounting hole 573 for mounting the cylinder lock 570 with a screw 572. A screw fixing hole 596 for attaching the lower part of the lock device 560 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is provided. The insertion vertical opening 579 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 576 and the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 fixed to the cylinder lock 570 enter when the cylinder lock 570 rotates. The spring locking piece 580 is for locking the spring 593 provided on the tamper-proof members 582 and 590, and the clearance lateral hole 581 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 592. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 570 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 568 will be described. In the cylinder lock 570, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment substrate 571, and the lock shaft 574 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 575 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 574 with a screw 578. The engagement cam 575 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 576 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 621 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 577 that engages with the rising engagement hole 605 of the door frame sliding rod 600 when rotating. The cylinder lock 570 configured as described above has an attachment hole (not indicated) and a lock formed in two places on the lock attachment substrate 571 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 569. The cylinder lock 570 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 561 by aligning the mounting hole 573 of the mounting piece 568 with the screw 572 and screwing it.

  Next, fraud prevention members 582 and 590 attached to the U-shaped base 561 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 582 and 590 are for preventing the main body frame sliding rod 610 from being lowered illegally with, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 570 with an official key. . Accordingly, the anti-tamper members 582 and 590 have a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 582 and the second anti-tamper member 590 are connected by the connecting pin 592. The first tamper-proof member 582 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable about the swing shaft hole 583 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 583 is formed inside the U-shaped base 561 described above. Of the insertion hole 565 and the rivet 566 for slidably attaching the glass door sliding member 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610, the lowermost insertion hole 565 and the rivet 566 are attached.

  The first fraud prevention member 582 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 584 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 579 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 577 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 584. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 577 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 584 and the insertion vertical opening 579, the upward engagement hole 605 of the sliding frame 600 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base 561 The second engaging protrusion 577 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 584 of the first fraud prevention member 582 is an inclined portion 582a. The inclined portion 582a is in contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 576 when the engaging cam 575 is rotated. When the engaging cam 575 is rotated, the first engaging protrusion 576, the inclined portion 582a, and the like. Makes the first tamper-proof member 582 swing around the swing shaft hole 583 (clockwise in FIG. 89B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 582 is provided with a stopper piece 585 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 584, and a restriction protruding piece 589 is provided below the stopper piece 585. A pin hole 587 and a connection hole 588 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 589. The stopper piece 585 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 567 and the engagement notch 627 of the body frame sliding rod 610 when the body frame sliding rod 610 is locked, and the body frame sliding rod 610 is engaged. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, in the restricting protrusion 589, the first tamper-proof member 582 and the second tamper-proof member 590 are connected by a spring 593, and when the spring 593 is connected, the biasing direction of the second tamper-proof member 590 The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 587 is for fixing the guide pin 586. With the guide pin 586 fixed to the pin hole 587 from the back side of the first tamper-proof member 582, the guide pin 586 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 579. The first fraud prevention member 582 is guided along the side surface 561b of the U-shaped base 561 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped base. Further, the connection hole 588 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 with the connection pin 592.

  The second tamper-proof member 590 connected to the first tamper-proof member 582 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 591 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end thereof. A stop hole 594 is formed, and a contact portion 595 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 591 is for connecting with the connection pin 592 so as to coincide with the connection hole 588 of the first fraud prevention member 582, and the spring locking hole 594 has one end with a U-shaped base 561 spring locking piece. The other end of the spring 593 locked to 580 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 595 comes into contact with the closing projection 23 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 described above will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 561 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 600 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 601 are integrally formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions on one side of the vertical side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 601 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base 561, and when the lock device 560 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 199 (see FIGS. 37 and 38) formed in 3, and is engaged with a hook locking piece 37 a (see FIG. 21) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 601 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 601 and the hook locking piece 37a are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 600. The state can be released.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 602 through which the rivet 566 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 600, and the uppermost rivet slot 602 is formed in the rivet slot 602. A guide projection 603 projects from the elongated hole 602 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 600. The rivet long hole 602 is a hole through which the rivet 566 inserted into the insertion hole 565 of the U-shaped base 561 passes, and the rivet 566 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 600. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 566 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 602. The guide projection 603 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 616 and 623 formed in the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 of the main body frame sliding rod 610, and the door frame sliding rod 600 is provided. The main body frame sliding rod 610 guides the mutual sliding operation.

  Further, a spring hook portion 606 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 600, one end of the spring 608 is locked to the spring hook portion 606, and the other end of the spring 608 is the body frame sliding rod 610. The upper hook member 611 is engaged with a spring hook portion 617. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 600 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 610 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 600, a contact elastic piece 607 is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 607 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 600 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 561 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 600 from rattling. Further, a vertically long play hole 604 and a rising engagement hole 605 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 600. When the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 604 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 576 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 605 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 600 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. In addition, an escape notch 609 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 567 is formed at the lower rear side of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 600. The escape notch 609 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 585 of the first tamper-proof member 582 in order to reliably engage the tamper-proof notch 567 and the engagement notch 627.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 610 includes an upper hook member 611 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 612 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 613 that connects the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612, and Consists of. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 610 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 611 having the hook portions 614 and 624 and the lower hook member 612 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 613. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 561.

  By the way, the upper hook member 611 has a hook portion 614 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 615 and a projecting piece moving hole 616 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 617 and a connecting hole 618 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and contact portions 625 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 614 passes through the hook penetration opening 562 above the U-shaped base 561 and engages with the closing projection 22 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 615 corresponds to the rivet slot 602 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 600. In a normal state where the rivet 566 is penetrated through the rivet slot 615, The rivet 566 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 615. Thereby, the upper hook member 611 can move downward. As described above, the guide protrusion 603 above the door frame sliding rod 600 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 616 so that the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. As described above, the spring hook portion 617 is engaged with the other end of the spring 608. The connection hole 618 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connection wire rod 613. Further, when the abutting portion 625 is housed in the U-shaped base 561, the abutting portion 625 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 561, and the upper hook member 611 slides smoothly without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 612 is provided with a hook portion 624 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper surface to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the rivet long hole 620, the downward engagement hole 621, and the play hole 622. One moving hole 623 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 619 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 627 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 626 is formed. The hook portion 624 penetrates the hook penetration opening 562 below the U-shaped base 561 and engages with a closing projection 23 provided on the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 620 corresponds to the rivet slot 602 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 600. In a normal state where the rivet 566 is penetrated through the rivet slot 620, The rivet 566 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 620. Thereby, the lower hook member 612 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 621 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 610 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 622 has a distal end portion of the second engagement projection piece 577 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement projection piece 577 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 603 below the door frame sliding rod 600 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 623 so that the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The connecting hole 619 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 613. Further, when the abutting portion 626 is accommodated in the U-shaped base 561, the abutting portion 626 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 561, and the sliding operation of the lower hook member 612 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  The members constituting the locking device 560 have been described above. To attach the locking device 560, the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 are connected by the connecting wire rod 613. In this state, the guide protrusion 603 of the door frame sliding rod 600 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 616 and 623 of the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612, and the rivet long hole 602 and the rivet length The holes 615 and 620 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 614 of the upper hook member 611 and the hook portion 624 of the lower hook member 612 are passed through the hook penetration opening 562 of the U-shaped base 561. The door frame sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 are inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 561. Thereafter, the rivet 566 is inserted from the insertion hole 565. At this time, the rivet 566 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 615, 620, and 602. However, when the lowermost rivet 566 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 566 also into the swinging shaft hole 583 of the first fraud prevention member 582 and attach the first fraud prevention member 582 to the U-shaped base 561 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 582 to the U-shaped base 561, the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 are connected by the connecting pin 592 and the guide pin 586 is illustrated in the pin hole 587. The guide pin 586 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 579.

  With the rivet 566 storing and fixing the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 in the U-shaped base 561, the spring 608 is spanned between the spring hook portions 606 and 617, and the door frame is mounted. The sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 593 is stretched over the spring locking pieces 580 and 594 so that the second fraud prevention member 590 is the regulating projection piece 589. It is in the state which contact | abutted. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 570 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 569 of the lock attachment piece 568, and the cylinder lock 570 is fixed to the attachment hole 573 with the screw 572. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 582a and into the insertion vertical opening 579, and the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 The cylinder lock 570 is attached to the lock attachment piece 568 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 584 and the insertion vertical opening 578 of the first fraud prevention member 582.

  In order to attach the locking device 560 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 601 of the door frame sliding rod 600 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While inserting into the hook hole 199, the locking projection 564 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 198 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 563 and screw fixing protruding in the horizontal direction By aligning the hole 596 with the lock mounting holes 197 and 208 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched holes, the lock device 560 is firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Can do. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 564 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 561a that does not closely contact the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base 561, while Since the screw fixing portion 563 and the screw fixing hole 596 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 561 project from the side surface 561b in close contact with the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base member 561, the front portion is engaged. Compared with the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 561b that is in close contact with the first side wall 190, the locking device 560 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose.

  By the way, the effect | action of the locking device 560 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.88 and FIG.89. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hooks 614 and 624 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 601 of the door frame sliding rod 600 and the hook locking piece 37a of the door frame 5 are locked. It has become. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 570 and the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 579, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), The front end of the first engagement protrusion 576 engages with the downward engagement hole 621 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 to depress the lower hook member 612 downward against the urging force of the spring 608, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 613 and the upper hook member 611 are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 614 and 624 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 614 and 624 are raised by the urging force of the spring 608 (the same raised position as in the state shown in FIG. 88A). , 624 is inclined downward toward the outside, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 614, 624 is forced to close the projections 22, 23 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 610 is lowered downward, the upward claws of the hook portions 614 and 624 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 610 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 570 and the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 579, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 577 engages with the ascending engagement hole 605 of the door frame sliding rod 600 to push up and raise the door frame sliding rod 600 against the urging force of the spring 608. For this reason, since the latching state of the hook locking piece 37a of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 601 of the door frame sliding rod 600 is released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. 5 can be opened to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 601 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 608 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 88A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 601 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 601 is hooked by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. Since the door frame sliding rod 600 rises upward because it abuts the upper end of the piece 37a, the door frame hook portion 601 downward claw and the hook locking piece 37a are locked again. Then, the door frame sliding rod 600 descends and returns to the locked state. Note that the door frame sliding rod 600 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the full length of the U-shaped base 561, and the U-shaped base 561 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. A door frame hook portion 601 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 600. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is performed. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 560 according to the present embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 relative to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 570 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 614 and 624 of the sliding rod 610 for the main body frame without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 570 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 582 and a second fraud prevention member 590, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 561. The door frame sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 89A, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 595 of the second fraud prevention member 590 are connected. It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 582 rotates counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 593, the stopper piece 585 enters the tamper-proof cutout 567, and the stopper piece 585 is tamper-proof cutout. The main body frame sliding rod 610 at a position corresponding to 567 is engaged with an engagement notch 627 formed in the lower hook member 612. For this reason, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 610 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 585 and the engagement notch portion 627 are engaged with each other. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 570, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 575 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. 89 (B). The piece 576 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 579. When the first engagement protrusion 576 is rotated, the inclined portion 582a of the first fraud prevention member 582 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 576 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 585 also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 567. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 585 and the engagement notch 627 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 590 is in a position where the spring 593 is extended and the contact portion 595 is retracted. When the engagement cam 575 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 576 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 576 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 621 of the lower hook member 612. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 610 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 614 and 624 and the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 590 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 589, so the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 590 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 595 of the second fraud prevention member 590 come into contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 89 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the 1st fraud prevention member 582 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 590 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 610 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 610 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 600 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 610.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 582 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 560 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is used. Since the sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 561 except for the hook portions 601, 614, 624, they are completely covered. Even when an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 610 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 561 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 561a and 561b of the U-shaped base 561 will close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the locking device 560 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 561 that is extremely thin compared to a conventional locking device that is integrated into an L-shaped base. The sliding hook 600 and the main body frame sliding hook 610 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 570 for operating the locking device 560 to the U-shaped base 561 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 190 to 193 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 560 is fixed to the main body frame. 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 560 is attached to the main body frame 3, the sliding frame 600 for the door frame provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 610 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 561 except for the hooks 601, 614, 624, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 610 cannot be easily performed. Further, when the locking device 560 is attached, the locking protrusions 564 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 561 are inserted into the locking holes 198 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 563 and the screw fixing holes 596 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear part) of the U-shaped base 561 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 197 and 208 with screws, The front portion of the device 560 is locked by the locking protrusion 564 and the lock locking hole 198, and the rear portion of the locking device 560 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 563, the screw fixing hole 596, and the lock mounting holes 197, 208. The lock device 560 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with a simple structure.

In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing hole 596 formed in the lock mounting piece 568 and the cylinder lock through hole 170 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper part of the lock mounting piece 568 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 561 with screws. However, instead of this, a screw 572 for attaching the cylinder lock 570 to the lock attachment piece 568 is used, and the tip of the screw 572 penetrates the lock attachment piece 568. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 170. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 561 is not screwed, the locking device 560 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 563 and the lock mounting hole 197 at the rear portion of the locking device 560. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 561 having the left and right side surfaces 561a and 561b. The door frame sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 561a not closely contacting the first side wall 190 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 561b closely contacting the first side wall 190 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 561a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 190. It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 610. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.
[1-12. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 650 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 650 as viewed from the back side, FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit 650 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 92 is a view of the substrate unit 650 as viewed from the front side. 93 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit 650, and FIG. 94 is a front view as seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 that forms the main body of the substrate unit 650. 95 is a rear view of the frame substrate holder 651, FIG. 96 is a rear view of the substrate unit 650, and FIG. 97 is a substrate unit with the dispensing control substrate box 655 and the terminal substrate box 654 removed. FIG. 98 is a plan view showing a connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit 650, and FIG. 99 is an electrical connection between the board unit 650 and the game board 4. FIG. 100 is a part of a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine showing wiring and the like between the payout control board and the board unit, and FIG. 101 is a cross-sectional view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view of a game board 4 for use in the game board 4 (however, this game board 4 is a game board 4 incorporating the removal prevention mechanism shown in FIGS. 47 to 49). It is sectional drawing.

  The substrate unit 650 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 175 (see FIGS. 35 and 37) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, a synthetic resin is used. By attaching various substrates such as a door relay substrate 652, a power supply substrate box 653, a terminal substrate box 654, a payout control substrate box 655, a main drawer relay substrate 657, and a sub drawer relay substrate 658 to the formed frame substrate holder 651. It is configured. Among the above boards, the door relay board 652, the power board box 653, the terminal board box 654, and the payout control board box 655 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 651 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 657 and the auxiliary drawer relay substrate 658 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 651. As will be described later, since the power supply board 686 generates and supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V, it is a very high-temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 686 increases. For this reason, the payout control board box 655 for storing the payout control board 715 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 653 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 656 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 655 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board. The relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are covered and attached to the board cover 659. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 650 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 656 in the present embodiment is particularly shielded as shown in FIGS. 91 and 93 in order to dissipate heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply board box 653 to the outside (outside air). The plate surface of the plate 656 is formed as an uneven surface 656a. The heat transmitted to the payout control board 715 by the shield heat sink 656 can be kept small. The uneven surface 656a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. In addition, the uneven surface 656a is desirably formed in a vertical shape or an inclined shape so that heat is easily radiated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 656a is formed on the shield heat dissipation plate 656, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 656 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board or the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, malfunctioning of the payout control board 715 accommodated in the payout control board box 655 by the influence of noise can be prevented. The shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat dissipation plate 656 is not only between the power supply substrate box 653 and the payout control substrate box 655 but also when a plurality of other substrate boxes are attached to the frame substrate holder 651 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 656 as in the present embodiment between the substrate box located on the lower side and the substrate box located on the upper side.

  First, the frame substrate holder 651 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in FIGS. 91 and 94, a wiring opening 673 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 94). A relay board recess 660 for attaching the door relay board 652 is formed inside the wiring opening 673. The relay substrate recess 660 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 652, and on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 660, the back surface of the door relay substrate 652 is formed. And a retaining claw 661 that is engaged with the surface of one side of the door relay substrate 652 in a state where the door relay substrate 652 is housed in the relay substrate recess 660. ing. Also, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 660, there are mounting bosses 662 for engaging with engagement locking holes 685 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 653 and fastening with screws (not shown). Projected.

  In addition, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 651, two wiring processing pieces 664 for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 660 are formed. The wiring processing piece 664 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 660 of the frame board holder 651 to the part that is almost closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 653 (the lower area on the right side to be described next). Abutting protrusions 665 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 653 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 653 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 665, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 653 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 651. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 664 are those that lock and collect the accommodated wirings.

  It should be noted that the rearward projecting amount is large from the other end side of the region where the power supply board box 653 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 651 (the left side in FIG. 94). That is, when viewed from the back, the frame substrate holder 651 is formed in a stepped shape slightly on the left side from the center, with the left side being high and the right side being low. Area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting area”). An insertion port 665a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. For this reason, in order to attach the power supply board box 653, after inserting the insertion protrusion 684 into the insertion port 665a, an engagement locking hole 685 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 653 is formed on the attachment boss 662 from above. The power supply substrate box 653 can be fixed to the frame substrate holder 651 by inserting and fastening with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 651, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 655 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 666 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 674 (see FIGS. 93 to 96) is formed on the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 666, and the wiring hooked on the two wiring processing pieces 664 in the power supply board box mounting area is connected to the wiring opening space 666. The wiring routing space 666 and the wiring opening 674 are drawn out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 651. Further, a locking projection 667 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 714 of the payout control board box 655 is formed to project from the other end side (left end side in FIG. 91) of the payout control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 92, 93, and 95, an out-sphere passage 668 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 651. It is formed in an L shape. The out ball passage 668 is formed broadly at the upper side so as to correspond to the out port 256 (see FIG. 45), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 173 (see FIG. 35), and the drop port 272 (see FIG. 42). The downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 650 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 38, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 668 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 162 that supports the lower surface of the out port 256. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 668 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, a collection basket on the island).

  Further, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 and corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 657 and a sub drawer relay board 658 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer attachment region 670 is formed to be attached in parallel with a gap. In the drawer attaching area 670, support holes 734 and 735 formed in the respective relay boards 657 and 658 are penetrated to be provided with drawer attaching bosses 669 for supporting the relay boards 657 and 658, respectively. The junction guide hole 676 and the guide hole 675 are formed above and below the intermediate position of the relay boards 657 and 658. As shown in FIG. 102, the joint guide holes 676 are connected to drawer connectors 730 and 732 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 650 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The joint guide protrusions 273 (see FIG. 45) formed on the board substrate holder 267 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 270 and 271 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 650 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 675 is inserted with the guide protrusion 174 (see FIG. 37) protruding from the main body frame 3, and positions the board unit 650. At the same time, the mounting work is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 651, mounting pieces 671 for mounting the substrate unit 650 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the mounting pieces 671 are attached to the mounting holes of the main body frame 3. The board unit 650 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to the portions 175 (see FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 37, the attachment hole 175 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 671. Further, a wiring hooking piece 672 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 92) of the frame substrate holder 651.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 651 is generally as described above, and the configuration of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 651 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 652 mounted in the relay board recess 660 on the rear side of the frame board holder 651 will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, the door relay board 652 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection. Terminals 680 and door frame connection terminals 681 are provided. As shown in FIG. 96, the door frame connection terminal 681 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 651, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 742 (refer to FIG. 98) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and LED is connected to the door connection terminal 681 through the wiring opening 673. The internal connection terminal 680 is connected to a door frame connector 733 provided on the sub drawer relay board 658 by an internal wiring 743 (see FIG. 98). However, the internal wiring 743 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 651 so that the wiring processing piece 664, the wiring routing space 666, and the wiring opening 673 are laid.

  The power board box 653 to be attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 651 includes a box main body 682 for fixing the power board 686 (see FIG. 97) and a cover for covering the box main body 682. And a body 683. The box main body 682 is integrally formed with engagement locking holes 685 that engage with the mounting boss 622 above and below one end thereof, and an insertion projection 684 that is inserted into the insertion port 665a above and below the other end. Are integrally formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 97, a power switch 687, a power line connector 688, a CR unit power connector 689, and a grounding portion are provided on a portion of the power supply board 686 that is not covered with the cover body 683 (the right side and lower left in FIG. A connector 690 and a payout control board power connector 691 are provided. The power switch 687 is a switch for supplying power to all electric devices of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. The power line connector 688 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the outside as the frame ground FG2. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 689 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. . The grounding connector 690 is electrically connected with various antistatic grounding wires provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko gaming machine 1 is externally connected via the power line connector 688. It is a connector for grounding. Specifically, an earth wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 35 to 38) is electrically connected to the earth connector 690a as a frame ground FG3, and from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 410. An earth wire for removing noise and the like is electrically connected to the earth connector 690b as a frame ground FG1, and an earth wire for removing noise and the like from the prize ball unit 450 is electrically connected to the earth connector 690c as a frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 690d as a frame ground FG. These frame grounds FG, FG1, and FG3 are electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the frame ground FG2. Further, as shown in FIG. 98, a power supply wiring 744 is connected to the power supply connector 691 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 744 is connected to the power supply terminal 722 of the payout control board 715. Then, by this power supply wiring 744, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board stored in the effect control board box 266 or a main control board stored in the game control board box 268) via the payout control board 715. Etc. to supply power. The power supply wiring 744 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 691 to the wiring routing space 666 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 655 to be connected to the power supply terminal 722. ing. That is, the power supply wiring 744 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 651.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 91, the rear surface of the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653 is formed in a step shape, and the area with the high step is an attachment area 692 for attaching the terminal board box 654. Is a mounting region 693 for mounting the payout control board box 655. The attachment area 693 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 655 together with the above-mentioned delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 651. Note that an engagement hole 696 into which an engagement piece 713 (see FIG. 93) to be described later of the payout control board box 655 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 683 constituting the attachment region 692 for attaching the terminal board box 654 has a positioning hole 695 that positions or engages with a positioning pin 698 and an engagement piece portion 697 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 654, respectively. A mounting engagement hole 694 is formed. The engagement piece portion 697 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 694 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 697 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 694, the L-shaped engagement piece 697 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 651). The narrow portion 694 engages. Note that a latching piece 699 protrudes from the lower portion of the other side of the terminal board box 654, and when the terminal board box 654 is slidably engaged with the cover body 683, the latching piece 699 is disengaged from the dispensing control board box 655. The box main body 710 is engaged with a part of the box main body 710. This engagement is an engagement state that is easily disengaged by applying a little force to slide the terminal board box 654 in the non-engagement direction.

  Also, in the terminal board box 654, as shown in FIG. 96, an external terminal board 700a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 701 and payout control board terminals 706, a frequency indicator terminal 702, and a power supply ground terminal 703 Two boards of a CR unit terminal board 700b on which a CR unit terminal 704 and a payout control board terminal 705 are provided are accommodated in parallel in the vertical direction. The plurality of external information terminals 701 provided on the external terminal board 700a externally (for example, installed in a game arcade) various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The main drawer relay connector 730270, which will be described in detail later from the main control board housed in the game control board box 268, is a connector for leading out to a management computer (hall computer). 730 is transmitted to the payout control board 715, and the external terminal board terminal 718 provided on the payout control board 715 is connected to the payout control board terminal 706, so that each of the plurality of external information terminals 701 is finally provided. Is transmitted to. The frequency indicator terminal 702 of the CR unit terminal board 700b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator of the prepaid card provided on the storage tray 30, for example, the lending switch and the return switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1. is there. The power supply ground terminal 703 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 96) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 689 of the power supply board 686, and the other connector is the power supply board 686. The wiring from one ground connector 690 among the plurality of ground connectors 690 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 704 is connected to wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal plate terminal 719 of the payout control board 715 and the payout control board terminal 705 are connected. Thus, the payout control board 715 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 654 relays the connection between the external terminal board 700a for leading game information from the main control board stored in the game control board box 268 to the outside, and the payout control board 715 and the CR unit. The CR unit terminal board 700b to store both boards, which are conventionally stored in separate board boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, this embodiment In FIG. 5, the terminal board box 654 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 651. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board and the external terminal board 700a have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 715 without being directly connected by wiring.

  Next, the payout control board box 655 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 651 and the mounting area 693 formed in the cover body 683 of the power board box 653 is mainly shown in FIGS. Reference is made to FIG. The payout control board box 655 includes a box main body 710 to which a horizontally long payout control board 715 is fixed with a screw (not shown), and a cover body 711 attached to the box main body 710 and covering the surface of the payout control board 715. , Is composed of. The box main body 710 and the cover body 711 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 96) and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 96) with a separation cutting part 712. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 710 and the cover body 711, the separation / cutting portion 712 must be cut so that the box main body 710 and the cover body 711 cannot be separated. However, the caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 712 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the case of illustration, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) by, for example, inspection. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. Further, an engagement piece 713 to be inserted into an engagement hole 696 formed in the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 710, and the other side short side lower part is formed below. An engagement elastic piece 714 that elastically engages with a locking projection 667 formed on the frame substrate holder 651 is formed. Accordingly, in order to attach the payout control board box 655 to the frame board holder 651, the engaging piece 713 is inserted into the engaging hole 696 and then the engaging elastic piece 714 is engaged with the locking protrusion 667. Easy to install. In the state where the payout control board box 655 is attached over the payout control board box attachment area of the frame board holder 651 and the attachment area 693 formed in the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653, The payout control board box 655 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 714 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 714 and the locking projection 667 and pulling up the payout control board box 655, By pulling out the engagement piece 713 from the engagement hole 696, the payout control board box 655 can be detached from the frame board holder 651.

  The payout control board 715 covered with the box main body 710 and the cover body 711 has a door frame opening switch terminal 716a and a body frame opening switch terminal 716b on one side (right side in FIG. 96). , A prize ball unit terminal 717, an external terminal board terminal 718, a CR unit terminal board terminal 719, an operation handle terminal 724, an error LED display 1730, an error release switch 1731, and a ball removal switch 1732. A full switch terminal 720, an inspection output terminal 721, a power supply terminal 722, a firing motor terminal 723, and an internal connection terminal 725 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 96).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 716a is a connector to which wiring from the door frame opening switch 3a that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 716b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 3b for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 717 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 450 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 718 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 706 of the external terminal board 700a as described above. As described above, the CR unit terminal board terminal 719 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 705 of the CR unit terminal board 700b. The full tank switch terminal 720 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 545 of the full tank unit 520 is connected. The error LED display 1730 displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 1731 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED indicator 1730 flows from the speaker 34. When operated, the ball removal switch 1732 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 721 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when inspecting the payout control board 715, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 722 is a connector connected to the payout control board power supply connector 691 of the power supply board 686 by the power supply wiring 744 as described above. The launch motor terminal 723 is a connector to which wiring from the launch motor 344 of the hit ball launching device 300 is connected. The operation handle terminal 724 is a connector to which wiring from the touch switch 80 and the firing stop switch 82 provided in the operation handle portion 71 of the handle device 70 is connected. The internal connection terminal 725 is a connector connected to a payout control board connector 731 provided on the main drawer relay board 657 by a signal power line 745.

  Note that resistors R724a to R724d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 1731 as shown in FIG. These resistors R724a to R724d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 35 to 38 shown in FIG. 21) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 724. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 attached to the drawer attachment area 670 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, the main drawer relay board 657 is connected to the main drawer connector 270 (game board side connector; see FIG. 45) provided on the relay terminal plate 269 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A drawer relay connector 730 (holder-side connector), a payout control board connector 731 connected via an internal connection terminal 725 of the payout control board 715 and a signal power supply wiring 745 are provided vertically. Also, the sub drawer relay board 658 is connected to a sub drawer connector 732 (game board side connector; see FIG. 45) provided on a relay terminal plate 269 attached to the back side of the game board 4 (see FIG. 45). Holder side connector) and door frame connectors 733 connected via the internal connection terminals 680 of the door relay board 652 and the internal wiring 743 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are provided with support holes 734 and 735 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 734 and 735 are attached to the drawer mounting area 670 so as to protrude. By inserting into the boss 669, the main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 670, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 659.

  By the way, the board cover 659 includes a main drawer relay connector 730 and a payout control board connector 731 provided on the main drawer relay board 657, and a sub drawer relay connector 732 and a door connector 733 provided on the sub drawer relay board 658. A rectangular connector opening 736, 737, 738, 739 for projecting to the outside of the board cover 659 is opened, and a pin insertion through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 669 is inserted into the back surface side of the board cover 659. Holes 740 (see FIG. 91) are formed, and stop holes 741 for fixing the substrate cover 659 to the frame substrate holder 651 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. For this reason, the support holes 734 and 735 of the main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 669 protruding from the drawer mounting area 670, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 669 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 740. The main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 670 by covering with the board cover 659 while being inserted, and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 741.

  As described above, the configuration of the board unit 650 has been described. In the case of the present embodiment, among the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1, the board unit 650 is replaced as the game board 4 is changed. Door relay board 652 which is a board other than the main control board and the liquid crystal control board, power board 686 housed in power board board box 653, external terminal board 700 housed in terminal board box 654, housed in dispensing control board box 655. The dispensing control board 715 is assembled in advance into a frame substrate holder 651 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 650 is simply separated from the main body frame 3 by a simple operation by simply attaching it to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3. The work efficiency can be improved as compared with various kinds of board attaching work attached to the back surface side of FIG. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 650 can be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 651, the wiring connecting the boards is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 657 having a main drawer relay connector 730 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 650, and a sub drawer relay board 658 having a sub drawer relay connector 732 (holder side connector), 102, as shown in FIG. 102, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 269 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side. 270 and the sub drawer connector 271 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 730 and sub drawer relay connector 732 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the board unit 650 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 655 that requires wiring connection work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external The terminal board box 654 that requires connection work with the CR unit and the management computer is arranged in parallel at the position at the rearmost position of the board unit 650 where it can be easily seen, while the power supply board that requires less connection work with the outside. Since the box 653 and the door relay substrate 652 are disposed inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 650 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 653 and the door relay board 652 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a frustration. There is no.
[1-12-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 650 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 270 and 271 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 730 and 732 are provided on the board unit 650 side. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side. As shown in FIG. 99 (b), the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side include terminals 270a and 271a, and the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side are shown in FIG. 99 (c). Thus, contacts 730a and 732a are provided. When the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side, the terminals 270a and 271a push down the contacts 730a and 732a as shown in FIG. 99 (c). Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 730a and 732a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 270a and 271a. As a result, the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side have various control boards (for example, the main control board and the payout control board 715). A control signal line for transmitting a control signal is formed. The drawer connector 270 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 730 on the board unit 650 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 686. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 270a and 271a and the contacts 730a and 732a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is employed for plating of the terminals 270a and 271a and the contacts 730a and 732a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of the game board 4 is ensured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 687 shown in FIG. 97 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 270a and the contact 730a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 to be attached in this welded state, the contact 730a is bent and broken, or when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame, the contact 730a becomes the drawer connector 730. The drawer connector 730 becomes unusable due to being peeled off and damaged.

Further, if the terminal 270a and the contact 730a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.
[1-12-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, the wiring between the payout control board 715 housed in the payout control board box 655 and the prize ball unit 450 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 includes the counting switch connector 480a, the payout motor connector 480b, the rotation angle switch connector 480c, the ball break switch connector 480d, the ground connector 480e, and the payout control. A board connector 480f is provided.

  The count switch connector 480a is connected to the wire from the count switch 462, the payout motor connector 480b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 465, and the rotation angle switch connector 480c is connected to the wire from the rotation angle switch 505. The ball break switch connector 480d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 426 of the ball passage unit 420, and the ground connector 480e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 465. The payout control board connector 480f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 717 of the payout control board 715 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 462, the wiring from the payout motor 465, the ground wire from the payout motor 465, and the payout control board terminal 717, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 426 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 505. The harness is hung by the wiring processing piece 513 and collected.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410, taken into the ball path unit 420, and guided to the prize ball unit 450. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and generates noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 450 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

As described above, the rotation angle switch 505 is provided on the sensor substrate 504 of the prize ball unit 450, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. Further, the harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 717, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 450 and the payout control board 715, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.
[1-13. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 750 covers the rear surface opening 222 of the main body frame 3 and is inserted from above into the cover body support cylinder portion 220 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A pivot pin 751 is formed, and an engagement piece 752 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 433 formed in the spherical passage unit 420 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 751 of the cover body 750 into the cover body support cylinder portion 220, the cover body 750 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed, and the engagement piece 752 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 433. By locking, the cover body 750 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In addition, what is necessary is just to cancel | release engagement with the engagement piece 752 and the cover body engaging groove 433, when releasing.
[1-13-1. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 750 shown in FIGS. 3 and 41 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment”) is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the game control board box 268, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the game control board box 268. A pachinko gaming machine to which such a cover body 800 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 800 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 114. FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached, as viewed from the back in a state where the cover body 800 is opened, and FIG. 104 is related to the second embodiment. FIG. 105 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 is attached, and FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached, as viewed from the open side of the cover body 800. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body 800, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the second embodiment. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the cover body 800 attached thereto, FIG. 108 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the cover body 800 removed according to the second embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of a dispensing control board box 655 that overlaps with the lower side of the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view as seen from the inside of the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment. 111 is a rear view for explaining the operation of the cylinder lock 809 provided in the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 107, and FIG. 107 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 107, and FIG. 114 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. In FIGS. 103 to 114, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and the door frame 5 The shape of the storage tray 30 provided in the is slightly different. Further, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 831 having a retaining hole 830, a locking hole 832 and a guide hole 833, which will be described later, formed on the open end side of the right rear wall 196 (see FIG. 108), and the rear side wall. The third side wall 192 and the fourth side wall 193 are different in that the positions of the notch portions 221 of the third side wall 192 and the fourth side wall 193 are extended downward (see FIG. 104), and also in the configuration of the dispensing control board box 655, The only difference is that a low contact surface 711a is formed on the cover body 711 (see FIG. 109). However, the game control board box 268 displayed in FIG. 103 and FIG. 108 is attached to the board substrate holder 267 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 103 and FIG. 108, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  First, the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 800 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape with a slightly vertically long peripheral side wall standing up (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated example) pivot pins 801 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 220 formed on the body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 802 that engages with the cover body engagement groove 433 formed in the spherical passage unit 420 is formed integrally with the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 801 and the engagement piece 802 are inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 220 by inserting the shaft support pin 801 of the cover body 800 into the main body. The cover body 800 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed and engaging the engagement piece 802 in the cover body engagement groove 433. The back of various components including the game control board box 268 to be played can be protected. The difference between the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 800 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. And a test terminal for connecting a RAM clear switch 268a that is exposed to the outside to the game control board box 268 and an inspection device because the cylinder lock 809 is provided on the back of the game control board box 268. The connection operation opening 803 is provided at a position corresponding to 268b and 268c and the surface of the cover body 711 of the dispensing control board box 655 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 800 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 803 will be described. The connection operation opening 803 is formed in a rectangular shape at the upper portion of the lower contact side wall 806 of the lower side of the cover body 800, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 268a provided exposed to the outside of the game control board box 268 and the test terminals 268b and 268c to which the inspection device is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 804 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the game control board box 268 in a closed state and an abutment protrusion 805 project from the inside of the connection operation opening 803. The standing wall 804 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 803, and the contact protrusion 805 protrudes relatively low from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 803 along the one side opening edge. These standing walls 804 and contact protrusions 805 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the game control board box 268 (the surface of the main control board housed in the game control board box 268, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113). In order to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the game control board box 268 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 803.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 806 formed on the lower side of the cover body 800 will be described. When the cover body 800 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 806 is shown in FIGS. In this way, the upper side portion of the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 attached to the frame side board holder 651 is brought into contact. Therefore, the upper side of the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 mounted on the frame side board holder 651 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached is shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 711a formed lower than the surface is formed. Accordingly, the payout control board box 655 attached to the frame side substrate holder 651 is formed in the payout control board box attachment region of the frame board holder 651 and the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 693, the payout control board box 655 is housed in the attachment region 693, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 711a that is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 806 of the cover body 800, so that the cover body 800 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 655 can not be removed from the frame side board holder 651.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 809 will be described. In FIG. 110, an elliptical lock hole 808 for penetrating the cylinder lock 809 is formed near the lower side of the cover body 800. A threaded portion 810 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 809 is passed through the lock hole 808, and a nut 812 is screwed into the threaded portion 810 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 809 to the lock hole 808. Further, the cylinder lock 809 has a lock shaft 811 protruding from the center of the screw portion 810 toward the inside of the cover body 800, and the lock shaft 811 is a screw drilled in a lower portion of the oval shaped locking piece 813. The locking piece 813 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 809 by passing through the hole 814 and fastening with a nut 815. With this configuration, the locking piece 813 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting and rotating a key (owned by a manager in charge of the game hall) into the cylinder lock 809. Yes. In addition, a guide projection 816 for instructing opening / closing when the cover body 800 is closed protrudes inward from the lower portion of the keyhole 808. Further, a screw hole 807 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 800 and above and below the engagement piece 802.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 830, a lock hole 832, and a guide hole 833 are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the above-described screw stop hole 807, lock piece 813, and guide protrusion 816. This structure will be described with reference to FIG. 108. As described above, the cover body contact groove 217 is formed on the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3 as described above. Stop holes 830 corresponding to the screw holes 807 are formed in the upper and lower portions (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 433 of the ball passage unit 420 interposed). Further, as shown in FIG. 111, a locking wall 831 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at the lower part of the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3. In addition, a locking hole 832 and a guide hole 833 are opened. The locking hole 832 is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 813 passes therethrough, and a reinforcing rib protrudes from the locking wall 831 around the front surface side of the locking hole 832.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 800 from the open state to the closed state, the guide protrusion 816 is inserted into the guide hole 833 and the locking piece 813 of the cylinder lock 809 is locked as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 832. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 809 and turning it, the locking piece 813 rotates 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 111 (B), and one end of the locking piece 813 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 831. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 800 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 800 is locked by the cylinder lock 809 at the lower portion of the cover body 800, the screw holes that are matched in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 800 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 800 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) into the 807 and the stop holes 830. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 800, and the cover body 800 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by a cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 400 (in this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 404). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 410 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower side of the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and stack, and when actually installing it on the island base of the game hall, the pachinko machine of the other party is located on the back of the pachinko machines 1 that are lined up It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring protruding from the back of the panel. This point also has the same effect as shown in FIG. 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 800 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 809 is that the cover body 800 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 750, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 800. It was configured to hold. As the second reason, as described above, the lower side wall 806 of the cover body 800 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 655, so that the lower side portion of the cover body 800 cannot be particularly opened. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 800, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 800 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 809 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 800 according to the second embodiment has been described above. However, the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment has a lower side portion of the cover body 800 when the cover body 800 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 806 is in contact with and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 711 of the dispensing control board box 655 attached to the frame side board holder 651, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 800 is opened. The substrate box 655 cannot be detached from the frame side substrate holder 651. Further, since the cover body 800 is locked by the cylinder lock 809, not only illegal acts on the game control board box 268 covered by the cover body 800 but also illegal actions on the payout control board box 655 not covered by the cover body 800 are prevented. be able to. Even when the cover body 800 is closed and the cylinder lock 809 is locked, since the connection operation opening 803 is opened in the cover body 800, the test terminals 268b and 268c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 268a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs away and recovers. Further, since the standing wall 804 and the contact protrusion 805 are formed inside the connection operation opening 803 so that no gap is formed between the game control board box 268 and the connection operation opening 803, A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 400 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 410. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Since the thickness is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and even when actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the pachinko of the opponent on the back of the pachinko machines 1 that are lined up backwards It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring protruding from the back of the gaming machine.

As mentioned above, although embodiment was described, in the above-mentioned embodiment, what showed only one storage tray 30 in the door frame 5 was shown, but it is not necessarily one and it is the same as the past. In a pachinko gaming machine having an upper plate and a lower plate, the door frame and the main body frame can be separated from each other, an operation handle portion is provided on the door frame, and a ball hitting device is provided on the main body frame. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation handle portion 71 and the joint unit 90 constituting the handle device 70 are provided on the door frame 5, but the operation handle is attached to the mounting plate fixed to the lower front portion of the main body frame 3. The part 71 and the joint unit 90 may be provided. In this case, the joint unit 90 and the slide member 350 may be integrally formed. Further, the configuration of the shape of the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 and the insertion space 354 of the slide member 350 is not limited to the illustrated embodiment. It is also possible to employ a structure in which the slide protrusion engages with a conical hole formed in the insertion space 354. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the slide movement of the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 is transmitted to the slide rod 326 via the slide member 350 and the swinging piece 321 has been described. For example, the slide member 350 and the swing piece 321 may be omitted, and the slide protrusion of the joint unit may be directly connected to the slide rod. Even in this case, the slide protrusion is formed as a cylindrical slide protrusion, and a conical hole is formed in the slide flange so that the slide protrusion and the slide flange can be smoothly engaged. The engagement between the protrusion and the conical hole may be performed smoothly.
[2. Game board configuration]
Next, various components of the game board 4 described above will be described. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board. When a ball that is driven into the game area 255 (hereinafter referred to as “game ball”) falls, a plurality of obstacle nails that play the game ball and complicate the direction of travel of the game ball are shown in the drawing. The illustration is omitted for ease of viewing.
[2-1. Various components in the game area]
In the game area 255 of the game board 4, as shown in FIG. A function display unit 1225 is attached to the decorative frame 251 of the game board 4. The center accessory device 1200 is arranged at the upper center of the game area 255. As a result, the outlet guidance passage 255a is formed above and to the right of the center accessory device 1200, and when a game ball launched into the game area 255 enters the outlet guidance passage 255a, the outlet guidance passage 255a enters the outlet guidance passage 255a. It falls along, and is guided to the out mouth described later. A prize opening unit 1210 is disposed below the center accessory apparatus 1200. The decoration unit 1220 is arranged in the lower left part of the center accessory apparatus 1200 (to the left of the prize opening unit 1210). The function display unit 1225 is disposed on the lower right side of the decorative frame 251.
[2-1. Center equipment]
The center accessory device 1200 has a liquid crystal display 1315 disposed at the center, and an elliptical opening surrounding the liquid crystal display 1315 is formed. A gradation lamp 1240 that smoothly changes the brightness is provided at the peripheral edge of the opening and the peripheral edge of the center accessory device 1200, and the lower edge of the opening has two upper and lower stages. The upper stage 1250a and the lower stage 1250b, which are divided so that the game balls can swing left and right, the upper start winning opening 1270 where the game balls swinging the upper stage 1250a can be won, and the lower stage 1250b are swung. A ball guide hole 1255a provided so as to be able to receive a moving game ball, and a ball guide path 1255b for guiding the game ball received in the ball guide hole 1255a to the prize opening unit 1210 are provided. A game ball won in the upper start winning opening 1270 is detected by the upper start opening switch 1272.

  A warp hole 1260 for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 255 to the inside of the center accessory device 1200 is provided at the left edge of the opening of the center accessory device 1200. The game ball that has entered the warp hole 1260 swings on the upper stage 1250a and is guided to the upper start winning opening 1270 or dropped on the lower stage 1250b. It swings on the stage 1250b. A game ball swinging on the lower stage 1250b enters the ball guide hole 1255a and is released from the ball guide path 1255b to the outside of the center accessory device 1200 or directly from the lower stage 1250b without entering the ball guide path 1255b. It is discharged to the outside of the center accessory device 1200 and flows down the game area 255. Further, a patrol lamp device 1235 provided with a reflecting mirror that is rotationally driven by a lamp and a motor, and an effect lamp 1230 that is lit in a predetermined manner are provided in the lower right portion of the center accessory device 1200. The patrol lamp device 1235 has a function as a rotating lamp that rotates a reflecting mirror around a lamp that is lit by driving a built-in motor.

  The center accessory device 1200 is provided with a partition plate 1285 so that a game ball that has entered the center accessory device 1200 does not enter the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the center accessory device 1200. The above-described sphere guide hole 1255a is provided in the partition plate 1285 and is connected to the sphere guide path 1255b. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the ball guide hole 1255a passes through the ball guide path 1255b and returns to the game area 255 again. Further, the partition plate 1285 prevents the game ball from colliding with the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315.

In addition, a decorative plate 1200c having a predetermined decoration is provided at the upper center of the opening of the center accessory device 1200, and the back of the decorative plate 1200c is driven to move along the opening edge by a loop unit 1570. A movable member is arranged, and normally the player cannot see the movable member. The movable member is disposed between the partition plate 1285 and the liquid crystal display 1315 so as not to contact the game ball.
[2-2. Winning prize unit]
The winning opening unit 1210 includes a middle starting winning opening 1330, a lower starting winning opening 1340, and a large winning opening apparatus 1350. A middle start prize opening 1330 is disposed above the prize opening unit 1210, and a lower start prize opening 1340 is disposed below the middle start prize opening 1330. A game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 1330 is detected by the middle start opening switch 1360, and a game ball that has entered the lower start winning opening 1340 is detected by the lower start opening switch 1370. The lower start winning port 1340 is provided with an opening / closing blade 1380, and when the drive signal is output to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, the opening / closing blade 1380 is opened. On the other hand, when the drive signal is not output, the opening / closing blade 1380 is closed. When the opening / closing wing 1380 is opened, an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the lower start winning opening 1340 is set. On the other hand, when the open / close wing 1380 is closed, a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the lower start winning opening 1340 is entered. In the closed state in which the open / close wing 1380 is closed, it may be difficult to enter the game ball into the lower start winning opening 1340. That is, it may be difficult to enter the game ball in the closed state compared to the open state.

  Here, the detailed description will be given later, but when a drive signal is output to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the opening / closing blade 1380 is opened and the lower start winning opening 1340 is opened from the closed state. It becomes a state. At this time, the game ball can easily enter the lower start winning opening 1340. On the other hand, when the drive signal is not output to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, the opening / closing blade 1380 is closed and the lower start winning port 1340 is changed from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the game ball entering from the left or right side of the lower start winning opening 1340 is blocked by the opening / closing wing 1380. Further, as described above, the middle start prize opening 1330 is arranged above the lower start prize opening 1340, and game balls entering from above are blocked by the middle start prize opening 1330. When the lower start winning opening 1340 is changed from the closed state to the open state, in addition to the game balls entering from the left or right side thereof, the game balls that have not entered the middle start winning opening 1330, that is, the lower start winning opening A game ball entering from above 1340 can get an opportunity to enter the lower start prize opening 1340.

  On the left side of the winning opening unit 1210, a gate 1455 is provided so as to be able to pass a game ball. A game ball that has passed through the gate 1455 is detected by the gate switch 1460.

  A big prize opening device 1350 is arranged below the lower start prize opening 1340. The special prize opening device 1350 includes a special prize opening 1400, an opening / closing plate 1410, an opening / closing plate solenoid 1420, and a count switch 1430. The special winning opening 1400 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the opening / closing plate 1410 is opened when a drive signal is output to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420. On the other hand, when the drive signal is not output, the opening / closing plate 1410 is closed. When the opening / closing plate 1410 is opened, an open state in which game balls can easily enter the winning prize opening 1400 is set. On the other hand, when the opening / closing plate 1410 is closed, a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 1400 is entered.

  Here, although the detailed description will be described later, when a drive signal is output to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420 when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1410 is opened and the special winning opening 1400 is opened from the closed state. It becomes. At this time, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 1400, and the game ball that has entered is detected by the count switch 1430. On the other hand, when the drive signal is not output to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420, the opening / closing plate 1410 is closed and the special winning opening 1400 is changed from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening 1400.

  The winning opening unit 1210 is provided with a left ordinary winning opening 1440 on the left side of the large winning opening device 1350. A game ball that has entered the left normal winning opening 1440 is detected by the right winning opening switch 1450.

  Further, the winning opening unit 1210 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 1395 for detecting magnetism. Since game balls as game media are made of metal and are attracted by a magnet or the like, there has been an illegal act of illegally entering a game ball into the middle start winning opening 1330 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 using a magnet or the like. Has been done. Based on the fact that magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection switch 1395, it is notified that the illegal act is being performed, or the progress of the game is stopped so that the game ball is not illegally acquired. There is a reed switch type magnetic switch. This reed switch type magnetic switch can detect magnetism in a specific direction, and when the magnetism is detected, the switch is closed.

  By the way, when a drive signal is input to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, magnetism is generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390. As described above, the reed switch type magnetic switch can detect magnetism in a specific direction. Therefore, when a reed switch type magnetic switch is attached to the back of the game board 4 in the vicinity of the middle start winning opening 1330 and the lower starting winning opening 1340, it is necessary to consider the direction so as not to detect magnetism by the opening / closing wing solenoid 1390. There is. However, if the magnet is made to approach the middle start winning opening 1330 or the lower starting winning opening 1340 in the same manner as the magnetism generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, it becomes difficult to detect the approach, and the game ball is moved to the middle start winning opening by the magnet. It becomes difficult to detect an illegal act of entering the ball at 1330 or the lower start winning opening 1340.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a rotation angle sensor (for example, AE-8001 manufactured by Asahi Kasei Electronics Co., Ltd.) in which two Hall elements (for example, manufactured by Asahi Kasei Electronics Co., Ltd .: HZ-116C) are combined is used as the magnetic detection switch 1395. The magnetism generated by the Hall element A is detected as an analog quantity, and the magnetism generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 by the other Hall element B is detected as an analog quantity. The rotation angle sensor detects the magnetism generated from multiple directions by subtracting the analog amount from the Hall element B from the analog amount from the Hall element A. Thus, an illegal act of causing the game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 1330 or the lower starting winning opening 1340 with a magnet is detected.
[2-3. Decoration unit]
The decoration unit 1220 is configured to include a decoration unit side normal winning opening 1465, 1470. The game balls that have entered these decoration unit side normal winning openings 1465 and 1470 are detected by the left winning opening switch 1475. When the game ball launched into the game area 255 does not enter any of the various winning ports provided in the winning unit 1210 and the decoration unit 1220, the gaming ball 255 is collected at the out port 256 described above. In addition, when the game ball launched into the game area 255 enters the above-described outlet guidance path 255a, it falls along the outlet guidance path 255a and is guided to the outlet 256 as it is to be collected.
[2-4. Various indicators and lamps]
The function display unit 1225, which will be described in detail later, includes a plurality of segment indicators and LEDs, and the segment indicator and LEDs include an upper special symbol indicator 1480, a lower special indicator, and the like. Symbol display 1490, upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b, normal symbol indicator 1520, normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d, gaming status indicator lamp 1540, two round indicator lamps 1550 and 15 Each of the round display lamps 1560 is assigned.

  An upper special symbol display 1480 is disposed below the function display unit 1225, and a lower special symbol display 1490 is disposed on the right side of the upper special symbol display 1480. When a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 1330, the upper special symbol display 1480 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner to indicate whether or not a big hit gaming state has occurred. On the other hand, the lower special symbol display 1490, when a game ball enters one of the upper start winning port 1270 and the lower start winning port 1340, displays a predetermined special symbol change display and a big hit like the upper special symbol display 1480. Displays whether a gaming state has occurred. Note that the game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 1330 is not used in the special symbol change display (for example, when the big hit game state and the small hit game state described later are being executed, and the upper special symbol display 1480). And the special symbol display 1490 and the lower special symbol display 1490), the number of game balls that have entered the number of reserved balls (starting memory number) up to a maximum of four It is displayed on the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b arranged on the left side of the symbol display 1480. On the other hand, the game balls that have entered the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower start winning opening 1340 are not used in the special symbol variation display (for example, when executing the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state described later and When the special symbol variation display is executed by either the upper special symbol display 1480 or the lower special symbol display 1490), the number of the game balls that have entered is set as the number of holdings (starting memory number) Up to four are displayed on the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b arranged on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1490.

  A normal symbol display 1520 is arranged above the lower special symbol storage lamp 1510a, and normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are arranged at the upper left of the normal symbol display 1520. When the game ball passes through the gate 1290, the normal symbol display 1520 variably displays whether the open / close wing 1380 is open or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the game balls that have passed through the gate 1290 are not used in the normal symbol change display, up to four normal game memory lamps 1530a to 1530d are displayed with the number of game balls that have passed through as the number of reserves.

  A gaming state display lamp 1540 is disposed on the left side of the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500b. This gaming state display lamp 1540 is lit in a predetermined color to notify that a probability variation or a small hit has occurred as a gaming state.

A 2-land display lamp 1550 is disposed above the normal symbol storage lamp 1530d, and a 15-round display lamp 1560 is disposed above the 2-round display lamp 1550. The two-round display lamp 1550 lights to notify that the maximum number of times that the special winning opening 1400 is in the open state from the closed state (referred to as “round”) is two. On the other hand, the 15-round display lamp 1560 lights to notify that the round is 15 times.
[3. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1225 attached to the back surface of the game board 4 will be described. FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit.

As shown in FIG. 116, the function display unit 1225 includes a function display substrate 1225a and a cover member 1225b. First, the configuration of the function display board 1225a will be described, and then the attachment of the cover member 1225b to the game board 4 will be described.
[3-1. Configuration of function display board]
As shown in FIG. 116, the function display board 1225a includes segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and LEDs 1 to 12. In this embodiment, an upper special symbol display 1480 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a lower special symbol indicator 1490 is assigned to the segment SEG2. The segment indicators SEG1, SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures as special symbols, the above-mentioned middle start winning a prize opening 1330 is displayed. When a game ball enters, the segment indicator SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball enters one of the upper start winning port 1270 and the lower start winning port 1340, the segment indicator SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol. The symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  LED1 is assigned an upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a, LED2 is assigned an upper special symbol memory lamp 1500b, LED3 is assigned a lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a, and LED4 is assigned a lower special symbol memory lamp 1510b. When the game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 1330 is not used in the special symbol change display, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b are turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls entered as the number of reserves. It has become. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a is turned on and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500b is turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a, When both the 1500b lights up, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a blinks when the holding ball is three balls, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500b lights, and when the holding ball is four balls, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b are both Flashes. On the other hand, when the game balls that have entered the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower start winning opening 1340 are not used in the special symbol change display, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a, 1510b lights up or blinks. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a is turned on and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510b is turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a, When 1510b lights up, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a blinks when the holding ball is three balls, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510b lights, and when the holding ball is four balls, the lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b are both Flashes.

  A normal symbol display 1520 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol, so that when the game ball passes through the gate 1290 described above, the predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

  Normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d are assigned to the LEDs 6 to 9, respectively. When the game ball that has passed through the gate 1290 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 1520 and the opening / closing wing 1380 is opened / closed) For the game balls that are not used for the normal symbol variation display immediately after passing 1455, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d are turned on with the number of game balls passed as the number of reserves. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 1530a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530b to 1530d are turned off, and the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a and 1530b are turned on when the holding ball is two balls. The normal symbol memory lamps 1530c and 1530d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530c are turned on when the number of the holding balls is three, the normal symbol memory lamp 1530d is turned off, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1530a when the number of the holding balls is four. ˜1530d are all lit.

  A gaming state display lamp 1540 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the lighting color as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability fluctuation or a small hit.

  A two-round display lamp 1550 is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 1560 is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 1550 lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 1400 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 1560 lights up and notifies that the round is 15 times.

  As described above, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 1225a are the upper special symbol display 1480, the lower special symbol indicator 1490, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, and the lower special symbol. Symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b, normal symbol indicator 1520, normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d, gaming state display lamp 1540, two round display lamp 1550, and 15 round display lamp 1560 are assigned to display various functions. , Segment indicator SEG1, SEG2, LED1-LED12, that is, upper special symbol display 1480, lower special symbol display 1490, upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a, 1500b, lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a, 1510b, normal symbol table Vessel 1520, normal symbol memory lamps 1530A～1530d, gaming state display lamp 1540,2 round display lamp 1550,15 round display lamp 1560 is turned aggregated configured to function display substrate 1225a.

  Also, the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so that the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, the lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b, and the normal symbols are displayed. Distinguish from the indicator 1520, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d, the gaming state indicator lamp 1540, the two-round indicator lamp 1550 and the 15-round indicator lamp 1560, and use segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them. In addition, alphanumeric characters and figures are variably displayed as special symbols.

The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the 2 round display lamp 1550 and the 15 round display lamp 1560 is a fixed value 6. .
[3-2. Attaching the cover member to the game board]
The function display board 1225a is fixed to the cover member 1225b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 1225b is attached from the back surface of the decorative frame 251 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). In the decorative frame 251, segment display openings 251a are formed at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 1225a, and the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. Yes.

The decorative frame 251 is provided with LED insertion holes 251b at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 1225a. When the cover member 1225b is attached to the back surface of the decorative frame 251, It does not interfere with the game board 4. These LED insertion holes 251b are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinking. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 1595A described later. The decorative frame 251 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 251c for pasting the function display seal 1595A. In addition, a concave portion 251d is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 251c. The function display seal 1595A, which is affixed by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver into the recess 251d, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 1595A, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 1595A. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 1595A may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 251c. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by forming the recess 251d in the function display sticker attaching part 251c, the function display sticker 1595A is not peeled off from the function display sticker attaching part 251c when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.
[4. Function display sticker]
Next, the function display seal 1595A will be described. FIG. 117 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 118 is a partial view of the function display sticker viewed through the game window. As shown in FIG. 117, the function display sticker 1595A is printed on the surface of the function display sticker grouped into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display, and is formed on a decorative frame 251 that is a non-game area of the game board 4. Affixed to the function display sticker pasting portion 251c.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the group Grp1 includes an upper special symbol display 1480 and upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b. The upper special symbol display 1480 and the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b It is partitioned in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1 that can be visually recognized, and is printed on the function display sticker 1595A. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1500a, the upper special symbol display 1480, and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1500a, 1500b. The position corresponding to 1500b is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol variation display by the game ball entering the middle start winning opening 1330 described above are displayed. For example, as described above, when a game ball enters the middle start prize opening 1330, the upper special symbol display 1480 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the number of entered game balls is increased as the number of reserves. The special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b are turned on or blinked. Thus, by grouping the upper special symbol display 1480 and the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b into one group Grp1, the upper special symbol display 1480 and the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b The player can be informed that various types of information related to the display of changes in the special symbol by entering the game ball into the start winning opening 1330 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A, thereby changing the special symbol due to the game ball entering the middle start winning opening 1330. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the group Grp2 includes a lower special symbol display 1490 and lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b. The lower special symbol display 1490 and the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b It is sectioned in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2 that can be visually recognized and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is a lower special symbol display 1490, a lower special symbol storage lamp 1510a, a lower special symbol display 1490, and a lower special symbol storage lamp 1510a, 1510b. The position corresponding to 1510b is transparent. In the group Grp2, various kinds of information related to the change display of the special symbol due to the game balls entering the above-mentioned upper start winning opening 1270 and lower starting winning opening 1340 are displayed. For example, as described above, when a game ball enters one of the upper start prize opening 1270 and the lower start prize opening 1340, the lower special symbol display 1490 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variably displayed manner, or a game ball that has entered the ball The special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b are turned on or blinked with the number of spheres as the reserved number. In this way, the lower special symbol display 1490 and the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b are grouped into one group Grp2, so that the lower special symbol display 1490 and the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b become upper. The player can be informed that various types of information related to the change display of the special symbol due to the game ball entering the start winning port 1270 or the lower start winning port 1340 are shown. Accordingly, the player can enter the game balls into the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 by visually observing the group Grp2 which is partitioned and surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. Various types of information regarding the special symbol variation display by the sphere can be easily confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the group Grp3 is composed of a normal symbol display 1520 and normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 1520 and normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d to be visually recognized. And printed on the function display sticker 1595A. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display unit 1520 and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are visible so that the lighting by the normal symbol display unit 1520 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d can be visually recognized. It is transparent. As described above, the normal symbol display 1520 variably displays whether or not the open / close wing 1380 is open / closed as a predetermined normal symbol, and when the open / close wing 1380 changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 1340. It becomes easy to enter the ball. Therefore, the normal symbol display 1520 includes the upper special symbol display 1480, the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b, the lower special symbol display 1490, the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b, and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d. A star mark is printed so as to be distinguished from the game state display lamp 1540, the 2-round display lamp 1550, and the 15-round display lamp. In the group Grp3, various information related to the gate 1290 described above is displayed. For example, as described above, when a game ball passes through the gate 1290, the normal symbol display unit 1520 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. Lights up. In this way, the normal symbol display 1520 and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 1520 and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are displayed in the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that various types of information are shown. Thus, the player can easily confirm various information related to the normal symbol variation display by visually observing the group Grp3 partitioned and surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the game status display lamp 1540, the 2nd round display lamp 1550, and the 15th round display lamp 1560 are visually recognized at positions corresponding to the game status display lamp 1540, the 2nd round display lamp 1550, and the 15th round display lamp 1560. It is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6. The area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6 is a game state display lamp 1540, a two-round display lamp 1550, and a 15th round so that the game state display lamp 1540, the two-round display lamp 1550, and the 15-round display lamp 1560 can be lit. The position corresponding to the display lamp 1560 is transparent. The 2-round display lamp 1550 and the 15-round display lamp 1560 are printed with a value 2 that is the maximum number of rounds at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 1550 so that the maximum number of rounds can be easily understood. A value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds is printed at a position corresponding to the display lamp 1560. As described above, the gaming status display lamp 1540 displays the lighting color as the gaming status, thereby notifying that the gaming status has a probability variation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 1550 indicates that the big prize opening 1400 is displayed. The fact that the number of times (rounds) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 1560 lights and notifies that the round is 15 times. Accordingly, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state display lamp 1540 that is partitioned and surrounded by the solid line SL4 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 1550 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 1595A, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 1560 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 1595A.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. The positions corresponding to the lamp 1550 and the 15-round display lamp 1560 are partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display lamp 1540, the 2-round display lamp 1550, and the 15-round display lamp 1560, respectively. Yes.

  As described above, the function display seal 1595A is grouped so that the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 1225a shown in FIG. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 1520 and the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 1595A, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 1595A as a sticker management number 1595Aa as shown in FIG. 117 and 118, this seal management number 1595Aa is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 42 through the game window 42 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 251d provided in the function display sticker pasting portion 251c described above is also a position that is difficult to see through the game window 42 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118. The concave portion 251d is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  The seal management number 1595Aa is used to prevent an operator from manufacturing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from mistakenly attaching another function display sticker when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is assembled. Further, the seal management number 1595Aa is also used for inventory management of the function display seal 1595A, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are linked to the seal management number 1595Aa and managed. Thus, when the seal management number 1595Aa is examined, the stock of the function display seal 1595A corresponding to the seal management number 1595Aa can be known.

Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko gaming machine, the development period of the pachinko gaming machine is also shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp, a 15-round display lamp that lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 1400 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times or 15 times. In addition to adding a 5-round display lamp or 8-round display lamp that lights up and notifies that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, or when reducing the number of starting winning prize ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko gaming machine by can be dealt with by using a common function display board 1225a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of such a pachinko gaming machine, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 described above, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thus, for example, in the manufacturer of a pachinko machine, before the line operator attaches the function display sticker to the game board, it is determined whether the specification of the pachinko machine and the function display sticker are compatible with each other. Can be confirmed by visual observation, and the sticking of the function display sticker that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine can be prevented. The function display seal is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal, which contributes to improvement in productivity.
[5. Main board and peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board, and FIG. 120 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals and various drive signals inputted to and outputted from the main board (main control board). As shown in FIG. 119, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 1600 and a group of peripheral boards 1610, and various controls are shared by these two groups. First, a group of main substrates 1600 will be described, and then a group of peripheral substrates 1610 will be described.
[5-1. Main board group]
As shown in FIG. 119, the group of main boards 1600 includes a main control board 1700 for controlling game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 715 for controlling payout of game balls. Yes.
[5-1-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 119, the main control board 1700 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1700a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 1700b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 268a. The main control MPU 1700a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 1700a receives the detection signals from the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370, respectively, via the main control I / O port 1700b, the gate switch 1460, The detection signals from the prize opening switch 1475, the right prize opening switch 1450, the count switch 1430, and the magnetic detection switch 1395 are sent via the panel relay board 1650 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 1700b. It is input. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1700a outputs drive signals to the open / close blade solenoid 1390 and the open / close plate solenoid 1420 via the main control I / O port 1700b and the panel relay board 1650, or the main control I / O Upper special symbol display 1480, lower special symbol display 1490, upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b, normal symbols via O port 1700b, panel relay board 1650 and function display board 1225a A drive signal is output to the display 1520, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d, the game state display lamp 1540, the 2-round display lamp 1550, and the 15-round display lamp 1560 (see FIG. 120).

  Further, the main control MPU 1700a transmits various information related to the game (game information), various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 715 via the main drawer relay board 657 described above, and pachinko games from the payout control board 715. Various commands relating to the state of the machine 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 657. Further, the main control MPU 1700a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the sub-integrated board 1740 of the peripheral board 1610 described later via the main control I / O port 1700b. (The boards between the main control board 1700 and the sub-integrated board 1740 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 1700a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 715, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the sub-integrated board 1740.

  The main control board 1700 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 686, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 686 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 1700 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1700a can store various kinds of information in its built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 268a is also output to the payout control board 715 via the main drawer relay board 657.

The main control board 1700 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit, which will be described in detail later. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 686, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1700a via the main control I / O port 1700b, this power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 715 and the like via a harness (not shown).
[5-1-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 119, the payout control board 715 for controlling payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 1710 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 1720 that performs firing control of the firing motor 344, and the above. The error LED display 1730, the error release switch 1731, and the ball removal switch 1732 are provided.
[5-1-2 (a). Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 119, a payout control unit 1710 that performs various controls relating to payouts operates normally as a payout control MPU 1710a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 1710b as an I / O device, and a payout control MPU1710a. An external watchdog timer 1710c (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT1710c") for monitoring whether or not the payout motor is driven, and a payout motor drive circuit 1710d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465 described above. ing. The payout control MPU 1710a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 1710a receives various information (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1700, and operates the RAM clear switch 268a from the main control board 1700. In addition to a signal (detection signal) being input, a detection signal from a full switch 545 is input, or detection signals from a ball break switch 426, a count switch 462, and a rotation angle switch 505 are received as relay terminals within a prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 480.

  The payout control MPU 1710a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700, and is driven from the payout motor drive circuit 1710d to the payout motor 465 based on the received various commands relating to payout. When a signal is output or the ball removal switch 1732 is operated, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged based on this operation signal (detection signal) (ball removal) When a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 1710d to the payout motor 465 or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal board 700b, the ball rental request signal The drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 1710d to the payout motor 465 based on Output or, if the detection signal from the full switch 545 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 465 stops the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 1710d to payout motor 465 on the basis of the detection signal.

Further, the payout control MPU 1710a displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the error LED display 1730, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 1700, and receives a detection signal from the counting switch 462. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 700a. The external terminal board 700a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.
[5-1-2 (b). Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 119, a firing control unit 1720 that performs firing control of the firing motor 344 includes an input circuit 1720a to which various signals are input, a transmission circuit 1720b that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and a clock signal. A firing control circuit 1720c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing motor 344 based on the firing motor drive circuit 1720d that outputs a drive signal to the firing motor 344 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 1720c; It is configured with. The launch control circuit 1720c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 344 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 255 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 1720b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 336 described above is controlled.

  As described above, the handle device 70 (operation handle portion 71) includes the touch switch 80 and the firing stop switch 82. When the touch operation switch 74 of the operation handle portion 71 is touched, the touch switch 80 is operated. When the firing stop button 81 is operated, the firing stop switch 82 detects it. These detection signals will be described in detail later, but are input to the input circuit 1720a via the handle relay terminal 71a described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 700b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a via the CR unit terminal board 700b.

Various types of voltages are supplied to the payout control board 715 from the power supply board 686 in the same manner as the main control board 1700. The power supply board 686 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 715 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 1710a can store various payout information relating to payout in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated when the power is turned on.
[5-2. Peripheral board group]
As shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral board 1610 includes a sub-integrated board 1740 that performs effect control and a liquid crystal control board 1750 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315. The sub integrated substrate 1740 and the liquid crystal control substrate 1750 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown).
[5-2-1. Sub-integrated board]
As shown in FIG. 119, the sub-integrated board 1740 that performs the production control includes a sub-integrated MPU 1740a as a microprocessor, a sub-integrated ROM 1740b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a sound source IC 1740c that performs high-quality sound. And a sound ROM 1740d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 1740c is stored.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a has various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When receiving various commands from the main control board 1700, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a The door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h output a door frame side lighting / flashing command to the lamp driving board 1760 to output a lighting signal or a flashing signal, or output a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the effect lamp 1230. A lighting / flashing command is output to the lamp driving board 1760, a gradation lighting command for outputting a gradation lighting signal to the gradation lamp 1240 is output to the lamp driving board 1760, or a patrol device 1235 having a built-in lamp and motor is driven. A signal is output via the lamp driving substrate 1760, or the patrol device 1 A lamp driving command for outputting a lighting signal to the 35 lighting lamps 1235a is output to the lamp driving substrate 1760; a patrol motor driving command for outputting a driving signal to the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 is output to the lamp driving substrate 1760; The gear module drive motor drive command for outputting a drive signal to the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 of the loop unit 1570 described above is output to the lamp drive board 1760, or the loop unit 1570 of the loop unit 1570 described above is output. An application start command for starting application of positive and negative voltages to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 is output to the lamp driving board 1760, and control signals indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 1740d And it outputs a sound command) to the sound source IC1740c, a display command showing a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1315 and outputs to the liquid crystal control circuit board 1750.

  A display command output from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a to the liquid crystal control board 1750 is performed by a serial input / output port. BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, patrol lamp motor driving command, gear module driving motor, which are output from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a to the lamp driving board 1760 The drive command and the application start command are executed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 1760 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h via the sub drawer relay board 658 based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command, or the received game board side. A lighting signal or a flashing signal is output to the effect lamp 1230 based on the lighting / flashing command, a gradation lighting signal is output to the gradation lamp 1240 based on the received gradation lighting command, or based on the received patrol lamp lighting command. The lighting signal is output to the lighting lamp 1235a of the patrol device 1235, the driving signal is output to the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 based on the received patrol motor driving command, or the received gear module driving motor driving command is received. The drive signal is transmitted to the front gear module of the loop unit 1570. And outputs to the motor 1578 and the rear-side gear module drive motor 1585, and outputs the ON / OFF signals to the front contact module 1579 and the rear-side contact modules 1586 of loop units 1570 based on the application start command received. This ON / OFF signal is a signal for turning on or off the electrical connection for applying the positive and negative voltage to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 of the loop unit 1570. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the LEDs 1572ccd and 1573ccd as the front lights of the cars 1572c and 1573c and the LEDs 1572ccc and 1573ccc as the backlights are turned on.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the detection signal from the front sensor board 1580 and the detection signal from the rear sensor board 1587 of the loop unit 1570 through the lamp drive board 1760, respectively. Based on this, the original position of the front gear module 1572 of the loop unit (original position of the car 1572c) and the original position of the rear gear module 1573 (original position of the car 1573c) are grasped. Further, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 1750 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 1750, or receives an effect selection signal (detection signal) from the effect selection switch 31 described above. It is input via the sub drawer relay board 658 and the lamp driving board 1760.

  The sound source IC 1740c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 1740d based on the sound command output from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and music adapted to various effects from the above-described speaker 34 via the lamp driving board 1760 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 658. And control so that sound effects and the like flow.

The sub-integrated board 1740 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown). The sub-integrated MPU 1740a uses the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT in combination. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 1740a is running out of control.
[5-2-2. LCD control board]
As shown in FIG. 119, a liquid crystal control board 1750 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 1750a as a microprocessor, a liquid crystal control ROM 1750b that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1750c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display 1315, a character ROM 1750d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, and various data stored in the character ROM 1750d are transferred. And a character RAM 1750z to be copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the sub-integrated board 1740, the detailed description thereof will be described later. The VDP 1750c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315. When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the sub-integrated board 1740 as described above.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 1750b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 1750d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 1750z. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 1750d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 1750z in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the progress of the schedule data. Detailed description of the non-resident area transfer schedule data will be described later.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and outputs it to the VDP 1750c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 1750c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b and outputs the extracted data to the VDP 1750c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input, the VDP 1750c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 1750z based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display 1315. The VDP 1750c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display 1315. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 1750d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 1750d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 1750d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display 1315 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 1750z having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 1750z. Yes. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 1750d in a compressed state. Here, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display 1315. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display 1315, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”). Note that the sprite is configured by pasting a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display 1315. It is driven by a main scan for setting a state and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction crossing one direction. When one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control board 1750 is input to the liquid crystal display 1315, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs liquid crystal display 1315 as main scanning based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for each pixel of one line. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, a liquid crystal display is displayed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. The data is sequentially output to the pixels for one line from the left to the right of the unit 1315.

The liquid crystal display 1315 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter board 1755.
[6. Lamp drive board]
Next, the lamp driving substrate 1760 will be described. FIG. 121 is a part of a block diagram of a lamp driving substrate. As shown in FIG. 121, the lamp driving substrate 1760 includes a gradation control IC 1760b. When the gradation control IC 1760b receives the above-described door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, and gradation lighting command output from the sub-integrated board 1740, the door is connected via the sub drawer relay board 658. A lighting signal or a flashing signal is output to the frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h, a lighting signal or a flashing signal is output to the effect lamp 1230, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the gradation lamp 1240. In addition, the gradation control IC 1760 b receives an effect selection signal from the effect selection switch 31 via the sub drawer relay board 658. Note that the gradation control IC 1760b is used for pattern creation data for turning on or blinking the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230, or for creating a pattern for turning on the gradation lamp 1240 when the power is turned on. Data is received from the sub-integrated board 1740 as initial data and stored in a built-in RAM. First, the configuration of the gradation control IC 1760b will be described, followed by various commands.
[6-1. Configuration of gradation control IC]
As shown in FIG. 121, the gradation control IC 1760b includes a noise removal unit 1760ba, a serial unit 1760bb, a gradation update control unit 1760bc, an ON time setting table register group 1760bd, a waveform table register group 1760be, a pulse generation unit 1760bf, An input / output unit 1760bg and an output unit 1760bh are provided.
[6-1-1. Noise removal unit]
The noise removal unit 1760ba receives the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command output from the sub-integrated board 1740 via the serial input terminal 1760bk, and receives them as electrical signals. Noise is removed from certain initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, and gradation lighting command. The gradation control IC 1760b has a built-in transmission circuit (not shown), and a clock signal from the transmission circuit is input to the noise removal unit 1760ba. The noise removing unit 1760ba removes a predetermined band frequency component from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, and gradation lighting command, which are electrical signals, based on the input clock signal. Perform the filtering process. In this filtering process, the noise of 1 microsecond (μs) obtained by experiment is removed, and the filtered initial data, door frame side lighting flashing command, game board side lighting flashing command, and gradation lighting command are displayed. It is input to the serial part 1760bb. As described above, the initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, and gradation lighting command, which are still affected by noise, are not directly input to the serial unit 1760bb. .
[6-1-2. Serial part]
When the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, and gradation lighting command, which are filtered by the noise removing unit 1760ba, are input to the serial unit 1760bb, the initial data, which is serial data, The door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command are restored to parallel data. The initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command and gradation lighting command restored to the parallel data are input to the gradation update control unit 1760bc. The serial unit 1760bb includes an input / output direction register and an input register (not shown). In addition to initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, and gradation lighting command, etc. The input / output direction setting command received from the sub integrated board 1740 is stored in the input / output direction register. The input / output direction register sets the input / output unit 1760bg to the input side or the output side based on the input / output direction setting command. Specifically, the input / output direction register outputs a lighting signal or blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230, and an input / output terminal group 1760bm that outputs a gradation lighting signal to the gradation lamp 1240. The input / output unit 1760bg is set on the output side so that the terminal of the input / output terminal 1760bg becomes the output terminal, while the input / output terminal group 1760bm to which the effect selection signal from the effect selection switch 31 is input is input / output. The unit 1760bg is set on the input side. In the input / output direction register, when the input / output unit 1760bg is set to the input side, a signal is input to the input register via the terminal of the input / output terminal group 1760bm and the input / output unit 1760bg. The serial unit 1760bb outputs the signal input to the input register to the sub integrated board 1740 via the serial output terminal 1760bn. In the present embodiment, an effect selection signal from the effect selection switch 31 is input to the input register via the terminals of the input / output terminal group 1760bm and the input / output unit bg. The serial unit 1760bb outputs the effect selection signal to the sub-integrated board 1740 via the serial output terminal 1760bn.
[6-1-3. Gradation update control unit]
When the initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, and gradation lighting command, which are restored to parallel data by the serial unit 1760bb, are input, the gradation update control unit 1760bc restores to parallel data. The stored initial data is stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be, which is a RAM built in the gradation control IC 1760b, while being restored to parallel data, the door frame side The lighting flashing command, the game board side lighting flashing command, and the gradation lighting command are stored in a command register (not shown). A pattern for lighting or blinking the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230 based on the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command stored in the command register. Control is performed to create a pattern for turning on the gradation lamp 1240 with reference to the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be. The created pattern for lighting or blinking the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230 and the pattern for turning on the gradation lamp 1240 are input to the pulse generator 1760bf.
[6-1-4. ON time setting table register group]
The ON time setting table register group 1760bd stores initial data received from the sub-integrated board 1740, such as when the power is turned on, under the control of the gradation update control unit 1760bc. The ON time setting table register group 1760bd includes a total of eight ON time setting tables including an ON time setting table 0 to an ON time setting table 7. Each ON time setting table is composed of a total of 32 gradations of 0 gradations to 31 gradations. In these 0 gradations to 31 gradations, ON times for designating light emission luminance are set by pulse widths, respectively, and 12-bit widths, that is, 0 to 4096 milliseconds (ms) ON times are set. The size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is 3072 bits (= 8 tables × 32 gradations × 12 bits), and the bit rate from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the lamp driving board 1760 is As described above, since it is set to 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs), the transmission time of the data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is 12.288 milliseconds (= 3072 bits × 4 μs) ( ms).
[6-1-5. Waveform table registers]
The waveform table register group 1760be stores the initial data received from the sub-integrated board 1740, such as when the power is turned on, similarly to the ON time setting table register group 1760bd, under the control of the gradation update control unit 1760bc. The waveform table register group 1760be includes a total of three waveform tables, waveform table 0 to waveform table 2. Each waveform table is composed of a total of 90 waveforms of 0 to 89 waveforms. In these 0 waveform to 89 waveform, an array in which 0 gradation to 31 gradation of the ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is arranged is set. A 5-bit width, that is, 0 gradation to 32 gradation is set. The size of the data stored in the waveform table register group 1760be is 1350 bits (= 3 tables × 90 waveforms × 5 bits), and the bit rate from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the lamp driving board 1760 is 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs), the transmission time of data stored in the waveform table register group 1760be is 5.4 ms (= 1350 bits × 4 μs).
[6-1-6. Pulse generator]
The pulse generation unit 1760bf is input with a pattern for turning on or blinking the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230, or a pattern for turning on the gradation lamp 1240 created by the gradation update control unit 1760bc. Then, a pulse is generated based on these patterns. The generated pulse is input to the input / output unit 1760bg and the output unit bh, and is output to the effect lamp 1230 from the terminals of the input / output terminal group 1760m and the output terminal group 1760bp as a lighting signal or blinking signal, or as a gradation lighting signal. It is output to the gradation lamp 1240, or output to the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h via the sub drawer relay board 658 as a lighting signal or a blinking signal. Thereby, the effect lamp 1230 and the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h are turned on or blinking, and the gradation lamp 1240 is turned on in gradation.
[6-2. Various commands]
As described above, the gradation control IC 1760b receives the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command output from the sub-integrated board 1740. These door frame side lighting / flashing commands, game board side lighting / flashing commands, and gradation lighting commands are the terminal number in which the input / output terminal group 1760bm is set as the output terminal, the terminal number of the output terminal group 1760bp, and the 0 gradation. Any one of the 31 gradations, the waveform table number of any one of the waveform table 0 to the waveform table 2, the waveform transition time that is the time until transition to the next waveform, the initial value of the waveform counter (Any waveform number from 0 waveform to 89 waveform), Waveform counter maximum value (A waveform number from 0 waveform to 89 waveform), ON from any of ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 It consists of a time setting table number and the like. The door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, and the gradation lighting command have a size of 36 bits (4.5 bytes), and a terminal whose input / output terminal group 1760bm is set as an output terminal. And set individually for the terminals of the output terminal group 1760 bp.
[7. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 686 described above will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. FIG. 122 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine.
[7-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 686 has the above-described power supply line connector 688 electrically connected to a power cord (not shown), and the plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of an island (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko island equipment”). It is. When the power switch 687 described above is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 686, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 122, the power supply board 686 includes a + 34V creation circuit 686a, a + 18V creation circuit 686b, and a + 9V creation circuit 686c. The + 34V creation circuit 686a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and describes it as DC + 34V (DC + 34V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 34V.” In this embodiment, the maximum current is 6 amperes (A ) Can be streamed. The + 18V creation circuit 686b creates + 34V by rectifying the AC24V supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and describes the + 34V from the created + 34V (DC + 18V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 18V”. In the present embodiment, the maximum current is described. 4A can be flown.). The + 9V creation circuit 686c creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”. In this embodiment, 0.4 A can flow as the maximum current) from + 18V created by the + 18V creation circuit 686b. . The voltages created by the + 34V creation circuit 686a, + 18V creation circuit 686b, and + 9V creation circuit 686c are supplied to the payout control board 715.
[7-2. Power supplied to each control board]
Next, the power supplied to each control board will be described. + 34V, + 18V and + 9V supplied from the power supply board 686 are supplied to the payout control board 715 and supplied to the main control board 1700 via the main drawer relay board 657 as shown in FIG. Then, + 34V, + 18V and + 9V supplied to the main control board 1700 are supplied to the sub-integrated board 1740 and supplied to the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the lamp driving board 1760, respectively. Note that +34 V and +18 V are supplied to the liquid crystal control board 1750 via the sub-integrated board 1740. Here, the power supplied to the payout control board 715 will be described first, followed by the power supplied to the main control board 1700, the power supplied to the sub-integrated board 1740, the power supplied to the liquid crystal control board 1750, The power supplied to the lamp driving board 1760 will be described.
[7-2-1. Power supplied to dispensing control board]
The payout control board 715 includes a payout control series regulator 715a in addition to the payout control MPU 1710a and the like. The payout control series regulator 715a receives + 9V supplied from the power supply board 686, and from this + 9V, the reference voltage of the payout control board 715 is + 5V DC (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”). create. In addition to the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control unit 1710 shown in FIG. It is also input to the circuit 1720c, the firing motor drive circuit 1720d, and the like.

+ 34V supplied from the power supply board 686 is input to the launch motor drive circuit 1720d in addition to the payout motor drive circuit 1710d, and is used as a drive power source for the payout motor 465 and the launch motor 344 shown in FIG. Yes. In addition to the door opening switch 3a, + 18V supplied from the power supply board 686 is the main body frame opening switch 3b, the full switch 545, the ball break switch 426, the counting switch 462, and the rotation angle switch 505 shown in FIG. Etc. are input.
[7-2-2. Power supplied to main control board]
The main control board 1700 includes a main control series regulator 1700c and a power failure monitoring circuit 1700d in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. The main control series regulator 1700c receives + 9V supplied from the payout control board 715, and creates + 5V that is the reference voltage of the main control board 1700 from this + 9V. This + 5V is input to the main control I / O port 1700b shown in FIG. 119 in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. Although details of the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d will be described later, + 18V and + 9V supplied from the payout control board 715 are input, and these + 18V and + 9V power failure or instantaneous power failure signs are monitored. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d receives a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 1700e and monitors the radio wave detection signal. The radio wave detection switch 1700e is disposed in the vicinity of the main control series regulator 1700c, and detects whether or not the main control series regulator 1700c is irradiated with a high frequency.

  When the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d detects the sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, or when a radio wave detection signal is input from the radio wave detection switch 1700e, the power failure warning signal is transmitted as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. Output to. Further, a power failure warning signal is input to the main control board 1700 via the main drawer relay board 657, and a power failure warning signal is input to the liquid crystal control board 1750 via the sub-integrated board 1740.

  + 34V supplied from the payout control board 715 is used as a driving power source for the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420 shown in FIG. Note that + 18V supplied from the payout control board 715 is input to the gate switch 1460, the left prize opening switch 1475 and the like shown in FIG. 119 in addition to the upper start switch 1360.

  The main control board 1700 includes a hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f, and + 34V, +18, and + 9V supplied from the payout control board 715 are input to the hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f. Here, the “live line” means a state in which a current flows through the wiring (harness).

The hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f will be described in detail later, but with the power switch 687 shown in FIG. 97 kept on, that is, + 34V, +18 and + 9V are still supplied from the payout control board 715 In the state, when the game board 4 shown in FIG. 1 is attached to the main body frame 3, the drawer connector 730 provided on the main drawer relay terminal plate 657 shown in FIG. 93 and the game board 4 shown in FIG. This is a circuit for preventing welding with the drawer connector 270 provided on the relay terminal plate 269 of [7-2-3. Power supplied to sub-integrated board]
The sub integrated board 1740 includes a sub integrated MPU 1740a, a sound source IC 1740c, and the like. The sub-integrated board 1740 has a liquid crystal control of + 5V that is the reference voltage of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and DC + 3.3V that is the reference voltage of the sound source IC 1740c (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”). It is supplied from the substrate 1750. In addition to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, + 5V is input to, for example, a bus buffer circuit (not shown). This bus buffer circuit is used as a bus line interface between the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the sub-integrated ROM 1740b shown in FIG. On the other hand, + 3.3V is input to the sub-integrated ROM 1740b and the sound ROM 1740d shown in FIG. 119, for example, in addition to the sound source IC 1740c.

For example, + 18V supplied via the main control board 1700 is input to a power amplifier that amplifies music, sound effects and the like output from the speaker 34 shown in FIG. Note that +9 V supplied via the main control board 1700 is output to the lamp driving board 1760 as it is, and is not used in the sub-integrated board 1740. Further, + 34V supplied via the main control board 1700 is output as it is to the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the lamp driving board 1760 and is not used in the sub integrated board 1740.
[7-2-4. Power supplied to LCD control board]
The liquid crystal control board 1750 includes a liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e in addition to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a and the VDP 1750c. The liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e is supplied with + 18V supplied via the sub-integrated board 1740. From this + 18V, the reference voltage of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the like is + 5V and the reference voltage of the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the like. + 3.3V, DC + 1.5V (DC + 1.5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 1.5V”) which is the power source of the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a and VDP1750c, and DC 2.5V (DC + 2.5V) which is the power source of the VDP1750c. , Hereinafter referred to as “+2.5 V”). In addition to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, + 3.3V is input to the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, the character ROM 1750d and the character RAM 1750z, the liquid crystal drive circuit for driving the liquid crystal display 1315, and the like shown in FIG. As described above, + 1.5V, + 2.5V, and + 3.3V are input to the VDP 1750c.

  + 5V and + 3.3V created by the liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e are also supplied to the sub-integrated board 1740, and these + 5V and + 3.3V are commonly used by the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the sub-integrated board 1740. .

+ 34V supplied via the sub-integrated board 1740 is output to the inverter board 1755 as it is, and is not used in the liquid crystal control board 1750.
[7-2-5. Power supplied to inverter board]
The inverter board 1755 is provided with a cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1755a for lighting a cold cathode tube which is a backlight of the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. The cold cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1755a is supplied with + 34V supplied via the sub-integrated substrate 1740.
[7-2-6. Power supplied to lamp drive board]
The lamp drive board 1760 includes a lamp drive series regulator 1760a, a gradation control IC 1760b, and a gear module drive circuit 1760e. The lamp drive series regulator 1760a receives + 9V supplied via the sub-integrated board 1740, and creates + 5V that is the reference voltage of the lamp drive board 1760 from this + 9V. This + 5V is input to the gradation control IC 1760b that performs gradation lighting of the gradation lamp 1240 shown in FIG. + 34V and + 18V supplied via the sub-integrated board 1740 are input to a gear module drive circuit 1760e for controlling the drive of the loop unit 1570 shown in FIG. For example, + 34V is used as a drive power source for a drive motor (not shown) of the movable member of the loop unit 1570, and + 18V is input to a photosensor (not shown) that detects the original position of the movable member of the loop unit 1570.
[8. Noise suppression circuit and grounding circuit for power supply board]
Next, the ground circuit of the power supply board 686 will be described. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is input to the power board 686 via the power line connector 688 as described above. The power supply board 686 is provided with countermeasures against two types of mode noise, normal mode noise appearing between the AC 24V power supply lines and common mode noise appearing between the AC 24V and the ground (GND). ing. First, the noise countermeasure circuit of the power supply board 686 will be described, and then the ground circuit of the power supply board 686 will be described. FIG. 123 is a circuit diagram showing a noise countermeasure circuit and a ground circuit of the power supply board.
[8-1. Power board noise countermeasures]
As shown in FIG. 123, the AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is input to the input terminals 1 and 3 of the power switch 687 (in this embodiment, Matsushita Electric Works: AJ8221BF) via the power line connector 688. ing. Specifically, an AC 24V A line (hereinafter referred to as “AC24VA”) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 687, and an AC 24V B line is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 687. (Hereinafter referred to as “AC24VB”). The output side terminals 2 and 4 of the power switch 687 are connected to a choke coil via a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for countermeasure against common mode noise and a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for countermeasure against normal mode noise. L1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ueno: ADR2515-010TDK).

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC includes capacitors C110 and C111 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. Capacitors C110 and C111 have the same capacity, and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are for removing spike noise that could not be reduced by the capacitors C110 and C111.

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C112 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C112 removes normal mode noise generated in the AC24VA and AC24. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber), and removes spike noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C112.

The AC24VA output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 687 is input to the choke coil L1 via the FUSE1, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 687. The output AC24VB is input to the choke coil L1 via the FUSE2, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC. The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure part for common mode noise of AC24VA and AC24VB, and prevents noise disturbance. The AC24VA and AC24VB in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the above-described + 34V creation circuit 686a and + 18V creation circuit 686b. The AC24VA and AC24VB input to the choke coil L1 are input to the CR unit power line connector 689 in addition to the choke coil L1, and AC24VA and AC24VB are supplied to a CR unit (not shown).
[8-2. Power supply board ground circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, grounding wires for removing noise and the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 35 to 38) shown in FIG. Ground wire FG3 is electrically connected to ground connector 690a and removes noise and the like from the sphere flowing down tank rail member 410 shown in FIG. 3 (from ground wire connection portion 207 shown in FIG. 35). Is electrically connected to the ground connector 690b as the frame ground FG1, and an earth wire for removing noise and the like from the prize ball unit 450 shown in FIG. 3 is electrically connected to the ground connector 690c as the frame ground FG1, An earth wire for removing noise and the like from a CR unit (not shown) serves as a frame ground FG and is an earth connector 6 0d are electrically connected and.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the frame ground FG3 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688 through the resistor R110, and the frame ground FG1 is connected through the resistor R111. The frame ground FG of the power supply line connector 688 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2, and the frame ground FG is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power supply line connector 688 via the resistor R112. The resistor R110 prevents noise from the frame grounds FG1 and FG from entering the frame ground FG3, and the resistor R111 prevents noise from the frame grounds FG3 and FG from entering the frame ground FG1. The resistor R112 prevents noise from the frame grounds FG3 and FG1 from entering the frame ground FG.

  The AC24VB supplied from the Pachinko Island facility is connected to one of the arresters DSP1 (Mitsubishi Materials: DSP-301N-A21F in this embodiment) between the power line connector 688 and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 687. Electrically connected. The other of the arrester DSP1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688. The arrester DSP1 causes the surge voltage to flow as a surge current to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688 when a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters the AC24V supplied from the Pachinko island facility by lightning, for example. Thus, the surge voltage is limited so that no surge voltage is applied to the power switch 687 or the high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated when the power switch 687 is turned on / off is supplied to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a surge current to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 687. Thereby, various control boards such as the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 122 can be protected from the surge voltage, and failure due to the surge voltage is prevented.

When the frame ground FG2 is not grounded, the discharge path of the power supply board 686 is formed on the side of the AC24VB that is the power source of the pachinko island facility via the arrester DSP1, for example, the door frame 5 Is not easily charged. Thereby, even if a player touches the door frame 5, the player does not feel discomfort due to electrostatic discharge from the door frame 5.
[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 119 will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, the main control board 1700 is supplied with DC power supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V from the power supply board 686 via the payout control board 715. These DC power supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V are first input to the above-described hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f. For example, + 9V is input to the main control series regulator 1700c via the hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f. The main control series regulator 1700c generates + 5V which is a reference voltage of the main control board 1700 and the like from the input + 9V, and this + 5V is input to the main control MPU 1700a and the like. Further, + 9V and + 18V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d through the hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d monitors the signs of the input power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 9V and + 9V. Here, the hot line failure prevention circuit will be described first, followed by the main control series regulator, the peripheral circuit of the main control board, various input / output signals on the main control board, and the power failure monitoring circuit. 124 is a circuit diagram showing a hot line failure prevention circuit, FIG. 125 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, and FIG. 126 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit.
[9-1. Hot wire failure prevention circuit]
As shown in FIG. 124, the hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f includes a + 34V hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700fa, a + 18V hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700fb, and a + 9V hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700fc. Of the + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V input to the live line fault circuit 1700f, + 18V is electrically connected in series with the resistor R100. The resistor R100 connected in series is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the grounded electrolytic capacitor C100. The electrolytic capacitor C100 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component superimposed on voltage). The smoothed + 18V is input to the + 34V live line connection failure prevention circuit 1700fa, the + 18V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fb, and the + 9V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fc.
[9-1-1. + 34V live line failure prevention circuit]
The + 34V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fa includes a relay RL1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), a thermistor TH1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC), an electrolytic capacitor C101, A capacitor C102 is provided. The relay RL1 incorporates a coil, iron piece, switch, etc. When a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON), and the switch side input The circuit between pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-described smoothed + 18V. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd pin and 3rd pin as switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH1, and + 34V from the payout control board 715 is electrically connected to this one connected in parallel. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C101. By this electrolytic capacitor C101, ripples (AC components convolved with voltage) are removed and smoothed. Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C102 grounded to the ground.

  Here, when the game board 4 shown in FIG. 1 is attached to the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor C101 of the main control board 1700 mounted on the game board 4 is already discharged. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 shown in FIG. 97 turned on, that is, with + 34V being supplied from the payout control board 715, the board shown in FIG. The drawer connector 730 provided on the unit 650 side and the drawer connector 270 provided on the relay terminal plate 269 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 45 are in an electrically conductive state, and a large current flows into the electrolytic capacitor C101 all at once. Inflow (referred to as “rush current”). At this time, as shown in FIG. 99, a contact 730a which is a + 34V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, and a terminal 270a which is a + 34V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 270 provided on the game board 4 side. Therefore, the contact 730a, which is a + 34V voltage supply line, and the terminal 270a are welded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the inrush current is reduced by the thermistor TH1 and charged by the electrolytic capacitor C101. As a result, the + 34V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, which is generated when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, and the game board 4 side are provided. Further, welding of the drawer connector 270 to the + 34V voltage supply line can be prevented. Thereby, even if the game board 4 is pushed into the main body frame 3, damage to the contact 730a and the terminal 270a which are + 34V voltage supply lines due to welding can be prevented. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 in this embodiment are an initial resistance value of 5 ohms (Ω), a maximum capacity current of 4A, and a residual resistance value of 0.35Ω. When a current flows through the thermistor TH1, the thermistor TH1 generates heat. The resistance value changes. As a result, even if the relay RL1 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH1 itself is suppressed, thereby preventing the thermistor TH1 from being damaged. it can.

Here, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change, such as cement resistance, is used, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat near the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH1 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH1 itself is suppressed. For this reason, electronic components can be arranged in the vicinity of the thermistor TH1, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH1. Note that the characteristics of the relay RL1 in this embodiment are an ON voltage of 13.5 V and an OFF voltage of 0.9 V, and the ON / OFF time of the switch built in the relay RL1 is the above-described resistance R100, capacitor C100, When the switch of the relay RL1 is turned on, the inrush current has already been lowered and the resistance value is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH1 and flows to the switch of the relay RL1. become.
[9-1-2. + 18V live line failure prevention circuit]
The + 18V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fb includes a relay RL2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), a thermistor TH2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC), an electrolytic capacitor C103, The capacitor C104 is provided. The relay RL2 has the same configuration as the relay RL1, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and switches on (turns on), and between the switch side input pins. The circuit is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-described smoothed + 18V. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH2, and + 18V from the dispensing control board 715 is electrically connected to one of these connected in parallel. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C103. The electrolytic capacitor C103 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component convolved with voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C104 grounded.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor C103 of the main control board 1700 mounted on the game board 4 is already discharged. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, that is, with + 18V being supplied from the payout control board 715, a drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, The drawer connector 270 provided on the relay terminal plate 269 of the game board 4 is in an electrically conductive state, and an inrush current flows into the electrolytic capacitor C103 at once. At this time, an inrush current flows through a contact 730a which is a + 18V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side and a terminal 270a which is a + 18V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 270 provided on the game board 4 side. Therefore, the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 18V voltage supply lines, are welded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the inrush current is reduced by the thermistor TH2 and charged by the electrolytic capacitor C103. Accordingly, the + 18V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, which is generated when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, and the game board 4 side are provided. Further, welding of the drawer connector 270 to the + 18V voltage supply line can be prevented. Thereby, even if the game board 4 is pushed into the main body frame 3, damage to the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 18V voltage supply lines due to welding, can be prevented. The characteristic of the thermistor TH2 in this embodiment is the same as the characteristic of the thermistor TH1 described above. When a current flows through the thermistor TH2, its resistance value changes as the thermistor TH2 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay RL2 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value thereof decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed, thereby preventing the thermistor TH2 from being damaged. it can.

Here, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change, such as cement resistance, is used, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat near the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed. For this reason, electronic components can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH2, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH2. Note that the characteristics of the relay RL2 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay RL1 described above, and the inrush current has already decreased when the switch of the relay RL2 is turned on, compared to the thermistor TH2. Therefore, the current flows through the switch of the relay RL2 having a very small resistance value.
[9-1-3. + 9V live line failure prevention circuit]
The hot wire failure prevention circuit 1700fc for + 9V includes relay RL3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), thermistor TH3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC), electrolytic capacitor C1, The capacitor C2 is provided. The relay RL3 has the same configuration as the relays RL1 and RL2, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON), and the switch side input pin The circuit between them is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-described smoothed + 18V. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The second and third pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH3, and one connected in parallel is electrically connected to + 9V from the dispensing control board 715. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C1. The electrolytic capacitor C1 removes and smoothes the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C2 grounded.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor C1 of the main control board 1700 attached to the game board 4 is already discharged. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, that is, with +9 V being supplied from the payout control board 715, a drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, The drawer connector 270 provided on the relay terminal plate 269 of the game board 4 is in an electrically conductive state, and an inrush current flows into the electrolytic capacitor C1 all at once. At this time, an inrush current flows through the contact 730a which is the + 9V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side and the terminal 270a which is the + 9V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 270 provided on the game board 4 side. Therefore, the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 9V voltage supply lines, are welded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the inrush current is reduced by the thermistor TH3 and charged by the electrolytic capacitor C1. Accordingly, the + 9V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side and the game board 4 side, which are generated when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, are provided. Further, welding of the drawer connector 270 to the + 9V voltage supply line can be prevented. Thereby, even if the game board 4 is pushed into the main body frame 3, damage to the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 9V voltage supply lines due to welding, can be prevented. The characteristics of the thermistor TH3 in the present embodiment are the same as those of the thermistors TH1 and TH2, and when a current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value thereof changes as the thermistor TH3 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay RL3 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH3 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH2 from being damaged. it can.

Here, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change, such as cement resistance, is used, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat near the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH3 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH3 itself is suppressed. For this reason, electronic components can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH3, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH3. Note that the characteristics of the relay RL3 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relays RL1 and RL2 described above, and the inrush current has already decreased when the switch of the relay RL3 is turned on, and the thermistor TH3. The resistance value is much smaller than that of the relay RL3.
[9-2. Main control series regulator]
As shown in FIG. 125, the main control board 1700 is reset as a peripheral circuit in addition to the main control MPU 1700a, main control I / O port 1700b, main control series regulator 1700c (in this embodiment, manufactured by ROHM: BA50BC0WT). Main control system reset IC1 that outputs a signal (in this embodiment, Renesas: M51953), main control crystal oscillator X1 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, manufactured by Kyocera: EXO-3, 24 megahertz (MHz)) It is configured with.

  125, as shown in FIG. 125, main control series regulator 1700c receives + 9V at the VCC terminal, which is the power supply input terminal, through the + 9V hot line failure prevention circuit 1700fc of hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f shown in FIG. ing. This +9 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the ground (GND) and the grounded electrolytic capacitor C1 (same as the electrolytic capacitor C1 shown in FIG. 124). Further, noise generated between the power supply board 686 and the main control board 1700 is removed by the grounded and grounded capacitor C2 (same as the capacitor C2 shown in FIG. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 9V is also input to a CTL terminal that is a control terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c. The main control series regulator 1700c generates + 5V from + 9V input to the VCC terminal when + 9V is input to the CTL terminal, and outputs it from the OUT terminal which is an output terminal. A diode D1 (1SS133 in this embodiment) is provided between the OUT terminal and the VCC terminal, the anode terminal of the diode D1 and the OUT terminal are electrically connected, and the cathode terminal of the diode D1 and the VCC The terminal is electrically connected. When a reverse bias is applied between the VCC terminal and the OUT terminal, it is input to the VCC terminal side via the diode D1, thereby preventing destruction of the main control series regulator 1700c due to the reverse bias.

The + 5V output from the OUT terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple by the electrolytic capacitor C3 grounded. The smoothed + 5V is input to the main control system reset IC1, the main control crystal oscillator X1, the main control MPU 1700a, the main control I / O port 1700b, and the like. Note that the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.
[9-3. Peripheral circuit of main control board]
[9-3-1. Main control system reset IC]
As shown in FIG. 125, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset IC1. The main control system reset IC1 resets the main control MPU 1700a and the main control I / O port 1700b, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset IC1 is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor C4, and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor C4. . Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset IC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset IC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to + 5V by a pull-up resistor R1. The voltage raised to +5 V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C5 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C5 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R1, and the logic becomes HI, and the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN of the main control I / O port 1700b. On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1700a and the main control I / O The O port 1700b is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor C6, and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant, and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.
[9-3-2. Main control crystal oscillator]
+ 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is input to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator X1, as shown in FIG. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor C7, and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also input to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator X1 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by inputting + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator X1 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Has been. Note that the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded, and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.
[9-4. Power supply created on the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 125, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the VCC that is the power supply terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b. Input to the terminal. The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1700a is electrically connected to the capacitor C8 grounded and the VCC terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b is electrically connected to the capacitor C9 grounded to the VDD terminal. Further, + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal that is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1700a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b is grounded to the ground. Further, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is also input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d and the like.
[9-5. Various input / output signals of the main control board]
The operation of the RAM clear switch 268a (in this embodiment, manufactured by OMRON: B3F-1052) shown in FIG. 119 is input to the main control I / O port 1700b as a detection signal.
[9-5-1. Detection signal from RAM clear switch]
As shown in FIG. 125, the third pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 268a is electrically connected to the input pin PE5 that is the fifth pin of the input port PE of the main control I / O port 1700b. Since the input pin PE5 is a negative logic input, the voltage between the third pin of the RAM clear switch 268a and the input pin PE5 of the main control I / O port 1700b is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R2. The voltage raised to +5 V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C10 grounded (the capacitor C10 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R2 and the logic becomes HI and is input to the input pin PE5 of the main control I / O port 1700b, while when the RAM clear switch 268a is operated. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the input pin PE5 of the main control I / O port 1700b. Note that the first and second pins of the RAM clear switch 268a are grounded and the fourth pin is electrically connected to the third pin.
[9-5-2. Other various input / output signals]
Serial data from the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 119 is input to the RX terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 1700a, as a payer serial data reception signal. On the other hand, serial data transmitted from the TX terminal, which is a serial data output terminal of the main control MPU 1700a, to the payout control board 715 is output as a main payout serial data transmission signal.

  For example, each input pin of the input port PE and the input port PD of the main control I / O port 1700b receives the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 268a at the input pin PE5 and the input pin PE6 as shown in FIG. The indicated power failure notice signal is input, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 715 is input to the input pin PE7 to notify the completion of the normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal. A detection signal from the start port switch 1360 is input.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 1700a sends a power failure warning signal from the output pins PA to PC of the main control I / O port 1700b via the data bus, for example, from the output pin PB5 to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. A power failure clear signal to be cleared is output, a main payment ACK signal is transmitted from the output pin PB6 to notify the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal, and the sub integration shown in FIG. 119 is output from the output pins PC0 to PC5. Various commands are output to the substrate 1740, and a drive signal from the output pin PB1 to the open / close blade solenoid 1390 is output.

The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I / O port 1700b and the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 1700a exchange various information and various signals via the data bus. The main control MPU 1700a reads various signals from the input ports PE and PD via the data bus, and outputs various signals from the output ports PA to PC via this data bus.
[9-6. Power failure monitoring circuit]
Next, the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. 122 will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, + 34V, + 18V and + 9V are supplied to the main control board 1700 via the payout control board 715, and + 18V and + 9V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d monitors + 18V and + 9V power failure or instantaneous power failure signs. When a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign is detected, a power failure notification signal is provided as a power failure notification in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. 715 and the sub-integrated board 1740. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d receives a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 1700e shown in FIG. 122, and when this radio wave detection signal is inputted, in addition to the main control MPU 1700a, a payout control. Output to the substrate 715 and the sub-integrated substrate 1740. First, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the + 18V power failure or instantaneous power failure monitoring, the + 9V power failure or instantaneous power failure monitoring, and the radio wave detection signal monitoring from the radio wave detection switch will be described. FIG. 126 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit.
[9-6-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d includes a stabilized power supply circuit IC20 (in this embodiment, manufactured by NEC: μPC1093), a comparator IC21 (in this embodiment, manufactured by New Japan Radio: NJM2903, an open collector output type). ), Inverter IC22 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC05, open collector output type), D type flip-flop IC23 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC74), transistor TR20 (in this embodiment, 2SC1815).

  The REF terminal that is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal that is the cathode terminal of the stabilized power supply circuit IC20 are electrically connected to + 5V via the resistor R20, and the current input to the REF terminal by this resistor R20 Limited. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set) as a comparison reference voltage of the comparator IC21. The reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor C20 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C20 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the stabilized power circuit IC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

The comparator IC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (IC21A) is used to compare the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to the + terminal. The reference voltage Vref is input to the negative terminal. On the other hand, the remaining one (IC21B) is used to compare the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref, the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 is input to the + terminal, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the − terminal. Has been. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop IC23. The D-type flip-flop IC23 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (IC23A) is used in this embodiment. Note that + 5V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator IC21, is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C21 grounded. Further, + 5V input to the D-type flip-flop IC23 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C22 grounded to the ground.
[9-6-2. + 18V power outage or instantaneous power failure monitoring]
As described above, the + 18V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the IC 21A of the comparator IC21 comparing the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. 126, as shown in FIG. 126, the voltage is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors R21 and R22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C23 grounded and grounded, and the + 18V is input to the + terminal of the IC 21A (the capacitor C23 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors R21 and R22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, set to 12.53V) when + 18V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts to drop from + 18V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 18V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the + 18V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW. Therefore, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R23, the logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded and grounded, and the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23 (Capacitor C24 also serves as a low-pass filter). Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 is greater than the reference voltage Vref. Not.

On the other hand, when the + 18V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI. For this reason, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, the logic is LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded and grounded, and the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref. Is done.
[9-6-3. + 9V power outage or instantaneous power failure monitoring]
As described above, the + 9V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the IC 21B of the comparator IC21 comparing the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 126, as shown in FIG. 126, the voltage is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors R24 and R25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C25 grounded and grounded, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the IC 21B (the capacitor C25 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors R24 and R25 are set to a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 7.64V) preset when the voltage starts to drop from + 9V when + 9V is interrupted or instantaneously stopped. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 9V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the + 9V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 is greater than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic is LOW. Therefore, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R23, the logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded and grounded, and the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23 Is input to the PR terminal. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 is greater than the reference voltage Vref. Not.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 9V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 9V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI. For this reason, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, the logic becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded and grounded, and the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the monitoring voltage V2 of + 9V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref. Is done.

  Note that a power failure clear signal is input from the main control MPU 1700a to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, via the main control I / O port 1700b. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1700a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control I / O port 1700b. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop IC23 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal PR terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1700a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control I / O port 1700b and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop IC23 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal. Note that the 1D terminal as the D input terminal, the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal, and the GND terminal as the ground terminal are grounded. The negative logic 1Q terminal obtained by inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.
[9-6-4. Monitoring the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch]
Next, monitoring of a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 1700e will be described. The radio wave detection switch 1700e is electrically connected to + 18V via a resistor 26, and this voltage is input to the base of the transistor TR20 via the radio wave detection switch 1700e and the resistor 27, and between the resistor 27 and the transistor TR20 base. A resistor 28 grounded to the ground is electrically connected. The emitter of the transistor TR20 is grounded and the collector of the transistor TR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R29 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the inverter IC22. The inverter IC22 includes six inverter circuits, one of which (IC22A) is used in this embodiment. The + 5V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the inverter IC22, is smoothed by removing ripples from the capacitor C26 grounded.

  The values of the resistors R27 and R28 are set so that the transistor TR20 is turned on when the radio wave detection switch 1700e does not output a radio wave detection signal, that is, when a high frequency is not irradiated. When the transistor TR20 is ON, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR20 to the emitter of the transistor TR20, so that the logic becomes LOW and is input to the input terminal of the inverter IC22 (IC22A). Thus, as described above, since the inverter IC 22 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor 23, the logic becomes HI, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 connected to the ground and the D type flip-flop. Is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the IC 23. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e does not output a radio wave detection signal, that is, when high frequency is not irradiated, the main control I / O is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. A power failure warning signal is not output to the O port 1700b.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e outputs a radio wave detection signal, that is, when a high frequency is irradiated, the transistor TR20 is turned off. In the state where the transistor TR20 is OFF, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR20 to the emitter of the transistor TR20. Therefore, the transistor TR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R29 and becomes logic HI and is input to the input terminal of the inverter IC22 (IC22A). The Thereby, as described above, since the inverter IC22 is an open collector output type, the logic becomes LOW, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded to the ground, so that the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23 is used. Entered. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e outputs a radio wave detection signal, that is, when a high frequency is irradiated, the main control I / O is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. A power failure warning signal is output to the O port 1700b.

When the radio wave detection switch 1700e is removed from the main control board 1700, the transistor TR20 is turned off, so that no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR20 to the emitter of the transistor TR20. As a result, the logic becomes HI and is input to the input terminal of the inverter IC22 (IC22A). Thus, as described above, since the inverter IC 22 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor 23, the logic becomes HI, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded to the ground so that the D type flip-flop The signal is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the IC 23. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e is removed from the main control board 1700, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23 to the main control I / O port 1700b. Is output. Thus, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e is removed from the main control board 1700, a power failure warning signal is always output.
[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 119 will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, the payout control board 715 is supplied with DC power supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V from the power supply board 686. This + 9V is input to the payout control series regulator 715a. The payout control series regulator 715a creates + 5V, which is a reference voltage for the payout control board 715, from the input + 9V, and this + 5V is input to the payout control MPU 1710a. The payout control board 715 includes a payout control unit 1710, a firing control unit 1720, and the like as shown in FIG. Here, the payout control series regulator will be described first, followed by the circuit of the payout control unit, the power source created by the payout control board, various input / output signals on the payout control board, and the circuit of the launch control part. 127 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 128 is a circuit diagram showing an equivalent circuit of the drive IC, FIG. 129 is a circuit diagram showing an input circuit such as an error release switch, and FIG. Is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board, FIG. 131 is a circuit diagram showing an input circuit of the launch control unit, and FIG. 132 is a drawing of the payout control board FIG. 133 is a circuit diagram showing a transmission circuit and the like of the launch control unit.
[10-1. Dispensing control series regulator IC]
As shown in FIG. 127, the payout control series regulator IC 715a (in this embodiment, manufactured by ROHM: BA50BC0WT) has + 9V input to the VCC terminal which is a power input terminal. This + 9V is supplied by the power supply board 686. When the + 9V is input to the payout control board 715, the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) is first removed by the ground (GND) and the grounded electrolytic capacitor C50. And smoothed. Further, noise generated between the power supply board 686 and the payout control board 715 is removed by the capacitor C51 grounded. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 9V is also input to a CTL terminal that is a control terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a. The payout control series regulator IC 715a generates + 5V from + 9V input to the VCC terminal when + 9V is input to the CTL terminal, and outputs it from the OUT terminal which is an output terminal. A diode D1 (1SS133 in this embodiment) is provided between the OUT terminal and the VCC terminal, the anode terminal of the diode D1 and the OUT terminal are electrically connected, and the cathode terminal of the diode D1 and the VCC The terminal is electrically connected. When a reverse bias is applied between the VCC terminal and the OUT terminal, the voltage is input to the VCC terminal via the diode D1, thereby preventing the payout control series regulator IC 715a from being destroyed by the reverse bias.

The + 5V output from the OUT terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple by the electrolytic capacitor C52 connected to the ground. The smoothed + 5V is input to the payout control unit 1710, the firing control unit 1720, and the like. Note that the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.
[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 127, the payout control unit 1710 includes a payout control MPU 1710a, a payout control I / O port 1710b, an external WDT 1710c (in this embodiment, manufactured by Mitsumi: MM1075XD), a payout motor drive circuit 1710d, and a peripheral circuit. The payout control crystal oscillator X50 (in the present embodiment, manufactured by Epson Toyocom: SG-531P, 8 megahertz (MHz)) is configured.
[10-2-1. External WDT (external watchdog timer)]
+ 5V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a and smoothed is input to the Vcc terminal of the external WDT 1710c as shown in FIG. The external WDT 1710c resets the payout control MPU 1710a and includes a watchdog timer. The external WDT 1710c has a function of monitoring the voltage of + 5V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 1710a is operating normally. The + 5V input to the Vcc terminal. When the voltage reaches the threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2 V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal, or the payout control from the payout control MPU 1710a to the CK terminal of the external WDT 1710c. If the external WDT clear signal is not input within the clear signal release time via the I / O port 1710b, a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

  The TC terminal of the external WDT 1710c is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor C53, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT 1710c is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor R50 raised to + 5V. The clear signal release time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor C53 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor R50. In the present embodiment, a time 35 ms (= 1.75 ms × 20 times) corresponding to 20 interruption timers (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 1710a is set as the clear signal release time.

  The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 1710c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. The negative logic RESET terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor R51. The voltage raised to + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C54 connected to the ground (the capacitor C54 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is greater than the threshold value, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R50, the logic becomes HI, and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b. On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. .

  The negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R51 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. Becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal remains ON within the clear signal release time. When the WDT clear signal is not released, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b.

Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a is a negative logic input, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, or the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned on within the clear signal release time. If the external WDT clear signal is not released as it is, the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b are reset. A capacitor C55 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT 1710c, and a capacitor C56 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. + 5V input to the Vcc terminal by the capacitor C56 is smoothed by removing ripples. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 1710c, is grounded with the grant, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 1710c is not electrically connected to the outside.
[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 127, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a and smoothed is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator X50. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to a capacitor C57 that is grounded and grounded, and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also input to the OE terminal which is an output permission (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator X50. The payout control crystal oscillator X50 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5 V is input to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator X50 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the CLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. It is input to the control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b.
[10-2-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 127, the payout motor drive circuit 1710d includes a drive IC 50 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: MP4303). This drive IC 50 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when a discharge motor drive signal is input to the base terminal with the emitter terminal grounded, the drive signal is an excitation signal from the corresponding collector terminal. A drive pulse is output.

+ 34V supplied from the power supply board 686 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50 via the Zener diode ZD51 (HZ36BPTK-E in this embodiment) as shown in FIG. The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD51 is electrically connected to + 34V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD51 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50. + 34V input to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50 serves as a drive power source for the payout motor 465. The base terminal of the drive IC 50 is electrically connected to the output pins PB0 to PB3 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 1710b, and responds according to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PB0 to PB3. The drive pulse as an excitation signal from the collector terminal that performs the respective phases (/ B phase, B phase, A of the payout motor 465 via the resistors R52 to R55, the prize ball unit terminal 717, and the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 Phase, / A phase). These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 465, and rotate the dispensing motor 465. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC 50, the drive IC 50 is damaged, so that the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD51 are electrically connected as protection.
[10-2-3 (a). Heat absorbed by drive IC]
As described above, the drive IC 50 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground, and a payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, the corresponding collector terminal A drive pulse which is an excitation signal is output. As shown in FIG. 128, the drive IC 50C incorporates Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 and flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1-FBD4 in the same package.

  The Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 are formed into chips by electrically connecting two Darlington-connected transistors, resistors, and diodes. The collector terminals of the Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 are electrically connected to flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1-FBD4, one of which is grounded with the ground (GND). The flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 are counter electromotive forces generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) is cut off in each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465. Is converted to heat to protect the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4, and the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired into a chip, and the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD3 and FBD4 Are paired as a chip. As described above, the package of the drive IC 50 has the heat generated by the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 that output drive pulses (excitation signals) to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465. , And the heat generated by the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 that convert the back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 into heat, The absorbed heat is released to the outside air (around the drive IC 50).

  However, as described above, the payout control board box 655 for storing the payout control board 715, the power supply board box 653 for storing the power supply board 686 which is the largest heat source of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the frame board holder 651. It is attached to the side overlapping in the front-rear direction. For this reason, the payout control board 715 absorbs heat generated from the power supply board 686. In addition, the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 is exposed in the pachinko island equipment, and the pachinko island equipment is lined up with other pachinko gaming machines, so the power board of the pachinko gaming machine and The temperature in the pachinko island facility is high due to the heat generated from various control boards.

Thus, even if the package of the drive IC 50 absorbs heat generated by the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 and the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4, the ambient temperature of the drive IC 50, that is, the outside air temperature is high. Since the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air is reduced, heat is stored in the package of the drive IC 50. Then, when the temperature of the package of the drive IC 50 increases and the junction temperature of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 increases to the junction temperature, the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 fail.
[10-2-3 (b). Order of output of dispensing motor drive signal]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 is the A phase, B phase, / A phase. The payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal of the drive IC 50 so as to be in the / B phase. Thereby, the order in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 convert the back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 into heat is also FBD1, FBD3. , FBD2 and FBD4. Then, the above-described chip in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired and the chip in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired alternately generate heat. As the order of the drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 465 as described above, the A phase and the / A phase are generated. , B phase and / B phase, that is, flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4 convert back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the discharge motor 465 into heat. Compared with the case where FBD1, FBD2, FBD3 and FBD4 are used as the order in which they are performed, when the heat is generated alternately, the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired to generate heat or to absorb the flyback voltage. Heat generation of the chip in which the diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired can be suppressed to be small, which can contribute to a reduction in temperature rise of the package of the drive IC 50. Therefore, failure of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 due to heat can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 is the A phase, B phase, / A phase. Although programmed to be in the / B phase, for example, the 4th pin and the 9th pin, which are the collector terminals of the drive IC 50 shown in FIG. 127, are replaced with each other on the prize ball unit terminal 717 side. By wiring in advance, the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) to be output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 can be set as A phase, / A phase, B Even if programmed to be in the phase B and phase B, the order of the prize ball unit terminal 717 is B phase, A phase, A phase, and / B phase, and the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired. Chips and flyback A tip voltage absorbing diode FBD1 and FBD2 becomes a pair, but can generate heat alternately.
[10-3. Power supply created with payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 127, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a and smoothed to VDD as the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and VCC as the power supply terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. Have been entered. The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a is electrically connected to the capacitor C58 grounded and the VCC terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b is electrically connected to the capacitor C59 grounded to the VDD terminal. Further, + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a, is grounded, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b, is grounded. Further, +5 V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a and smoothed is also input to the firing control unit 1720 and the like.
[10-4. Various input / output signals on the payout control board]
[10-4-1. Various input / output signals of payout control I / O port]
The operation of the error release switch 1731 (in the present embodiment, manufactured by Alps Electric: SKHHDGA010) and the operation of the ball removal switch 1732 (in the present embodiment, manufactured by Alps Electric: SKHHDAA010) are sent to the payout control I / O port 1710b as detection signals. Have been entered.

Here, when the error LED display 1730 shown in FIG. 119 displays an operation error state such as a broken ball, a broken ball, a prize ball stock (with unpaid portion), a connection abnormality, etc., an error release switch 1731 is set. An audio guidance is sent from the speaker 34 shown in FIG. 119 to notify the error canceling method according to the operation error state, and the operation error state is canceled according to the instruction. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall and moved, or when the above-described dust collected in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 (for example, powder from which the game balls are peeled off) is removed. In this manner, the ball removal switch 1732 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, and the like to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.
[10-4-1 (a). Detection signal from error release switch]
As shown in FIG. 127, the first pin as the output pin of the error release switch 1731 is electrically connected to the input pin PD5 which is the fifth pin of the input port PD of the payout control I / O port 1710b. Since the input pin PD5 is a negative logic input, the voltage between the first pin of the error release switch 1731 and the input pin PD5 of the payout control I / O port 1710b is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R56. The voltage raised to + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C60 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C60 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 1731 is not operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R56 is input to the input pin PD5 of the payout control I / O port 1710b, while the error release switch 1731 Is operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PD5 of the payout control I / O port 1710b.
[10-4-1 (b). Detection signal from ball removal switch]
As shown in FIG. 127, the first pin as the output pin of the ball removal switch 1732 is electrically connected to the input pin PD2, which is the second pin of the input port PD of the payout control I / O port 1710b. Since the input pin PD2 is a negative logic input, the voltage between the first pin of the ball removal switch 1732 and the input pin PD2 of the payout control I / O port 1710b is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R57. The voltage raised to + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C61 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C61 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the ball removal switch 1732 is not operated, a ball removal detection signal that has been pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor R57 and whose logic has become HI is input to the input pin PD2 of the payout control I / O port 1710b, while the ball removal switch 1732 Is operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PD2 of the payout control I / O port 1710b.
[10-4-1 (c). Other various input / output signals]
Serial data from the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 119 is input to the RXD terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b, as a main payout serial data reception signal. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1700 from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b is output as a payer serial data transmission signal.

  For example, each input pin of the input port PD and the input port PE of the payout control I / O port 1710b receives the error release detection signal from the error release switch 1731 and the input pin PD2 to the input pin PD5. A ball removal detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 is input, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1700 is input to the input pin PD7 to notify the completion of the normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal. A detection signal from the full switch 545 is input to the pin PD1.

  On the other hand, a payout motor drive signal is output from, for example, the output pins PB0 to PB5 from the output pins PA to PC of the payout control I / O port 1710b, and the above-described main pay serial data reception signal is normal from the output pin PC3. A payer ACK signal indicating the completion of reception is output, and an external WDT clear signal is output from the output pin PC5 to the external WDT 1710c.

The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I / O port 1710b and the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 1710a exchange various information and various signals via the data bus. The payout control MPU 1710a reads various signals from the input ports PD and PE via the data bus, and outputs various signals from the output ports PA to PC via this data bus.
[10-4-2. Detection signal from door frame release switch and body frame release switch]
As described above, the main body frame 3 includes a door frame opening switch 3a for detecting whether or not the door frame 5 is open from the main body frame 3, and a state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. And a main body frame opening switch 3b for detecting whether or not. These detection signals are input to the payout control board 715 as shown in FIG.
[10-4-2 (a). Detection signal from door frame opening switch]
The door frame opening switch 3a uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is connected to the main body frame 3. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 129, the terminal of the door frame opening switch 3a is electrically connected to the door frame opening switch terminal 716a. One of the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 3a is input to the base of the transistor TR60 via the resistor R60, and a resistor R61 that is grounded and grounded is electrically connected between the resistor R60 and the base of the transistor TR60. ing. The emitter of the transistor TR60 is grounded and the collector of the transistor TR60 is electrically connected to the collector of a transistor TR61 described later. A logical sum circuit (OR circuit) is formed by electrical connection between the collector of the transistor TR60 and the collector of the transistor TR61, and the calculation result is output as frame opening information output information via the main drawer relay board 657 shown in FIG. To the main control board 1700. On the other hand, the other detection signal from the door frame opening switch 3a is output to the external terminal plate 700a shown in FIG. 119 as a door frame opening signal via the external terminal plate terminal 718 described above. The door frame opening signal is electrically connected to the cathode of the door frame opening switch photocoupler provided on the external terminal board 700a, and + 18V is input to the anode of the door frame opening switch photocoupler. Thus, a voltage of + 18V is applied to the door frame opening switch 3a.
[10-4-2 (b). Detection signal from body frame opening switch]
As with the door frame opening switch 3a, the body frame opening switch 3b uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) when the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (cut) while the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. 129, the terminal of the main body frame opening switch 3b is electrically connected to the main body frame opening switch terminal 716b. One of the detection signals from the body frame opening switch 3b is input to the base of the transistor TR61 via the resistor R62, and a resistor R63 that is grounded and grounded is electrically connected between the resistor R62 and the base of the transistor TR61. ing. The emitter of the transistor TR61 is grounded and the collector of the transistor TR61 is electrically connected to the collector of the transistor TR60 described above. A logical sum circuit (OR circuit) is formed by electrical connection between the collector of the transistor TR60 and the collector of the transistor TR61, and the calculation result is output as frame opening information output information via the main drawer relay board 657 shown in FIG. To the main control board 1700. On the other hand, the other detection signal from the body frame opening switch 3b is shown in FIG. 119 as a body frame opening signal via the external terminal board terminal 718 described above, similarly to the door frame opening signal from the door frame opening switch 3a. Output to the external terminal board 700a. As with the door frame opening signal, the body frame opening signal is electrically connected to the cathode of the body frame opening switch photocoupler provided on the external terminal board 700a, and is connected to the anode of the body frame opening switch photocoupler. + 18V is input. Thus, a voltage of +18 V is applied to the main body frame opening switch 3b as in the case of the door frame opening switch 3a.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 3a and the body frame opening switch 3b are normally closed switches. For this reason, even if the door frame opening switch 3a is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the main body frame opening switch 3b is short-circuited, and the switch is turned on. Even when it is turned on (conductive), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by using the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 3a and the main body frame opening switch 3b, for example, the above-described frame opening information output signal is transmitted via the main drawer relay board 657 to the main control board 1700 even when a short circuit occurs. 119, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 119 determines whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. can do.

When the door frame opening switch 3a and the body frame opening switch 3b are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 3a ', body frame opening switch 3b'). The door frame opening switch 3 a ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The main body frame opening switch 3b ′ is turned on (conductive) when the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (cut) when the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Here, even when the door frame opening switch 3a ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body frame opening switch 3b ′ is disconnected. Even when the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by using the normally open switch for the door frame opening switch 3a ′ and the main body frame opening switch 3b ′, for example, the above-described frame opening information output signal is main-controlled via the main drawer relay board 657 even when the wire is disconnected. The main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 can determine whether the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. .
[10-4-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Here, various input / output signals between the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700 and various output signals from the payout control board 715 to the external terminal board 700a will be described.
[10-4-3 (a). Various input / output signals with the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 119, the payout control board 715 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1700 via the main drawer relay board 657. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130A, the payout control board 715 exchanges various input / output signals with the main drawer relay board 657 via its internal connection terminals 725. The signals output from the internal connection terminal 725 to the main drawer relay board 657 include the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, frame opening information output information, and the like. On the other hand, the signals input from the main drawer relay board 657 to the internal connection terminal 725 include the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, the RAM clear signal, the power failure warning signal, and the frame opening information output information. In addition, various information related to the game (game information) such as jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time reduction information output information, start opening prize information output signal There is. Various power sources of ground (GND), + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V are supplied to the main drawer relay board 657 via the internal connection terminal 725.
[10-4-3 (b). Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 715 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 700a through the external terminal board terminal 718. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. In addition to directly outputting a prize ball number information output signal, there is game information output from the main control board 1700 via the payout control board 715. As described above, the external terminal board 700a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and monitors the game of the player.
[10-5. Circuit of launch control unit]
Next, the firing control unit 1720 will be described. As shown in FIG. 119, the firing control unit 1720 includes an input circuit 1720a, an oscillation circuit 1720b, a firing control circuit 1720c, and a firing motor drive circuit 1720d.
[10-5-1. Input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 131, the payout control board 715 is provided with a CR unit terminal board terminal 719, an operation handle terminal 724, and the like. Various signals input to these terminals are input to the input circuit 1720a. The input circuit 1720a receives a CR connection signal from a CR unit (not shown), a detection signal from the touch switch 80 shown in FIG. 119, and a detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 119, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 700b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a via the CR unit terminal board 700b and detected from the touch switch 80. When the signal touches the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 described above, the signal is detected by the touch switch 80 and input to the input circuit 1720a via the handle relay terminal 71a shown in FIG. This detection signal is detected by the firing stop switch 82 when the firing stop button 81 described above is operated, and is input to the input circuit 1720a via the handle relay terminal 71a.
[10-5-1 (a). Connection signal from CR unit]
The boards of the CR unit terminal board 700b and the payout control board 715 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). In this harness, in order to make it less susceptible to noise, as shown in FIG. 131, a line (transmission line) for transmitting a CR connection signal is pulled up to + 18V by a pull-up resistor R70.

  When the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a, the CR connection signal is input to the base of the transistor TR70 (2SC1815 in this embodiment) via the resistor R71. A resistor R72 that is grounded and grounded is electrically connected between the resistor R71 and the base of the transistor TR70. The values of the resistors R71 and R72 are set so that the transistor TR70 is turned on when the CR connection signal is not input, that is, when the CR unit is not electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 700b. Yes.

  The collector of the transistor TR70 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R73, and outputs a firing permission signal having a negative logic to the firing control circuit 1720c.

When the transistor TR70 is turned on, that is, when the CR unit is not electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 700b, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR70 to the emitter of the transistor TR70, so that the firing permission detection signal whose logic is LOW Is output to the firing control circuit 1720c. On the other hand, when the transistor TR70 is turned off, that is, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 700b, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR70 to the emitter of the transistor TR70. A launch permission detection signal that is pulled up and whose logic becomes HI is output to the launch control circuit 1720c.
[10-5-1 (b). Detection signal from touch switch]
When the detection signal from the touch switch 80 is input to the input circuit 1720a, the detection signal is input to the base of the transistor TR71 (2SC1815 in this embodiment) via the resistor R724b. A resistor R75, which is grounded and grounded, is electrically connected between the resistor R724b and the base of the transistor TR71. The values of the resistors R724b and R75 are set so that the transistor TR71 is turned on when the touch switch 80 outputs a detection signal, that is, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 is not touched. . The voltage input to the base of the transistor TR71 is smoothed by removing noise by a capacitor C70 connected to the ground.

  The collector of the transistor TR71 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R76, and outputs a touch detection signal having a negative logic to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  When the transistor TR71 is turned on, that is, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 is not touched, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR71 to the emitter of the transistor TR71, so that the touch detection signal whose logic is LOW is controlled to fire. It is output to the circuit 1720c. On the other hand, when the transistor TR71 is in the OFF state, that is, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71 is touched, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR71 to the emitter of the transistor TR71. The touch detection signal whose logic is HI is output to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  As described above, the detection signal from the touch switch 80 is input to the operation handle terminal 724 via the handle relay terminal 71a, but the handle relay terminal 71a to the operation handle terminal 724 are electrically connected by wiring. Connected. This wiring is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 shown in FIG. As described above, the lower reinforcing plate 36 also serves as a ground connection plate that removes noise and the like due to electrostatic discharge from the sphere stored in the storage tray 30 from the door frame 5. The wiring from 71a is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise and the like. For this reason, when noise or the like enters the detection signal from the touch switch 80, the voltage of the ground (GND) goes up and down from 0V to + 3V and becomes unstable. For example, the payout control unit in the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. There is a possibility that the potential difference from + 5V inputted to the power supply terminal VDD of the payout control MPU 1710a of 1710 becomes smaller than the operating voltage of the payout control MPU 1710a, and the payout control MPU 1710a is suddenly reset. Therefore, in the present embodiment, + 18V is supplied to the touch switch 80 via the resistor R724a which is a power supply side noise reduction resistor, and the detection signal from the touch switch 80 is supplied via the resistor R724b which is a detection signal side noise reduction resistor. To stabilize the ground (GND).

In the present embodiment, winding resistors are used as the resistors R724a and R724b, and the ground (GND) due to noise or the like entering the wiring from the handle relay terminal 71a due to the inductance that is a coil component of the resistors R724a and R724b. High frequency components can be further suppressed. As a result, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control unit 1710 in the payout control board 715 is not suddenly reset, and the ground (GND) changes due to the exchange of various input / output signals between the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700. No communication error occurs.
[10-5-1 (c). Detection signal from firing stop switch]
When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 is input to the input circuit 1720a, the detection signal is input to the base of the transistor TR72 (2SC1815 in this embodiment) via the resistor R724d. Between the resistor R724d and the base of the transistor TR72, a grounded and grounded resistor R78 is electrically connected. The values of the resistors R724d and R78 are set so that the transistor TR72 is turned on when the firing stop switch 82 outputs a detection signal, that is, when the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is not operated. Yes. The voltage input to the base of the transistor TR72 is smoothed by removing noise by a capacitor C71 grounded to the ground.

  The collector of the transistor TR72 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R79, and outputs a firing stop detection signal having a negative logic to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  When the transistor TR71 is turned on, that is, when the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is not operated, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR72 to the emitter of the transistor TR72, so that a firing stop detection signal whose logic is LOW is emitted. It is output to the control circuit 1720c. On the other hand, when the transistor TR72 is in the OFF state, that is, when the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is operated, current does not flow from the collector of the transistor TR72 to the emitter of the transistor TR72, and therefore is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R79. Thus, a firing stop detection signal whose logic is HI is output to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  As described above, the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 is input to the operation handle terminal 724 via the handle relay terminal 71a, but the handle relay terminal 71a to the operation handle terminal 724 are wired. Electrically connected. This wiring is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 shown in FIG. As described above, the lower reinforcing plate 36 also serves as a ground connection plate that removes noise and the like due to electrostatic discharge from the sphere stored in the storage tray 30 from the door frame 5. The wiring from 71a is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise and the like. For this reason, if noise or the like enters the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82, the voltage of the ground (GND) goes up and down from 0V to + 3V and becomes unstable. The potential difference from + 5V input to the power supply terminal VDD may be smaller than the operating voltage of the payout control MPU 1710a, and the payout control MPU 1710a may be suddenly reset. Therefore, in the present embodiment, + 18V is supplied to the firing stop switch 82 via the resistor R724c that is a power supply side noise reduction resistor, and the detection signal from the launch stop switch 82 is a resistor R724d that is a detection signal side noise reduction resistor. The ground (GND) is stabilized by being input via.

In the present embodiment, winding resistors are used as the resistors R724c and R724d, and the ground (GND) due to noise or the like entering the wiring from the handle relay terminal 71a due to the inductance which is a coil component of the resistors R724c and R724d. High frequency components can be further suppressed. As a result, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control unit 1710 in the payout control board 715 is not suddenly reset, and the ground (GND) changes due to the exchange of various input / output signals between the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700. No communication error occurs. Moreover, the skin effect is also [10-5-1 (d). Arrangement of power supply side noise reduction resistor and detection signal side noise reduction resistor]
Here, the arrangement of the resistors R724a and R724c, which are power source side noise reduction resistors, and R724b, R724d, which are detection signal side noise reduction resistors, will be described. As described above, the payout control board 715 receives the detection signal from the touch switch 80 and the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 via the operation handle terminal 724. The touch switch 80 is provided with a resistor R724a which is a power supply side noise reduction resistor and a resistor R724b which is a detection signal side noise reduction resistor, and the firing stop switch 82 is provided with a resistor R724c which is a power supply side noise reduction resistor and a detection signal side noise reduction. A resistor R724d, which is a resistor, is provided. These resistors R724a to R724d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 1731 on the component surface 715a of the payout control board 715, as shown in FIG. 132 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 132 (b) and 132 (c), the component surface 715a and the solder surface 715b of the payout control board 715 are stripped around the pattern for wiring the resistors R724a to R724d (referred to as “wiring pattern”). Foil removal regions 724a and 724b that are in a state are provided. In the foil missing regions 724a and 724b, a power supply line such as + 18V or a ground (GND) line is not arranged around the wiring pattern of the resistors R724a to R724d. As a result, noise or the like entering the wiring pattern of the resistors R724a to R724d can be prevented in the foil dropout regions 724a and 724b, and fluctuations in the ground (GND) can be suppressed.

The resistors R724a to R724d are arranged such that a copper foil portion (referred to as a “land”) to be soldered by a solder surface 715b is separated from a land such as another electronic component by a predetermined distance. The distance between the lands of the resistors R724a to R724d and the lands of other electronic components is set such that the potential of the power supply line and the potential of the ground (GND) line do not affect each other. As a result, the influence of the potential of the power supply line and the potential of the ground (GND) line from the land such as another electronic component can be prevented, and the fluctuation of the ground (GND) can be suppressed.
[10-5-2. Oscillation circuit]
As shown in FIG. 133, the oscillation circuit 1720b includes a crystal resonator X80 (in this embodiment, manufactured by River Eletech: HC-49 / U03, 4 MHz), and capacitors C80 and C81 that set the load capacity of the crystal resonator X80. A feedback resistor R80 is provided. Both terminals of the crystal unit X80 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 1720c, and the crystal unit X80 and the launch control circuit 1720c are closed loop circuits. A feedback resistor R80 is electrically connected to the closed loop circuit in parallel with the crystal unit X80. Both terminals of the crystal unit X80 are electrically connected to a ground and capacitors C80 and C81 grounded. The value of the feedback resistor R80 and the load capacities of the capacitors C80 and C81 are set so that the crystal unit X80 oscillates stably. Accordingly, the oscillation circuit 1720b can supply a clock signal with suppressed fluctuations to the firing control circuit 1720c.
[10-5-3. Launch control circuit]
As shown in FIG. 133, the firing control circuit 1720c has the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 1720b inputted to the clock input / output terminals XT1 and XT2, and determines the rotational speed of the firing motor 344 based on the inputted clock signal. The reference pulse to be output is output from the output terminals AA and BB to the firing motor drive circuit 1720d. The VCC terminal, which is a power supply terminal, receives +5 V and is electrically connected to a capacitor C82 that is grounded. As a result, + 5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded.

In the launch control circuit 1720c, the launch permission signal described above is input to the input terminal E1, the touch detection signal is input to the input terminal E3, and the launch stop detection signal is input to the input terminal E4. The firing control circuit 1720c takes the logical product (AND) of these firing permission detection signals, touch detection signals, and firing stop detection signals, and outputs the calculation result from the ST terminal, which is the start terminal, to the firing motor drive circuit 1720d. This ST terminal informs the firing motor drive circuit 1720d that the reference pulse output from the output terminals AA and BB is permitted or prohibited. Specifically, when the logics of the firing permission detection signal, the touch detection signal, and the firing stop detection signal are all HI (the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 700b, and the operation handle 71 is turned). When the member 74 is touched and the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is not operated), a start signal with logic HI is output from the ST terminal, and the permitted reference pulses are output from the output terminals AA and BB. If the logic is LOW in at least one of the firing permission detection signal, the touch detection signal, and the firing stop detection signal while the fact that it is output is transmitted to the firing motor drive circuit 1720d (for example, the CR unit is a CR unit terminal board) 700b is electrically connected, touches the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71, and presses the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71. In this case) that is created, logical from the ST terminal is output start signal becomes LOW, convey output terminals AA, to the effect that the reference pulse is prohibited from BB is outputted to the firing motor drive circuit 1720D.
[10-5-4. Launch motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 133, firing motor drive circuit 1720d receives a reference pulse output from output terminals AA and BB of firing control circuit 1720c, and receives a start signal output from ST terminal of firing control circuit 1720c. ing. Specifically, the reference pulse output from the output terminal AA of the firing control circuit 1720c is input to the INA terminal which is the A phase input terminal of the firing motor driving circuit 1720d, and is output from the output terminal BB of the firing control circuit 1720c. The reference pulse is input to the INB terminal which is the B phase input terminal of the firing motor driving circuit 1720d, and the start signal output from the ST terminal of the firing control circuit 1720c is input to the ST terminal which is the starting terminal of the firing motor driving circuit 1720d. ing.

  When a start signal whose logic is HI is input to the ST terminal, the firing motor drive circuit 1720d starts from the A terminal which is the A phase output terminal via the firing motor terminal 723 based on the reference pulse input to the INA terminal. Then, a drive pulse that is an excitation signal is output to the A phase of the launch motor 344, while a drive pulse that is an excitation signal obtained by inverting the logic of the drive pulse output from the A terminal is output from the AX terminal that is the A phase inverted output terminal. Based on the reference pulse that is output to the / A phase of the launch motor 344 via the launch motor terminal 723 and is input to the INB terminal, the launch motor 344 is transmitted from the B terminal that is the B phase output terminal via the launch motor terminal 723. A drive pulse that is an excitation signal is output to the B phase of the drive signal, while a drive pulse that is an excitation signal obtained by inverting the logic of the drive pulse output from the B terminal is the B phase. Is output to / B-phase firing motor 344 from BX terminal is non-inverting output terminal via the firing motor terminals 723.

Note that + 5V is input to VCC1 which is a power supply terminal of the launch motor drive circuit 1720d, and the VCC2A terminal which is the A phase power supply voltage terminal and the VCC2B terminal which is the B phase power supply voltage terminal of the launch motor drive circuit 1720d are the launch motor 344. The driving voltage of + 34V is input. These VCC2A terminal and VCC2B terminal are electrically connected to an electrolytic capacitor C83 that is grounded and grounded, and the driving torque is kept constant by suppressing a temporary voltage drop caused by driving of the firing motor 344. . The VCC2A terminal and the VCC2B terminal are electrically connected to a capacitor C84 that is grounded, and the GND terminal that is a grounding terminal is grounded.
[11. Circuit of LCD control board (block diagram)]
Next, a circuit and the like of the liquid crystal control board 1750 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 illustrated in FIG. 119 will be described. Since the circuit of the liquid crystal control board 1750 is extremely complicated, it will be described with reference to a simple block diagram. FIG. 134 is a block diagram of the liquid crystal control board. In addition to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, the VDP 1750c, the character ROM 1750d, and the character RAM 1750z shown in FIG. (Abbreviation of Signaling) is configured to include a transmitter 1750h, a transfer IC 1750m, and the like. As shown in FIG. 122, the liquid crystal control board 1750 is supplied with DC power supplies + 34V and + 18V from the power supply board 686 via the payout control board 715, the main control board 1700, and the sub-integrated board 1740. This + 18V is input to the liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e. The liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e creates + 5V, which is a reference voltage for the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, from the input + 18V, creates + 3.3V, which is the reference voltage for the liquid crystal control board 1750, etc., and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a and the VDP 1750c. + 1.5V, which is the power source of VDP1750c, or + 2.5V, which is the power source of VDP1750c. In addition to + 3.3V, DC + 1.8V (DC + 1.8V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 1.8V”) is input to scaler IC 1750f. Note that + 1.8V is created by a power supply circuit (not shown) and is created from + 18V described above, but may be generated by the liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e. Here, the configuration of the liquid crystal control board 1750 will be described first, followed by the setting of the scaler IC 1750f and the generation of a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. 135 is a table showing an example of a register group of the scaler IC, FIG. 136 is a simplified diagram showing the inside of the frame memory, and FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of generation of a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display. .
[11-1. Configuration of LCD control board]
[11-1-1. Liquid crystal control MPU]
As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740. As described above, this display command indicates a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, and is output (transmitted) from the serial input / output of the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740. As shown in FIG. 134, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives the display command as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and when receiving the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sends a DSP-ACK signal to that effect to the sub-integrated board. 1740.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a restores the received liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER to parallel data, analyzes the display command, extracts schedule data corresponding to the analyzed display command from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and extracts the schedule data from the extracted schedule data. First screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b and output to the VDP 1750c. As described above, the schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is defined. Detailed description of the screen data will be described later.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, which will be described in detail later, controls the transfer IC 1750m to transfer and copy the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z having a high access speed. As shown in FIG. 134, the character RAM 1750z includes a resident area 1750za and a non-resident area 1750zb. In the resident area 1750za, sprite data for drawing the background on the liquid crystal display 1315 and sprite data for drawing characters such as “big hit” and “power is being restored” on the liquid crystal display 1315 are transferred and copied. Sprite data for suddenly drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315 is mainly stored. On the other hand, in the non-resident area 1750zb, sprite data to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 in the middle from the start of the change to the stop, and on the liquid crystal display 1315 in the middle from the start of the big hit gaming state to the stop. Sprite data and the like are transferred and copied in time before drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315, and sprite data for drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315 is mainly stored along with the schedule data. Yes. The non-resident area 1750zb is an area where sprite data is replaced in accordance with the content drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 1750c. This DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is a signal that the VDP 1750c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a stops outputting the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG as will be described in detail later. In response to this, interrupt processing is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs a field signal FIELD which is a control signal of the frame memory 1750g, or an interface clock signal (hereinafter referred to as “I / F clock signal”) SCL to the scaler IC 1750f. -Write serial data SCL-S0 is transmitted in synchronization with SCLK, read serial data SCL-S1 is received in synchronization with I / F clock signal SCL-SCLK from scaler IC 1750f, and access to scaler IC 1750f is valid Alternatively, the access set signal SCL-SS set to invalid is output. Detailed description of these various signals and various data will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the liquid crystal control board 1750 includes a flip-flop 1750i and an external watchdog timer 1750k (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT1750k”), and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is described in detail. As will be described later, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 1750k via the flip-flop 1750i. The external WDT 1750k outputs a reset signal to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, the VDP 1750c, and the transfer IC 1750m when the external WDT clear signal is not input within a predetermined period. The external WDT clear signal output from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input to the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 as a DSP-RUN signal via the flip-flop 1750i.

As shown in FIG. 134, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives the above-described RAM-CLR signal and power failure warning signal from the sub-integrated board 1740.
[11-1-2. Transfer IC]
As described above, the transfer IC 1750m transfers and copies the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za and the non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z under the control of the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the transfer IC 1750m includes a register group 1750ma. This register group 1750ma includes various registers for setting a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes. When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a writes setting values to these various registers, the transfer IC 1750m transfers the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za and non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z and copies them. The register group 1750ma includes a register for setting an access condition suitable for the character ROM 1750d and the character RAM 1750z in addition to the transfer source address, the transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes.

  The transfer IC 1750m is configured to extract the sprite data from the character RAM 1750z instead of the character ROM 1750d when the VDP 1750c extracts the sprite data. That is, the transfer IC 1750m behaves as if the VDP 1750c is extracting sprite data from the character ROM 1750d. As described above, the character ROM 1750d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data. As a result, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 1750d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display 1315 is affected. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a controls the transfer IC 1750m to transfer and copy the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z having a high access speed. Accordingly, the VDP 1750c can extract sprite data from the character RAM 1750z at a high speed by the circuit configuration of the transfer IC 1750m. Therefore, the VDP 1750c can be accessed at high speed even when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is extremely large.

As shown in FIG. 134, the transfer IC 1750m receives a reset signal from the external WDT 1750k. When no reset signal is input, the transfer IC 1750m stores the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d. While transferring and copying to the RAM 1750z or the VDP 1750c can extract sprite data from the character RAM 1750z, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred to the character RAM 1750z when a reset signal is input. As a result, the VDP 1750c cannot extract the sprite data from the character RAM 1750z.
[11-1-3. Configuration of screen data]
The screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to the VDP 1750c is composed of sprite setting data and drawing condition setting data. Sprite setting data is composed of data that displays multiple sprites on the screen as a sprite, data for setting the sprite drawing color, data for setting the sprite drawing position, data for grouping multiple sprites, etc. ing. On the other hand, the drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of a virtual screen (hereinafter referred to as “canvas”), data for cutting a part of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, Data for setting a composite screen by arranging grouped sprites in layers, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the above-described line buffer, data for setting resolution, etc. It is composed of
[11-1-4. VDP]
As described above, the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input to the VDP 1750c. The VDP 1750c extracts the above-described sprite data from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m based on the input screen data, and develops the extracted sprite data into a bitmap on a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. Is generated. The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data for each line in the line buffer, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f.
[11-1-4 (a). Sprite register and VDP register]
As shown in FIG. 134, the VDP 1750c includes a sprite register 1750ca and a VDP register 1750cb. The sprite register 1750ca is a register to which sprite setting data is written, and the VDP register 1750cb is a register to which drawing condition setting data is written. The sprite register 1750ca is configured as two buffers of equal storage capacity, called a first buffer and a second buffer (referred to as “double buffer”). When the VDP 1750c captures the sprite setting data among the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a into the first buffer, the VDP 1750c transfers the captured sprite setting data from the first buffer to the second buffer. This transfer is performed by DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access). In this DMA transfer, since the VDP 1750c copies the sprite setting data written in the first buffer to the second buffer without being controlled by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, high-speed data transfer can be performed. As a result, the same sprite setting data is written in the first buffer and the second buffer until new sprite setting data is written in the first buffer, that is, unless overwritten with new sprite setting data. ing. On the other hand, unlike the sprite register 1750ca, the VDP register 1750cb includes only the first buffer (referred to as “single buffer”).

  Since the VDP 1750c cannot accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, that is, the sprite setting data during the DMA transfer, the VDP 1750c outputs a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. When the VDP 1750c completes the DMA transfer, it can accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, that is, the sprite setting data, and therefore stops outputting the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG indicating that. On the other hand, since the VDP register 1750cb is a single buffer as described above, the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, that is, the drawing condition setting data can be received even while the VDP 1750c performs the DAM transfer. It has become.

  As described above, the sprite setting data fetched into the first buffer is DMA-transferred to the second buffer, so that the sprite setting data is written into the second buffer. Note that the sprite register 1750ca is a double buffer, and the sprite setting data fetched into the first buffer is transferred to the second buffer at high speed in a short period by DMA transfer. Writing becomes possible. Therefore, the VDP 1750c according to the present embodiment receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 as compared with the VDP that is configured to perform writing within a limited time during which the blanking signal is output. Even if the interrupt process occurs and the process of writing the sprite setting data to the first buffer is interrupted, the sprite setting data can be written to the first buffer with a sufficient margin even after the interrupt process ends. In the present embodiment, since DMA transfer from the first buffer to the second buffer is performed every 16 milliseconds (ms), the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is also output every 16 ms. Since the sprite setting data fetched into the first buffer is always the same size, the time required for DMA transfer from the first buffer to the second buffer is always the same, and the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is stopped every 16 ms. The Rukoto.

  Further, when the DMA transfer is completed, the VDP 1750c, based on the sprite setting data written in the second buffer and the drawing condition setting data written in the VDP register 1750cb, performs the transfer from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m as described above. Sprite data is extracted, and the extracted sprite data is developed into a bitmap on a canvas CV (not shown) that is a virtual screen to generate drawing data. The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data for each line in the line buffer, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f.

  The VDP 1750c decomposes the generated drawing data into red (R), green (G), and blue (B) as shown in FIG. 134, and in synchronization with the clock signal CLK-IN, the red video signal R-INN. The green video signal G-INN, the blue video signal B-INN, the horizontal synchronizing signal HS-IN, and the vertical synchronizing signal VS-IN are output to the scaler IC 1750f. Here, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-IN and the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN are signals used to reconstruct a screen that has been decomposed into red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The signal HS-IN is synchronized in the horizontal direction, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN is synchronized in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 134, the VDP 1750c receives a reset signal from the external WDT 1750k, and outputs an ENABLE signal DE-IN to the scaler IC 1750f when no reset signal is input. When the reset signal is not input, the ENABLE signal DE-IN is not output to the scaler IC 1750f. The ENABLE signal DE-IN is a signal that informs the scaler IC 1750f that the red video signal R-INN, the green video signal G-INN, and the blue video signal B-INN are valid signals.
[11-1-5. Scaler IC]
As described above, the scaler IC 1750f has the drawing data from the VDP 1750c synchronized with the clock signal CLK-IN, the red video signal R-INN, the green video signal G-INN, the blue video signal B-INN, and the horizontal synchronization signal. HS-IN and vertical synchronizing signal VS-IN are input. The scaler IC 1750f reconstructs drawing data based on these red video signal R-INN, green video signal G-INN, blue video signal B-INN, horizontal synchronization signal HS-IN, and vertical synchronization signal VS-IN, Write to the frame memory 1750g.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the scaler IC 1750f includes a register group 1750fa. Although a specific configuration of the register group 1750fa will be described later, the scaler IC 1750f reconfigures drawing data from the VDP 1750c with reference to various setting values written in the register group 1750fa. Then, the scaler IC 1750f writes the drawing data reconstructed based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a into the frame memory 1750g. Various setting values written in the register group 1750fa are written by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Specifically, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a first outputs an access set signal SCL-SS for setting the access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f to the scaler IC 1750f. Then, a total of 8 bits (1 byte) of information of 1 bit for writing to the register and 7 bits of information indicating the address of the register to be written is written as serial data SCL-S0 and the I / F clock signal SCL- The 8-bit (1 byte) information indicating the setting value to be written to the register is written in synchronization with SLK, and then written as 8-bit (1 byte) information as serial data SCL-S0 in synchronization with I / F clock signal SCL-SLK. To send to. In this manner, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sequentially transmits the write register address value and the write setting value as the write serial data SCL-S0 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK.

  Scaler IC 1750f captures write serial data SCL-S0 in synchronization with I / F clock signal SCL-SLK, restores the captured write data SCL-S0 to parallel data, and writes a set value to a register to be written. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs an access set signal SCL-SS for invalidating the access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f to the scaler IC 1750f when the transmission of the write register address value and the write set value is completed. As a result, access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f is invalidated, so that various setting values written in the register group 1750fa can be protected.

  Here, when various settings written in the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f are read and referred to by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, first, the access set signal SCL-SS for effectively setting the access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f. Is output to the scaler IC 1750f. Then, a total of 8 bits (1 byte) of information of 1 bit that conveys reading to the register and 7 bits of information indicating the address value of the register to be read is written as serial data SCL-S0, and the I / F clock signal SCL- It transmits to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with SLK. The scaler IC 1750f takes in the write serial data SCL-S0 in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK, and restores the fetched serial data SCL-S0 to parallel data to read the set value written in the register. Read and read serial data SCL-S1 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a takes in the read serial data SCL-S1 in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK, and writes the read serial data SCL-S1 into parallel data and writes it in the read register. You can refer to the set value. Thus, unlike the case where the set value is written to the register, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a transmits the read register address value as write serial data SCL-S0 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK. . The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a transmits the address value of the register to be read, and when the reception of the setting value written in the address to be read is completed, the access set signal SCL for invalidating the access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f. -Output SS to scaler IC 1750f. As a result, access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f is invalidated, so that various setting values written in the register group 1750fa can be protected.

  As described above, the scaler IC 1750f reconstructs the drawing data from the VDP 1750c based on the various setting values written in the register group 1750fa, and writes it into the frame memory 1750g. The scaler IC 1750f, which will be described in detail later, reads the drawn drawing data and decomposes it into red (R), green (G), and blue (B) as shown in FIG. In synchronization with OUT, the red video signal R, the green video signal G, the blue video signal B, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT are output to the LVDS transmitter 1750h. Here, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT are red (R), green (G), and blue (G), similarly to the horizontal synchronization signal HS-IN and the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN. B) is a signal used for reconstructing the screen that has been decomposed. The horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT is synchronized in the horizontal direction, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT is synchronized in the vertical direction. is there.

As shown in FIG. 134, the scaler IC 1750f receives the ENABLE signal DE-IN from the VDP 1750c. The scaler IC 1750f outputs the ENABLE signal DEVO to the LVDS transmitter 1750h when the ENABLE signal DE-IN is input, and does not output the ENABLE signal DEVO to the LVDS transmitter 1750h when the ENABLE signal DEVO is not input. The ENABLE signal DEVO is a signal that informs the LVDS transmitter 1750h that the red video signal R, the green video signal G, and the blue video signal B are valid signals.
[11-1-6. Frame memory]
In the frame memory 1750g, as described above, drawing data reconstructed by the scaler IC 1750f is written, and the written drawing data is read.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the frame memory 1750g includes fields (field 1750g [0] to field 1750g [3]) partitioned into four storage areas. These fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] are divided in units of 800 × 300 pixels.

  As described above, the liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels in the vertical direction, and the drawing data written in the frame memory 1750g [0] is displayed on the upper screen and the frame memory 1750g [1]. One screen is configured by setting the drawing data written in the lower screen as the lower screen. Further, one screen is configured by setting the drawing data written in the frame memory 1750g [2] as the upper screen and the drawing data written in the frame memory 1750g [3] as the lower screen. Thus, the drawing data for two screens is written in the frame memory 1750g.

The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs a field signal FIELD indicating whether the drawing data output from the VDP 1750c is drawing data for the upper screen or drawing data for the lower screen to the scaler IC 1750f. When the scaler IC 1750f receives the field signal FIELD, the scaler IC 1750f specifies a field to be written in the field 1750g [0] to the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g based on the input field signal FIELD. . As described above, the drawing data of the upper screen and the drawing data of the lower screen from the VDP 1750c can be written without error in the fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g. When the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data are written, the scaler IC 1750f sequentially reads the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data, and, as described above, red (R), green (G ), Blue (B), and in synchronization with the clock signal CLK-OUT, the red video signal R, the green video signal G, the blue video signal B, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT as an LVDS transmitter. 1750h.
[11-1-7. LVDS transmitter]
As described above, the LVDS transmitter 1750h is configured such that the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data from the scaler IC 1750f are synchronized with the clock signal CLK-OUT, the red video signal R, the green video signal G, the blue video signal B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT. The LVDS transmitter 1750h receives the ENABLE signal DEVO from the scaler IC 1750f. The LVDS transmitter 1750h has a small amplitude in order to realize high-speed serial transmission, and transmits in a differential manner in order to make it less susceptible to external noise (“transmission scheme using a small differential signal scheme”). "). In synchronization with the clock signal, a red video signal R, a green video signal G, a blue video signal B, a horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, a vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and an ENABLE signal DEVO are transmitted to the liquid crystal display 1315.

As shown in FIG. 134, the red video signal R, green video signal G, blue video signal B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and ENABLE signal DEVO from the LVDS transmitter 1750h are displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. Is received by the LVDS receiver 1315a provided in the system. The LVDS receiver 1315a restores the serial data of the received red video signal R, green video signal G, blue video signal B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and ENABLE signal DEVO to parallel data. The LVDS receiver 1315a reconstructs drawing data based on the restored red video signal R, green video signal G, blue video signal B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and a liquid crystal display 1315. A drive signal is output to the liquid crystal display 1315 by the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b provided in the above. As a result, drawing data for one screen based on drawing data for the upper screen and drawing data for the lower screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. The ENABLE signal DEVO indicates that the red video signal R, the green video signal G, and the blue video signal B are valid signals via the LVDS transmitter 1750h and the LVDS receiver 1315a of the liquid crystal display 1315. This signal is transmitted to the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315 b provided in 1315.
[11-2. Scaler IC settings]
Next, the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f will be described. As shown in FIG. 135, the register group 1750fa includes field 1750g [0] to field 1750g [3] read start address registers OSFILD0 to OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] to field 1750g [3] write start address registers ISFILD0 to ISFILD3, The memory read line feed width register OMWI, the memory write line feed width register IMWI, the memory access control register MDACT, the memory access start address register MDAST, the memory access end address register MDAEND, and the like.
[11-2-1. Read start address register]
The field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 designate the start of reading of the fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. This is a register in which the start address is set. Field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 each have a storage capacity of 24 bits (3 bytes) as shown in FIG. An address is associated. A predetermined set value is set for each byte.
[11-2-1 (a). Field 1750g [0] Read start address register OSFILD0]
In the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0, as shown in FIG. 135, the address 0x08 (where "0x" is the value 08 in hexadecimal notation) is stored in the first byte OSFILD0 [7: 0]. The same applies hereinafter.) Address 0x09 is associated with OSFILD0 [15: 8] of the second byte, and address 0x0A is associated with OSFILD0 [23:16] of the third byte. By specifying these addresses 0x08 to 0x0A, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 (OSFILD0 [23:16], OSFILD0 [15: 8], OSFILD0 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and, as described above, the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 will be described in detail later, but is transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. The written serial data SCL-S0 is set.
[11-2-1 (b). Field 1750g [1] Read start address register OSFILD1]
As shown in FIG. 135, the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 has an address 0x0B in the first byte OSFILD1 [7: 0], an address 0x0C in the second byte OSFILD1 [15: 8], and a third byte. OSFILD1 [23:16] is associated with address 0x0D. By specifying these addresses 0x0B to 0x0D, the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 (OSFILD1 [23:16], OSFILD1 [15: 8], OSFILD1 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g based on the set values, and, as described above, the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

As described above, the scaler IC 1750f reads the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0, and the field 1750g [1]. By obtaining the setting values set in the start address register OSFILD1, the drawing data of the upper screen written in the field 1750g [0] is read, and subsequently the drawing data of the lower screen written in the field 1750g [1]. The drawing data for one screen can be read from the frame memory 1750g. The set values set in the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 and the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 are the same value. This is because the top addresses read from 1750g are the same (see FIG. 136 (a)).
[11-2-1 (c). Field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2]
As shown in FIG. 135, the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 has the address 0x0E in the first byte OSFILD2 [7: 0], the address 0x0F in the second byte OSFILD2 [15: 8], and the third byte. OSFILD2 [23:16] is associated with address 0x10. By specifying these addresses 0x0E to 0x10, the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 (OSFILD2 [23:16], OSFILD2 [15: 8], OSFILD2 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x20 is set in OSFILD2 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD2 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD2 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and as described above, the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [2]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.
[11-2-1 (d). Field 1750g [3] Read start address register OSFILD3]
As shown in FIG. 135, the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 has the address 0x11 at the first byte OSFILD3 [7: 0], the address 0x12 at the OSFILD3 [15: 8] at the second byte, and the third byte. OSFILD3 [23:16] is associated with address 0x13. By specifying these addresses 0x11 to 0x13, the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 (OSFILD3 [23:16], OSFILD3 [15: 8], OSFILD3 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x20 is set in OSFILD3 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD3 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD3 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and, as described above, the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [3]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 will be described in detail later, but the write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

In this way, the scaler IC 1750f reads the start address designating the read start of the field 1750g [1] and the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1, and the field 1750g [2] The upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1] is read by obtaining the setting values set in the start address register OSFILD2, and the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [2]. The drawing data for one screen can be read from the frame memory 1750g. The set values set in the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 and the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 are the same value. This is because the top addresses read from 1750g are the same (see FIG. 136 (a)).
[11-2-2. Write start address register]
Field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3 designates the start of writing to fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] of frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. This is a register in which the start address is set. Field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 each have a storage capacity of 24 bits (3 bytes) as shown in FIG. An address is associated. A predetermined set value is set for each byte.
[11-2-2 (a). Field 1750g [0] Write start address register ISFILD0]
As shown in FIG. 135, the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 has the address 0x14 at the first byte ISFILD0 [7: 0], the address 0x15 at the second byte ISFILD0 [15: 8], and the third byte. Address 0x16 is associated with ISFILD0 [23:16]. By designating these addresses 0x014 to 0x16, the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 (ISFILD0 [23:16], ISFILD0 [15: 8], ISFILD0 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x00 is set in ISFILD0 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of writing of the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the upper screen in the field 1750g [0] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 will be described in detail later, but is transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. The written serial data SCL-S0 is set.
[11-2-2 (b). Field 1750g [1] Write start address register ISFILD1]
As shown in FIG. 135, the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD1 has an address 0x17 at the first byte ISFILD1 [7: 0], an address 0x18 at the second byte ISFILD1 [15: 8], and the third byte. Address 0x19 is associated with ISFILD1 [23:16]. By designating these addresses 0x017 to 0x19, the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD1 (ISFILD1 [23:16], ISFILD1 [15: 8], ISFILD1 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x03 is set in ISFILD1 [23:16], 0xCF is set in OSFILD1 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [7: 0]. Scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of writing of field 1750g [1] of frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the lower screen in field 1750g [1] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD1 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

In this way, the scaler IC 1750f writes the start address designating the start of writing of the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0, and the field 1750g [1]. By obtaining the setting values set in the start address register ISFILD1, the drawing data of the upper screen can be written in the field 1750g [0], and the drawing data of the lower screen can be written in the field 1750g [1]. Can be written into the frame memory 1750g. Note that the set values set in the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 and the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD2 are different from each other, as described above, this is VDP1760c. The drawing data for one screen is generated in the frame memory 1750g by writing the drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen separately from the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g. (See FIG. 136 (b)).
[11-2-2 (c). Field 1750g [2] Write start address register OSFILD2]
As shown in FIG. 135, the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 stores the address 0x1A in the first byte ISFILD2 [7: 0], the address 0x1B in the second byte ISFILD2 [15: 8], and the third byte. Address 0x1C is associated with ISFILD2 [23:16]. By specifying these addresses 0x01A to 0x1C, the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 (ISFILD2 [23:16], ISFILD2 [15: 8], ISFILD2 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x20 is set in ISFILD2 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD2 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD2 [7: 0]. Scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address for designating the start of writing in field 1750g [2] of frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the upper screen in field 1750g [2] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 is transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. The written serial data SCL-S0 is set.
[11-2-2 (d). Field 1750g [3] Write start address register OSFILD3]
As shown in FIG. 135, the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 has an address 0x1D at the first byte ISFILD3 [7: 0], an address 0x1E at the second byte ISFILD3 [15: 8], and the third byte. Address 0x1F is associated with ISFILD3 [23:16]. By designating these addresses 0x01D to 0x1F, the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 (ISFILD3 [23:16], ISFILD3 [15: 8], ISFILD3 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x23 is set in ISFILD3 [23:16], 0xCF is set in OSFILD3 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD3 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address for designating the start of writing in the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the lower screen in the field 1750g [3] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

As described above, the scaler IC 1750f writes the start address designating the start of writing in the field 1750g [2] and the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 and the field 1750g [3]. By obtaining the setting values set in the start address register ISFILD3, the upper screen drawing data can be written in the field 1750g [2], and the lower screen drawing data can be written in the field 1750g [3]. Can be written into the frame memory 1750g. Note that the setting values set in the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 and the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 are different from each other, as described above, this is VDP1760c. The drawing data for one screen is generated in the frame memory 1750g by separately writing the drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen from the field 1750g [2] and the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g. (See FIG. 136 (b)).
[11-2-3. Memory read line feed width register]
The memory read line feed width register OMWI is a register in which the total pixels in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. 134, that is, pixels for one line, are set when drawing data is read from the frame memory 1750g. . As shown in FIG. 135, the memory read line feed width register OMWI has a storage capacity of 8 bits (1 byte) and is associated with an address 0x20. This address 0x20 can be designated to access the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7], and 0xD is set as the setting value in the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7]. In this embodiment, as described above, the liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the left-right direction, that is, for one line. As a setting value of the memory read line feed width register OMWI, at least the total number of pixels that display the above-described character (data for drawing a rectangular region of 64 pixels) in the left-right direction is larger than 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315. Is set. Specifically, a value 13 (= 0xD) that is an integer value larger than 12.5 obtained by dividing 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315 by 64 pixels of the character is set. The set value of the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7] will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL- transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by S0.
[11-2-4. Memory write line feed width register]
The memory writing line feed width register IMWI is a register in which the total pixels in the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display 1315, that is, pixels for one line, are set when drawing data from the VDP 1750c is written into the frame memory 1750g. As shown in FIG. 135, the memory write line feed width register IMWI has a storage capacity of 8 bits (1 byte) and is associated with an address 0x21. This address 0x21 can be designated to access the memory write line feed width register IMWI [7], and the set value is the same as the set value set in the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7]. Some 0xD is set. In this embodiment, as described above, the liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the left-right direction, that is, for one line. As a setting value of the memory writing line feed width register IMWI, at least the total number of pixels displayed by arranging the above characters (data for drawing a rectangular area of 64 pixels) in the horizontal direction is larger than 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315. Is set. Specifically, a value 13 (= 0xD) that is an integer value larger than 12.5 obtained by dividing 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315 by 64 pixels of the character is set. The set value of the memory write line feed width register IMWI [7] will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL- transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by S0.
[11-2-5. Memory access control register]
The memory access control register MDACT is a register for setting access to the frame memory 1750g. As shown in FIG. 135, the memory access control register MDACT has a storage capacity of 8 bits (1 byte) and is associated with an address 0x26. The memory access control register MDACT can be accessed by designating this address 0x26. As setting values, 0x0 is set in the memory access control register MDACT [7: 4], 0x0 is set in the MDACT [3], and MDACT [ 2: 0] is set to 0x0. The memory access control register MDACT [7: 4] is a reserved value and is fixed to 0x0. The memory access control register MDACT [3] is a bit for setting a connection test to the frame memory 1750g. When the value 1 (= 0x1) is set, the connection test can be performed. In normal operation, the value 0 (= 0x0) is set. Set. In this embodiment, 0x0 is set in the memory access control register MDACT [3], and normal operation is performed. The memory access control register MDACT [2: 0] can set a direct memory access command, and a detailed description thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, access from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to the frame memory 1750g is validated. The value to be set to 0 (= 0x0) is set. As described above, the setting value set in the memory access control register MDACT [7: 0] is 0x0, and this 0x0 is a default value that the scaler IC 1750f sets as an initial value at power-on or reset. In the present embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but it is set by the write serial data SCL-S0 transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. .
[11-2-6. Memory access start address register]
The memory access start address register MDAST is a register for setting a start address when accessing the frame memory 1750g from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. As shown in FIG. 135, the memory access start address register MDAST has an address 0x27 at the first byte MDAST [7: 0], an address 0x28 at the second byte MDAST [15: 8], and an MDAST [23 at the third byte. : 16] is associated with address 0x28. The memory access start address register MDAST (MDAST [23:16], MDAST [15: 8], MDAST [7: 0]) can be accessed by designating these addresses 0x027 to 0x29. As setting values, 0x0 is set in MDAST [23:16], 0x0 is set in MDAST [15: 8], and 0x0 is set in MDAST [7: 0]. In this way, the set values set in the memory access start address registers MDAST [23:16], MDAST [15: 8], and MDAST [7: 0] are all 0x0. The scaler IC 1750f sometimes has a default value set as an initial value. For this reason, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on or reset, the write serial data SCL-S0 transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is not set.
[11-2-7. Memory access end address register]
The memory access end address register MDAEND is a register for setting an end address when accessing the frame memory 1750g from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. As shown in FIG. 135, the memory access end address register MDAEND has an address 0x2A at the first byte MDAEND [7: 0], an address 0x2B at the second byte MDAEND [15: 8], and an MDAEND [23 at the third byte. : 16] is associated with address 0x2C. The memory access end address register MDAEND (MDAEND [23:16], MDAEND [15: 8], MDAEND [7: 0]) can be accessed by designating these addresses 0x02A to 0x2C. As setting values, 0x0 is set in MDAEND [23:16], 0x0 is set in MDAEND [15: 8], and 0x0 is set in MDAEND [7: 0]. Thus, the set values set in the memory access end address registers MDAEND [23:16], MDAEND [15: 8], and MDAEND [7: 0] are all 0x0, and this 0x0 is set when the power is turned on or reset. The scaler IC 1750f is a default value set as an initial value. For this reason, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on or reset, the write serial data SCL-S0 transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is not set.
[11-3. Generation of screen to be displayed on LCD
Next, generation of a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 illustrated in FIG. 134 will be described. Here, as an example, the drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen written in the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g described above are stored in the frame memory 1750g for one screen. An outline that is generated as drawing data and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 will be described.

  When the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input, the VDP 1750c extracts the above-described sprite data from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m based on the input screen data, and the extracted sprite data is displayed on the virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. Drawing data is generated by developing it into a bitmap with a canvas CV (not shown). The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data as it is in the upper screen as it is in the line buffer one line at a time, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f. Here, the canvas CV is set with the upper left as the origin, the direction from left to right is set as “x direction”, and the direction from top to bottom is set as “y direction”.

  The scaler IC 1750f refers to various setting values written in the register group 1750fa, reconstructs the upper screen drawing data from the VDP 1750c, and uses the reconstructed upper screen drawing data as the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Is written in the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g. As a result, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the drawing data of the upper screen (800 × 300 pixels (dots)) is written in the field 1750g [0].

  Subsequently, the VDP 1750c shifts the extracted sprite data by a value 300 in the minus y direction, that is, subtracts the value 300 in the y direction, and develops it into a bitmap on the canvas CV to generate drawing data. The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data as it is as drawing data for the lower screen in the line buffer one line at a time, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f.

  The scaler IC 1750f refers to various setting values written in the register group 1750fa, reconfigures the lower screen drawing data from the VDP 1750c, and reconfigures the lower screen drawing data based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Is written into the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g. As a result, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), the drawing data of the lower screen (800 × 300 pixels (dots)) is written in the field 1750g [1].

  Then, the scaler IC 1750f stores the drawing data of the upper screen and the drawing data of the lower screen written in the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g into the frame memory 1750g for one screen (800 × 600). Pixel (dot)) is generated as drawing data, and drawing data for the upper screen and drawing data for the lower screen are sequentially read out, so that drawing data for one screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 as shown in FIG. Can be displayed in the display area 1320.

  As described above, the VDP 1750c can generate drawing data for the upper screen and drawing data for the lower screen based on common drawing data expanded into a bitmap on a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. . The VDP 1750c uses the generated upper screen drawing data and lower screen drawing data as line drawing data for one line (800 pixels (dots)) for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315. And the drawing data held in the line buffer is output to the scaler IC 1750f, so that the generated drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen, that is, drawing data for one screen can be transferred to the frame memory 1750g at high speed. Can write. Therefore, even if the VDP 1750c cannot output the drawing data for one screen (800 × 600 pixels (dots)) to the frame memory 1750g at a time, the drawing data for one screen is not reduced in the frame memory without reducing the resolution. 1750g can be written.

The VDP 1750c cuts out drawing data arranged in a cut-out area, which is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin of the canvas CV, and outputs the drawing data to the scaler IC 1750f. In the present embodiment, the case where the drawing data for the upper screen is generated is set as a reference. For this reason, when the drawing data of the upper screen is generated, the drawing data expanded into the bitmap on the canvas CV is already arranged in the cutout area. On the other hand, when generating drawing data for the lower screen, the drawing data for the lower screen is moved to the cut-out area by subtracting the value 300 from the y-coordinate value of the drawing data expanded into a bitmap on the canvas CV and placing it. It can be made into the state made into.
[12-1. Game realized with game board]
Here, a game realized by the game board 4 provided with the above-described various components and devices will be described. When the player operates the operation handle portion 71, a game ball is launched by the hit ball launching device 300. The game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 300 is released to the upper part of the game area 255 through the launch rail 164, the connection passage portion 259, and the area surrounded by the outer running surface 252 and the inner running surface 253, and the game area 255. Flows down toward the out port 256 while colliding with an obstacle nail or the like. When the game ball flowing down the game area 255 passes through the gate 1455 and is detected by the gate switch 1460, the normal symbol display unit 1520 starts to display the variation of the normal symbol.

  When a game ball is detected by the gate switch 1460, the normal symbol per-design random number is acquired from a counter that updates the normal symbol per-standard random number within a predetermined range. Then, when starting the normal symbol fluctuation display, it is determined whether or not to win based on the random number for determining per normal symbol, and the LED 5 of the normal symbol display 1520 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the determination result. indicate. Specifically, when it is determined to be a win, the variable display is stopped in a state in which the LED 5 of the normal symbol display 1520 is lit in red, and when it is determined to be off, the normal symbol display 1520 The variable display is stopped while the LED 5 is lit in green.

  Further, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1520 is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined period, and when the display result of the normal symbol when the variable display is stopped is “winning”, that is, the normal symbol display when the variable display is stopped. The lower start winning opening 1340 is opened by changing the open / close blade 1380 to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the LED 5 of the device 1520 is lit red. On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol when the variable display is stopped is “out of”, that is, when the LED 5 of the normal symbol indicator 1520 when the variable display is stopped is lit in green, the open / close blade 1380 is closed. To maintain the lower start winning opening 1340 in the closed state.

  Further, when a game ball flowing down the game area 255 wins the middle start winning opening 1330, a state in which the special symbol variation display can be started on the upper special symbol display 1480 (for example, a big hit game state and a small hit game described later). If the state is not executed and if the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 are not executing the special symbol variation display), the upper special symbol display 1480 is special. In addition to starting the variable display of the symbols, the liquid crystal display 1315 starts to display the decorative symbols. After a predetermined period, the special symbols on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display 1315 are changed. The display is stopped and the display result is derived.

  Further, when a game ball flowing down the game area 255 wins one of the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower starting winning opening 1340, the lower special symbol display 1490 can start displaying the variation of the special symbol (for example, If the big hit game state, the state where the small hit game state described later is not executed, and the state where neither the upper special symbol display 1480 nor the lower special symbol display 1490 is executing the special symbol variation display) The lower special symbol display 1490 starts displaying the special symbol variation, and the liquid crystal display 1315 starts the decorative symbol variation display. After a predetermined period of time, the special special symbol variation display and the lower special symbol display 1490 The display of the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display 1315 is stopped and the display result is derived.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation display is executed on one of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490, the special symbol variation display is not started on the other. That is, both the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 are controlled so as not to execute the special symbol variation display at the same time, and only the special symbol variation display is performed.

  Further, when a game ball is won at the middle start winning opening 1330 and a detection signal from the middle start opening switch 1360 is inputted to the main control MPU 1700a, a special symbol hit determination is made from a counter that updates a random number for determining a special symbol within a predetermined range. Get random number. In addition, when the special symbol variation display is started on the upper special symbol display 1480, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit and a small hit based on a random number for determining a special symbol. The segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 is controlled to be turned on in a manner corresponding to the determination result, and a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315.

  In addition, when a game ball wins one of the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower starting winning opening 1340, and a detection signal from one of the upper start opening switch 1272 and the lower start opening switch 1370 is input to the main control MPU 1700a, a predetermined range. The random number for determination per special symbol is acquired from the counter that updates the random number for determination per special symbol. In addition, when the special symbol variation display is started on the lower special symbol display 1490, it is determined whether or not a big hit and a small hit are made based on a random number for determining a special symbol. The segment display SEG2 of the lower special symbol display 1490 is controlled to be turned on in a manner corresponding to the determination result, and a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315.

  Specifically, when it is determined that a big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is made when the special symbol variation display is started on the upper special symbol display 1480, the upper special symbol display 1480 segment indicator SEG1 is lit in a specific manner, and the specific display result of the decoration symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. When it is determined that the game is a small hit, the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 is displayed. The special display result of the decoration symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 and the special symbol variable display is started on the lower special indicator 1490. When the determination is made, the lower special symbol display 1490 segment display SEG2 is lit in a specific manner, and the liquid crystal display If the specific display result (15R probability variation symbol, 15R non-probability variation symbol, 2R probability variation symbol) is derived and displayed on the device 1315, and it is determined that it is a small hit, the segment indicator of the lower special symbol display 1490 SEG2 is lit and displayed in a special manner, and a special display result (small hit symbol) of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper special symbol display 1480 is shifted when starting the variable symbol variation display, the segment indicator SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 is different from the specific mode and the special mode. A display result (offset symbol: non-specific display result, in this embodiment, a combination of at least two types of identification information (symbols)) is displayed in a lit state on the LCD panel 1315. When it is determined that the derivation display is made and the lower special symbol display 1490 starts shifting the special symbol, the segment indicator SEG2 of the lower special symbol display 1490 is defined as the specific mode and the special mode. Displayed in a different manner (out-of-order symbol) and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 in an off-state (out-of-sequence symbol: unspecified Shows results, in this embodiment, deriving displaying at least a combination of two or more of identification information (symbol)). As described above, the display result of the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the display result of the decoration symbol variation display on the liquid crystal display 1315 correspond to each other, and the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1490. And the display result of the decorative pattern variation display on the liquid crystal display 1315 correspond to each other.

  In addition, the decorative symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 are for special effects different from the special symbols variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the special symbols variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490. It is a symbol, and the contents of the variable display performed by the upper special symbol display 1480 and the variable display performed by the lower special symbol display 1490 are further enhanced by using the decorative pattern for directing to the player. To display. In other words, when one of the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is displayed in a specific manner as a display result of the variable display, the big hit gaming state (15R big hit game state) Although the transition control to the gaming state, 2R big hit gaming state) should be performed, even if the display result of the variation display of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display 1315 becomes the specific display result, the upper special symbol display 1480 as the display result of the variation display. When the segment indicator SEG1 and the segment indicator SEG2 of the lower special symbol indicator 1490 are turned on in a manner different from the specific manner, the transition control to the big hit gaming state is not performed. If one of the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is lit and displayed in a special manner as a display result of the variable display, the game shifts to the small hit gaming state. Even if the display result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a special display result on the liquid crystal display 1315, the segment display SEG1 and the lower special symbol of the upper special symbol display 1480 are used as the display result of the variation display. When the segment display SEG2 of the display 1490 is lit and displayed in a mode different from the special mode, the transition control to the small hit gaming state is not performed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the display result of the variable display, the specific mode in which the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 are turned on is the high profit special mode. (15R probability variable design), a high profit non-special configuration (15R non-probability variation design) different from the high profit special configuration, and a low profit special configuration (2R probability variation design).

  Then, as a display result of the variable display, one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special symbol display 1490 is turned on in a high profit special mode (15R probability variable pattern) among the specific modes. In the case of display, a high-profit special display result (15R probability variation pattern: in this embodiment, among the decoration patterns “0” to “9” as a display result of the decoration symbol on the liquid crystal display 1315 The combination of the same odd symbols, “111”, “333”, “555”, “777”, “999”) is derived and displayed, and the segment of the upper special symbol display 1480 is displayed as the display result of the variable display One of the display unit SEG1 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is turned on in a low profit special mode (2R probability variable design) among the specific modes. In this case, the low profit display result (2R probability variation pattern (combination of a predetermined decoration pattern out of the outlier pattern) among the specific display results as the display result of the decoration symbol on the liquid crystal display 1315: In this embodiment, A combination of symbols including all of “1”, “2”, and “3” (for example, “123”, “213”, etc.) is derived and displayed.

  Further, as a display result of the variable display, one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special symbol display 1490 is a high profit non-special mode (15R non-probable variation) among the specific modes. In the case of lit display, the high profit non-special display result (15R non-probable display pattern: in this embodiment, “0” to “9” among the specific display results as the display result of the decoration symbol on the liquid crystal display 1315. Among the decorative symbols, a combination of the same even symbols, “000”, “222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) is derived and displayed.

  Further, as a display result of the variable display, when one of the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is lit and displayed in a special mode (small hit symbol), Special display result (decoration pattern (combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of the missing symbols) as a decorative symbol display result on the liquid crystal display 1315: In this embodiment, “1” and “ A combination of symbols including all of “2” and “3” (for example, “123”, “213”, etc.) is derived and displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display result of the variable display is displayed on the segment display SEG2 of the lower special symbol display 1490 and the low profit special mode displayed on the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480. As a result of low profit display displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 corresponding to each of the low profit special modes and a display result of variable display, the special mode and lower special display displayed on the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 A special display result displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 corresponding to each special mode displayed on the segment display SEG2 of the symbol display 1490 is combined with the same symbol combination (“1”, “2” and “3” ”And the like, for example,“ 123 ”,“ 213 ”, etc.). Therefore, it is difficult for a player who is viewing the liquid crystal display 1315 to know whether the game state is a small hit game state or a 2R big hit game state.

  As a display result of the variable display, when one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special display 1490 is lit and displayed in the high profit special mode or the low profit special mode, This embodiment is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, a high probability state (also called probability fluctuation) which is determined to be a big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) with a higher probability than the normal state and the short time state described later. In the high probability state, a big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is determined with a probability of 1 / 31.5, and in the normal state and the short-time state, a big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is determined with a probability of 1/315) To control.

  In addition, when one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special display 1490 is lit in a highly profitable non-special manner as a display result of the variable display, The special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display unit 1480 is started until the special symbol variation display is executed by the upper special symbol display unit 1480 a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Until the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1490 starts to be changed and the special symbol is displayed by the normal symbol display 1520. Changed the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the normal symbol, and a shorter time to shorten the normal time To your.

  Note that the decorative symbol variation display by the liquid crystal display 1315 is synchronized with the special symbol variation display by the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol is started on one of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490, a game effect command created according to the variable display pattern determined for the sub-integrated board 1740 Send. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a causes the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to start the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display pattern on the liquid crystal display 1315 based on the reception of the game effect command created according to the variable display pattern. When a special symbol that is variably displayed on one of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 is stopped and displayed, a game effect command created according to the special symbol stop information is transmitted. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a causes the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to stop display the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 based on the reception of the game effect command created according to the special figure stop information. That is, the variation time of the special symbol by the upper special symbol display 1480 (the time from when the variation display is started until the variation display is stopped (until the display is stopped)), and the variation time of the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display 1315 Are displayed at substantially the same time, and in the short time state, the special symbol variation time by the upper special symbol display 1480 and the special symbol variation time by the lower special symbol display 1490 are reduced, and the decoration by the liquid crystal display 1315 is performed. The fluctuation time of the symbol is also shortened.

  Further, in the time-short state, further, the control for extending the opening time for opening the lower start winning prize opening 1340 from the normal state (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds in the normal state and 5 seconds in the time-short state). ) And control for increasing the number of times that the lower start winning opening 1340 is opened compared to the normal state (in this embodiment, once in the normal state and twice in the short-time state). . The normal state is a gaming state different from the high probability state and the short time state. In the short-time state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is the same as the normal state (low probability). .

  In this embodiment, as the display result of the variable display, the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special symbol display 1490 are turned on in a high profit special mode (15R probability variable design). When executing the jackpot gaming state based on the display and controlling to the high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends, the control of the short time state is also performed in parallel. That is, if one of the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is lit and displayed in a high profit special mode as a display result of the variable display, the big hit gaming state The control in the short time state and the control in the high probability state are performed in parallel until the next big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is finished.

  On the other hand, as a display result of the variable display, one of the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is lit and displayed in a low-profit special mode (2R probability variable design). When the big hit game state is finished and the high hit state is controlled after the big hit game state is finished, the control in the short time state is always performed in parallel until the next big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) after the big hit gaming state ends. In accordance with the game state when the big hit gaming state is finished and the game state when the big hit gaming state is finished, the time is controlled until the next big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished. There are those that determine whether or not (big hit C to big hit E). Specifically, according to the gaming state when the big hit gaming state is ended, the current gaming state is determined when the big hit gaming state is finished, and if the short-time state control is already performed, the big hit gaming Control of the short-time state is performed in parallel with the control of the high-probability state after the end of the state, and if the control of the short-time state is not performed, the control of the high-probability state is performed independently after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, when the control in the high probability state and the control in the short-time state are executed in parallel after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display after the big hit gaming state ends is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). ), The control in the short-time state is terminated, and the control in the high probability state may be performed independently until the next big hit (2R big hit, 15R big hit), or after the big hit gaming state ends When the number of executions of the special symbol variable display reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the control of the short-time state and the high-probability state may be terminated and the normal state may be controlled. In addition, when the control in the high probability state is executed independently (without the control in the short-time state) after the big hit gaming state ends, the number of executions of the variable display after the big hit gaming state ends is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). It may be configured to terminate the control of the high probability state and control to the normal state when the value reaches the normal state.

  Further, not limited to the above-described example, in the short time state, the control for reducing the variation time of the special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 from the normal state, the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1520 Control for shortening the fluctuation time from the normal state, control for extending the opening time for opening the open / close blade 1380 from the normal state, and control for increasing the number of times of opening / closing the blade 1380 from the normal state Any one or any combination (or all) may be executed.

  In addition, when one of the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is turned on in a special manner as a display result of the variable display, the small hit gaming state is set. Control. Note that after the end of the small hit gaming state, the game state before the start of the small hit gaming state is continued. That is, when the gaming state is the above high probability state, when the small hit gaming state is reached, the high probability state control is executed again after the small hit gaming state is completed, and when the gaming state is the above short time state, If the condition end condition is not satisfied (if the previous big hit is a 15R non-probable big hit, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display after the big hit gaming state has not been reached), the small hit game After completion of the state, the time-short state control is executed again. If the time-short state end condition is satisfied, the time-short state control is ended. Thus, unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not directly attributable to a change in the gaming state, but merely gives the player an opportunity to get a prize ball.

  In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 1315 controls the display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols corresponding to the three display areas. The decorative symbols variably displayed in each of the three display areas are controlled to stop in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. The decorative symbol stop symbol means that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all displayed in a stopped state when the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are changed and then displayed. A combination of

  In this embodiment, as a display result of the variable display, the big hit game based on the fact that one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special display 1490 is lit in a specific manner. As a display result of the state and variation display, in the small hit gaming state based on lighting one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special display 1490 in a special manner, The big prize opening 1400 is controlled from the closed state to the open state. As a display result of the variable display, one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special display 1490 is in a high profit special mode and a high profit non-special mode among the specific modes. When it is lit, it is controlled to the 15R big hit gaming state, and when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the prize winning opening 1400 is controlled from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) When the game ball of No. 1 wins the big prize opening 1400, the big prize opening 1400 is controlled from the open state to the closed state. One round (1R) in the big hit gaming state is from the control of the big prize opening 1400 from the closed state to the open state until the big prize opening 1400 is controlled from the open state to the closed state. The 15R jackpot gaming state ends when 15 rounds (15R) are executed.

  Further, when one of the segment display SEG1 of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the segment display SEG2 of the lower special display 1490 is lit and displayed in the low profit special mode among the specific modes as the display result of the variable display, 2R The winning game 1400 is closed from the open state when a predetermined time (eg, 320 ms, 512 ms, or 800 ms) has elapsed since the winning game 1400 is controlled from the closed state to the opened state. Control to the state. The 2R jackpot gaming state ends when two rounds (2R) are executed.

  When one of the segment display unit SEG1 of the upper special symbol display unit 1480 and the segment display unit SEG2 of the lower special symbol display unit 1490 is lit and displayed in a special manner as a display result of the variable display, the small hit game state is controlled. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, any one of 320 ms, 512 ms, and 800 ms) has elapsed since the grand prize opening 1400 was controlled from the closed state to the open state, the special prize opening 1400 is controlled from the open state to the closed state. In the small hit gaming state in this embodiment, the control (round) of opening the big winning opening 1400 and then closing it is repeated twice.

That is, in this embodiment, when it is determined to be a big hit based on a special symbol determination random number and a normal determination table or a high probability determination table described later,
1. Control to the 15R jackpot gaming state, control to the high probability state after the end of the 15R jackpot gaming state, and execute the above-mentioned short-time control until the next jackpot, the jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot)
2. Control to the 15R jackpot gaming state, and after the 15R jackpot gaming state, the above-mentioned time-short state until the special symbol change display is executed 100 times on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 Big hit B (15R non-probable big hit)
3. The opening time for each round (the time from when the big prize opening is controlled to the open state until it is controlled to the closed state) is controlled to a 2R big hit gaming state of 320 ms. If the control of the short-time state is executed when the 2R big hit game state is finished while controlling to the probability state, the big hit C for executing the short-time state control until the next big hit (2R probability variable big hit C)
4. The opening time for each round (the time from when the big prize opening is controlled to the open state until it is controlled to the closed state) is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state of 512 ms, and after the 2R big hit gaming state ends, the above high If the control of the short-time state is executed when the 2R big hit game state is finished while controlling to the probability state, the big hit D (2R probability variable big hit D) is executed until the next big hit is reached
5. The opening time for each round (the time from when the big prize opening is controlled to the open state until it is controlled to the closed state) is controlled to a 2R big hit gaming state of 800 ms. If the control of the short-time state is executed when the 2R big hit game state is finished while controlling to the probability state, the big hit E for executing the short-time state control until the next big hit (2R probability variable big hit E)
6. The opening time for each round (the time from when the big prize opening is controlled to the open state until it is controlled to the closed state) is controlled to a 2R big hit gaming state of 320 ms. Big hit F (2R probability variation big hit F) which controls to the probability state and executes the control in the above short time state until the next big hit
7. Opening time for each round (time from controlling the big winning opening to the open state until it is closed) is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state of 512 ms, and after the 2R big hit gaming state, the above high Big hit G (2R probability variable big hit G) that controls to the probability state and executes the above-mentioned short-time state control until the next big hit
8. Opening time per round (time from controlling the big prize opening to the closed state until controlling to the closed state) is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state of 800 ms, and after the 2R big hit gaming state, Big hit H (2R probability variation big hit H) which controls to the probability state and executes the control in the above short time state until the next big hit
Control to one of 8 types of big hits.

  When the main control MPU 1700a determines that the big hit is based on the special symbol determination random number, the main control MPU 1700a determines which of the eight types of big hits is to be generated based on the big hit symbol random number.

In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit based on a special symbol determination random number and a normal determination table or a high probability determination table described later,
1.1 Opening time per round (time from controlling the big prize opening to the open state until it is controlled to the closed state) is a small hit A that controls to the small hit gaming state of 320 ms
2.1 Opening time per round (time from controlling the big winning opening to the open state until controlling to the closed state) is a small hit B that controls to the small hit gaming state of 512 ms
3. Opening time per round (time from controlling the big winning opening to the open state until controlling to the closed state) is a small hit C that controls to the small hit gaming state of 800 ms
Control to one of the three types of small hits.

  When the main control MPU 1700a determines that a small hit is made based on the special symbol determination random number, the main control MPU 1700a determines which of the three types of big hits is to be generated based on the small hit design random number.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1700a determines that a big hit is made based on the special symbol per-determination random number when the special symbol variation display is started on the upper special symbol display 1480, the above 8 Decide on one of the types of jackpots. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation display is started on the lower special symbol display 1490, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special symbol judgment random number, the 15R probability variation big hit and 15R among the eight types of big hits are determined. Determine one of the non-probable big hits. That is, when the big special symbol display 1490 is a big hit, the 15R big hit gaming state is always executed, and the 2R big hit gaming state is not executed. In the 15R jackpot gaming state, more prize balls can be obtained than in the 2R jackpot gaming state, and the gaming value is high for the player. Therefore, when the special symbol variable display is executed on the lower special symbol display 1490, the expectation for the 15R big hit gaming state can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the probability that the main control MPU 1700a determines that a small hit will be generated based on the special symbol determination random number when starting the special symbol variation display in the lower special symbol display 1490 is as follows: The special symbol display 1480 is set to be about 1/6 lower than the probability that the main control MPU 1700a determines that a small hit will be generated based on the special symbol determination random number when starting the variable symbol display on the upper special symbol display 1480. ing. Specifically, the probability of determining that a small hit will be generated based on the special symbol determination random number when the special symbol variation display is started on the upper special symbol display 1480 is not related to the gaming state (low probability). Set to 6/631 (both in the state and high probability state), and when the special symbol variation display is started in the lower special symbol display 1490, a small hit is generated based on the random number for judgment per special symbol. The probability of determining is set to 1/631 regardless of the gaming state (in both the low probability state and the high probability state). Thus, in the lower special symbol display 1490, since the probability of being a small hit is also set low, the proportion of the 15R big hit gaming state executed in the hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit, small hit) becomes very high. When the special symbol display on the lower special symbol display 1490 is started, the expectation for the 15R big hit gaming state can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the big prize opening 1400 is controlled from the closed state to the open state in the 2R big hit gaming state, the period until the big prize opening 1400 is controlled from the open state to the closed state, and the small hit gaming state The period from when the prize winning opening 1400 is controlled from the closed state to the opened state until the prize winning opening 1400 is controlled from the opened state to the closed state is the same (a degree that cannot be distinguished (for example, difference within 100 ms)) Are considered identical). In addition, after controlling the grand prize opening 1400 from the open state to the closed state in the 2R big hit gaming state, the waiting time until the big prize opening 1400 is controlled from the closed state to the open state, and closing from the open state in the small hit gaming state. The waiting time until the winning prize opening 1400 is controlled from the closed state to the open state after being controlled to be in the same state is assumed to be the same (if it is indistinguishable (eg, within 100 ms), it is regarded as the same). . Therefore, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the game is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and when it is grasped as the small hit gaming state, it is not controlled to the high probability state. This can prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, when the opening time until the big winning opening 1400 is changed from the open state to the closed state is 320 ms, almost no game ball is expected to enter the big winning opening 1400. If it is not possible (for example, 1 to 2) and the opening time until the grand prize winning opening 1400 is changed from the open state to the closed state is 512 ms, a small number of balls can be expected (for example, 1 to 4). In the case where the opening time from the open state to the closed state is 800 ms, more balls can be expected (for example, 1 to 6). As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for entering the game ball into the big winning opening 1400 as the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, in other words, the gaming ball enters the big winning opening 1400. And controlling to one of a plurality of states with different expected values (different profit values) for the number of prize balls obtained. Therefore, even when the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state are executed, after the big winning opening 1400 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the user is interested in the opening time from the open state to the closed state. In the case where the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state are executed in a long opening time, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected, so that the interest of the player can be improved.
[12-2. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1700 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then main control side power-on processing and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 138, and FIG. 140 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows.
[12-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determination per special symbol used for determining whether to generate a big hit gaming state and whether to generate a small hit gaming state, and a random number for determination per special symbol 115. An initial value determining random number for determining a special symbol used for determining an initial value, a reach determining random number used for determining whether to generate a reach when a big hit gaming state is not generated, and FIG. 115 The random display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern to be displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490, and the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol when the big hit gaming state is generated. Determination of the jackpot symbol random number used to determine the combination of special symbols displayed on the display 1490 and the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number Random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol used, and the small hit used for determining the combination of the special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 when the small hit gaming state is generated There are prepared a random number for design, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol used for determining an initial value of the random number for a small hit symbol, and the like. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol per-determining random number used for determining whether to open / close the open / close blade 1380 of the lower start winning port 1340 shown in FIG. A random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol used for determining an initial value, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining a variation display pattern to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1520 shown in FIG. Has been.
[12-2. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1700a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, output of a power failure clear signal is started at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 shown in FIG. 126 (step S12). As described above, the power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal CLR with the logic being LOW via the main control I / O port 1700b shown in FIG. As a result, the main control MPU 1700a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop IC23 shown in FIG. 126, and the PR that is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 until the latch state described later is set. The logic input to the terminal can be inverted to output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Following step S12, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S14), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S16). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage (reference voltage Vref shown in FIG. 126), the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. A power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S14 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S16, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, as the power failure warning signal.

  Subsequent to step S16, the output of the power failure clear signal is stopped at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 (step S18). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the main control I / O port 1700b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. As a result, the main control MPU 1700a can set the D-type flip-flop IC23 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop IC23 latches the state that the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop IC23 outputs the power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal.

  Following step S18, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a shown in FIG. 119 has been operated (step S20). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 1700a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 268a is operated in step S20, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S22). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated in step S20, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S24). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main built-in RAM”) incorporated in the main control MPU 1700a, and game information relating to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. Is a flag indicating whether or not to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S22 and step S24 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1700a.

  Subsequent to step S22 or step S24, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S26). In the wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 by the liquid crystal control board 1750 shown in FIG. For example, various control programs compressed from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 119 are read out and stored in a RAM built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S26, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S28). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S28, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S30). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main internal RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Following step S30, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. Is determined (step S32). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S34). Whether the backup flag BK-FLG is stored in the main built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value It is a flag indicating whether or not, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and to a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the main internal RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S36). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to 0, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1700a (hereinafter referred to as “main internal ROM”). Information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM. Here, “when power is restored” means in addition to a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is shut off, a state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power loss, and a reset is detected upon detection of high frequency irradiation. In addition, the state after the return is also included.

  Subsequent to step S36, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S38). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S28, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S32. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the entire area of the main built-in RAM is cleared (step S34). S40). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Thereby, for example, the initial value 0 is set to the above-described special symbol determination random number, initial value update type counter, or the like.

  Following step S40, the work area of the main internal RAM is set as an initial setting (step S42). In this setting, the initial information is read from the main internal ROM and the initial information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S42, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S44). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. Test commands for performing the various tests are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM. When the sub-integrated board 1740 receives the RAM clear notification command, the RAM clear notification command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 1740 receives the test command, the tone generator IC 1740c shown in FIG. Then, test commands for performing various inspections of the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the lamp driving board 1760 are transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the lamp driving board 1760, and the like.

  Subsequent to step S38 or step S44, interrupt initialization is performed (step S46). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S46, interrupt permission is set. (Step S48). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S46, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S48, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S50). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S50, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S52). This determination is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 126, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage (reference voltage Vref shown in FIG. 126), and the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d A power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S52, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S54). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-described special symbol determination initial value determination random number, reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, jackpot symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. For example, the counter that updates the random number for determination per special symbol is the above-described initial value update type counter, and the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the random number for determination per special symbol is set to the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. Is incremented by 1 (counts up) each time. This counter counts up to the upper limit from the initial value determination random number for determination per special symbol when the initial value determination random number for determination per special symbol is set (updated) by non-winning random number update processing. It counts up from the lower limit value to the random number for determining the initial value for judgment per special symbol. Then, the random number for determining the initial value for special symbol determination is updated again by the non-winning random number update process. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination, random number for determining initial value for normal symbol determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process. The random number for normal symbol determination is the same as the above-described method for updating the random number for special symbol determination, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Following step S54, the process returns to step S50 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S52, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step S54, and steps S50 to S54 are repeated. The processing from step S50 to step S54 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S52, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S56). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S56, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 shown in FIG. 126, via the main control I / O port 1700b, or the open / close blade shown in FIG. Solenoid 1390, open / close plate solenoid 1420, upper special symbol display 1480, lower special symbol display 1490, upper special symbol memory lamp 1500, lower special symbol memory lamp 1510, normal symbol indicator 1520, normal symbol memory lamp 1530, gaming state The drive signals output to the display lamp 1540, the small hit display lamp 1550, the round display lamp 1560, etc. are stopped (step S58). By outputting the power failure clear signal, the D-type flip-flop IC23 can release the latched state.

  Subsequent to step S58, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S60). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main internal RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S60, the value 1 is set to the backup flag BK-FLG. (Step S62) This completes the storage of the backup information.

  Subsequent to step S62, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S64). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S64, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 1700a is reset, and then the main control MPU 1700a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S56 to step S64 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1700a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by the subsequent power recovery.

In step S32, it is inspected whether the backup information stored in the main internal RAM is normal. In step S34, it is inspected whether the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. doing. In this way, by checking the backup information stored in the main built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the backup information is stored by fraud.
[12-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 138 and 139.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S50 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main built-in RAM. Specifically, the detection signal from the left winning port switch 1475 for detecting a game ball that has entered the left normal winning port 1440 and the decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465 and 1470 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the right prize opening switch 1450 that detects a game ball that has entered the game, a detection signal from a count switch 1430 that detects a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 1400, and a game that has entered the upper start prize opening 1270 A detection signal from the upper start opening switch 1272 that detects a ball, a detection signal from the middle start opening switch 1360 that detects a game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 1330, and a game ball that has entered the lower start winning opening 1340 A detection signal from the lower start port switch 1370 to detect, a detection signal from the gate switch 1460 to detect a game ball that has passed through the gate 1290, 119 A payout control for indicating that the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 119 has normally received a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 for detecting fraud using a stone and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. The ACK signal from the substrate 715 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 are turned on as shown in FIG. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1520 shown in FIG. 115 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not an ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 715 has normally received the various transmitted commands has been input is performed. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the special symbol per-design determining random number and the big hit symbol random number described above are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a special symbol per-determination determination initial value determination that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S54 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number and the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol are also updated. These special symbol determination initial value determination random numbers and jackpot symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby further improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for jackpot symbol are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is counted up only every time this winning random number update process is performed. For example, the counter that updates the random number for determination per special symbol counts up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the random number for determination per special symbol every time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determining random number for determination per special symbol to the upper limit value, and then counts up from the lower limit value to the initial value determining random number for determination per special symbol. When the counter finishes counting the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the random number for special symbol judgment, the initial value determination random number for special symbol judgment is updated by this winning random number update process (this special symbol judgment) The initial value determination random number is also updated in the above-described non-winning random number update process). Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for normal symbol determination is the same as the above-described method for updating the random number for special symbol determination, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the board of the main control board 1700 and the payout control board 715 Or create a self-check command to check the connection status. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 715. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 1400 shown in FIG. 115, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 715. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 715 has successfully completed reception is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1700 and the payout control board 715 is created. To the payout control board 715. Detailed descriptions thereof will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 715 transmits a state command such as a state in which the above-described prize ball unit 450 causes a stagnation of a ball and a game ball cannot be paid out, as will be described in detail later. In the frame command reception process in step S82, when this status command is normally received, information that informs the payout control board 715 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main internal RAM. Although detailed description thereof will be described later, the normally received status command is shaped and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S82, an illegal act detection process is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and there is a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395, there is a case where the detection signal from the count switch 1430 is not in the big hit gaming state (the game is input to the big prize opening 1400). For example, when a ball enters, a prize ball abnormality notification command is created as an abnormal state, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the start winning process is performed based on the input information. In this start winning process, whether or not a detection signal from any of the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 shown in FIG. judge.

  The main control MPU 1700a includes a middle start port switch based on a determination result as to whether a detection signal from any one of the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 is input to the input terminal. If a detection signal from 1360 is input, the upper special symbol holding memory counter in the main built-in RAM is counted up (the counter value is incremented by 1), and it is detected by the middle start port switch 1360 from the start information storage area described later. When the starting information based on the above is read, the upper special symbol holding storage counter is counted down (the counter value is decremented by 1). Further, based on the determination result of whether or not the detection signal from any of the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 is input to the input terminal, When a detection signal or a detection signal from the lower start port switch 1370 is input, the lower special symbol storage counter of the main control RAM is counted up (the counter value is incremented by 1), and the upper start port switch 1272 is started from the start information storage area. Alternatively, when the start information based on the detection by the lower start port switch 1370 is read, the special symbol holding storage counter described above is counted down (the counter value is decremented by 1). The upper special symbol hold storage counter and the special symbol hold storage counter described above are counters updated in the range of 0 to 4. When the counter value is 4, the counter value is not updated.

  Also, the main control MPU 1700a determines the above-mentioned big hit determination if the counter value of the upper special symbol holding storage counter of the main built-in RAM is not the maximum value 4 when the detection signal from the middle start port switch 1360 is inputted. The values of various counters for updating the random numbers for random use and jackpot symbols are extracted, and the starting information of the main built-in RAM using the values extracted from these counters and the identification information indicating that they are detected by the middle starting port switch 1360 as starting information. Store in the storage area. In addition, when the detection signal from the upper start port switch 1272 or the lower start port switch 1370 is input, if the counter value of the lower special symbol storage memory counter of the main built-in RAM is not 4, which is the maximum value, as described above. Extracts the values of various counters that update the jackpot judgment disturbance and jackpot symbol random numbers, and starts the identification information indicating the values extracted from these counters and detected by the upper starter switch 1272 or the lower starter switch 1370 Information is stored in the startup information storage area of the main internal RAM.

  In this start information storage area, start information storage blocks 0 to 7 (eight start information storage blocks) are provided, start information storage block 0, start information storage block 1, start information storage block 2,... The start information is stored in the order of the start information storage block 7. For example, when the start information is stored in the start information storage blocks 0 to 6, the start information is stored in the start information storage block 7 when the detection signal from the middle start port switch 1360 is input to the input terminal. At this time, identification information indicating that it is detected by the middle start port switch 1360 is also stored. Thus, in the start information storage blocks 0 to 7, it is stored in time series whether the game ball is detected by any one of the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360 and the lower start port switch 1370 (That is, the history is stored so as to be understood).

  The main control MPU 1700a reads the start information stored in the start information storage block 0 when starting the variation display of the special symbol, and indicates that the read start information is detected by the middle start port switch 1360. In this case, the upper special symbol display 1480 is controlled to display the special symbol variation display, and the read start information indicates that it is detected by the upper start port switch 1272 or the lower start port switch 1370. Controls the lower special symbol display 1490 to execute the special symbol variation display. When the main control MPU 1700a reads the start information, the start information in the start information storage block 1 is stored in the start information storage block 0, the start information in the start information storage block 2 is stored in the start information storage block 1,... The start information of block 7 is shifted to start information storage block 6, respectively. For example, when the start information is stored in the start information storage blocks 0 to 2, the start information in the start information storage block 1 is stored in the start information storage block 0, and the start information in the start information storage block 2 is set in the start information storage block. The start information storage blocks 2 to 7 are set as free areas.

  Further, the main control MPU 1700a sets the output of the lighting signal of the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b so that the counter value of the upper special symbol storage memory counter is turned on as the number of holdings corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480, The output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Further, the main control MPU 1700a sets the output of the lighting signals of the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b so that the counter value of the lower special symbol storage memory counter is turned on as the number of holdings corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490, The output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Further, the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination processing whether or not the detection signal from any of the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 is input to the input terminal. When it is input, a start winning command corresponding to the input detection signal is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM described above.

  Specifically, if a detection signal from any one of the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 is input to the input terminal, “01100000B (= 60H)” is set as the status. If it is a detection signal from the upper start switch 1272, “XXXX0003B (= Y3H)” is set to the mode, and a start winning command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) is formed. If the detection signal is “XXXX0001 (= Y1H)” is set to the mode, the start winning command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) is shaped. If the detection signal is from the lower start port switch 1370, “ “XXXXXX0002 (= Y2H)” is set to the mode and the start-up input has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) Shaping the command.

  Further, when the detection signal from the middle start opening switch 1360 is inputted, if the counter value of the upper special symbol holding storage counter is not the maximum value of 4, the game ball is effectively entered into the middle start winning opening 1330. "01100010B (= 62H)" is set in the status as a special 1 holding number designation command indicating the number (the number of holdings = the counter value of the upper special symbol holding storage counter), and from the upper starting port switch 1272 or the lower starting port switch 1370 When the detection signal is input, if the counter value of the lower special symbol storage memory counter is not the maximum value of 4, the effective number of game balls that enter the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower start winning opening 1340 (the number of holds) = “01100011B (= 63H)” is set in the status as a special 2 reservation number designation command indicating the counter value of the lower special symbol storage memory counter) If the number of holds is “1”, “0010B (= 02H)”, if the number of holds is “2”, “0011B (= 03H)”, and if the number of holds is “3” “0100B (= 04H)” is set, and if the number of holds is “4”, “0101B (= 05H)” is set in each mode, and a special 1 hold number having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) A designated command and a special 2 hold number designation command are formed. The shaped start winning command, special 1 hold number designation command, and special 2 hold number designation command are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM as transmission information.

  When the special symbol variation display is started on the upper special symbol display 1480, the main control MPU 1700a transmits the special 1-holding number designation command in addition to the transmission of the game effect command. Also, when starting the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1490, the main control MPU 1700a transmits the special 2 reservation number designation command in addition to the transmission of the game effect command. Specifically, “01100010B (= 62H)” is set as the status as the special 1 hold count designation command, “01100011B (= 63H)” is set as the status as the special 2 hold count designation command, and the hold count is “0”. "0001B (= 01H)" if the number is "1", "0010B (= 02H)" if the number is "1", and "0011B (= 03H)" if the number is "2". If the number of holds is “3”, “0100B (= 04H)” is set for each mode, and if the number of holds is “4”, “0101B (= 05H)” is set for each mode and 2 bytes ( A special 1 hold number designation command and a special 2 hold number designation command having a storage capacity of 16 bits) are formed. The shaped game effect command, special 1 hold number designation command, and special 2 hold number designation command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM.

  A value specific to the type (spec (eg, normal type, digital splash type)) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the upper 4 bits “XXXX” of the start winning command mode. In pachinko gaming machines, a plurality of different types of gaming machines are manufactured as the same series. In addition, in the same series of gaming machines, the sub integrated ROM 1740b and the sound ROM 1740d mounted on the sub integrated substrate 1740, the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b and the character ROM 1750d mounted on the liquid crystal control substrate 1750 are used in common, and thus the manufacturing cost. We are trying to reduce it. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a sets a selection table according to the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on receiving the start winning command, and when receiving various commands from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a). By selecting information stored in the sub-integrated ROM 1740b, the sound ROM 1740d, and the like based on the selection table, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a transmits a start winning command, a special 1 hold number designation command, and a special 2 hold number designation command to the liquid crystal control board 1750. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sets a selection table according to the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the reception of the start winning command from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and the selection table when the display command is received from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a. By selecting information stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, the character ROM 1750d, etc. based on the above, it is possible to execute an effect display according to the type of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also notified by a command created by the main control side power-on process. Specifically, any of the commands corresponding to the game information created in the power-on command creation process (step S38) or the RAM clear notification command created in the RAM clear notification and test command creation process (step S44) The type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by the upper 4 bits of the mode.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a is created by a command including type information, a RAM clear notification, and a test command creation process (step S44) among commands corresponding to the game information created by the power-on command creation process (step S38). The type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 specified by the upper 4 bits of the RAM clear notification command mode is stored in the type information buffer of the RAM (hereinafter referred to as “sub-integrated internal RAM”) built in the sub-integrated MPU 1740a. To do. In addition, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a includes a command including type information, a RAM clear notification, and a test command creation process (in the command corresponding to the game information created in the power-on command creation process (step S38) on the liquid crystal control board 1750 ( The RAM clear notification command created in step S44) is transmitted. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is created by a command including type information, a RAM clear notification, and a test command creation process (step S44) among commands corresponding to the game information created by the power-on command creation process (step S38). The type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 specified by the upper 4 bits of the RAM clear notification command mode is stored in the type information buffer of the RAM (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal built-in RAM”) built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. .

  The type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stored in the type information buffer of the sub-integrated built-in RAM is overwritten and updated every time a start winning command is received from the main control MPU 1700a, and stored in the type information buffer of the liquid crystal built-in RAM. The type information of the machine 1 is overwritten and updated every time a start winning command is received from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a. As a result, the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stored in the type information buffer of the sub integrated built-in RAM and the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stored in the type information buffer of the liquid crystal built-in RAM are changed due to noise or the like. Even immediately, it can be updated to regular type information.

  That is, when the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified only once when the power is turned on, the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stored in the type information buffer of the sub-integrated built-in RAM and the built-in liquid crystal in the middle of the game due to noise or the like When the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stored in the type information buffer of the RAM changes, the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be updated to the normal type information unless the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on again. It is not possible to cause a problem over a long period of time. In this embodiment, the pachinko game is performed by a start winning command transmitted when winning at the upper starting winning port 1270, the middle starting winning port 1330, and the lower starting winning port 1340, in other words, a relatively frequently started start winning command. In order to notify the model information of the machine 1, the type information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stored in the type information buffer of the sub-integrated built-in RAM and the type of pachinko gaming machine 1 stored in the type information buffer of the liquid crystal built-in RAM in the middle of the game Even if the type information changes, it can be immediately updated to the normal type information.

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls detected by the middle start opening switch 1360 is set so as to be stored in the start information storage block up to 4 as start information, and an upper start opening switch 1272 and a lower start opening switch 1370 are set. The total number of game balls detected by the above is set to be stored in the start information storage block as start information up to a maximum of four.

  Following the start winning process, the start information is read from the start information storage block 0, and the game process is performed based on the start information. In this game processing, for example, the random number for determining the special symbol is extracted from the read start information, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main built-in ROM (whether it is a jackpot or not) Or determining which of the jackpot symbol judgment values stored in advance in the main built-in ROM matches the value (of the special symbol specific mode and the above eight types of jackpots) To determine whether or not to match, and whether or not it matches the small hit determination value stored in the main built-in ROM in advance by taking out the value of the random number for special symbol determination Or a random number for a small hit symbol is taken out to determine which of the small bonus symbol determination values stored in advance in the main built-in ROM (a special mode of the special symbol and the above three types of small symbols). Out of hit Of the judgment) and or a shift. Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of jackpot changes to a high probability (at the time of probability fluctuation) set higher than the normal time (low probability). Is read from the normal time determination table, while with high probability, it is read from the probability change time determination table.

  The gaming state to be generated is determined by these determination results. In the determined gaming state, a variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described random number for variation display pattern to create a game effect command, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the big hit gaming state is set, the output of the drive signal to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420 to set the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1410 shown in FIG. Store in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 1460 shown in FIG. 115 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the normal symbol determination random number described above is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main built-in RAM. Remember.

  In this gate information storage area, gate information storage blocks 0 to 3 (four gate information storage blocks) are provided. Gate information storage block 0, gate information storage block 1, gate information storage block 2, and gate information Gate information is stored in the order of the storage block 3. For example, when the gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 2, the gate information is stored in the gate information storage block 3 when the detection signal from the gate switch 1460 is input to the input terminal.

  The gate information stored in the gate information storage block 0 is read out. When this gate information is read, the gate information in the gate information storage block 1 is stored in the gate information storage block 0, the gate information in the gate information storage block 2 is stored in the gate information storage block 1, and the gate information in the gate information storage block 3 is stored in the gate information. The gate information storage block 3 becomes an empty area by being shifted to the information storage block 2, respectively. For example, when gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 2, the gate information in the gate information storage block 1 is stored in the gate information storage block 0, and the gate information in the gate information storage block 2 is stored in the gate information storage block. The gate information storage block 2 and the gate information storage block 3 become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 3, the normal symbol storage lamps 1530 a to 1530 d shown in FIG. Based on the gate information described above, the output of the lighting signals of the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls detected by the gate switch 1460 that can be stored in the gate information storage block as gate information is set to four.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information is read out from the gate information storage block 0, and the normal symbol per-design random number value is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main built-in ROM in advance. And whether or not match. When they coincide with each other, an output of a drive signal to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 shown in FIG. 115 to open / close the opening / closing blade 1380 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above, and the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1520 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1520 shown in FIG. And stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the status command from the payout control board 715 is normally received from the output terminal based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 715, or when the big hit gaming state is shown in FIG. In addition, a drive signal is output to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420 for opening / closing the opening / closing plate 1410 of the winning prize opening 1400, or the jackpot information output signal, the probability changing information output signal, and the special symbol shown in FIG. 130 (a). Various information (game information) related to the game, such as a display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time and medium information output information, and a start opening prize information output signal, is output to the payout control board 715.

  Subsequent to step S90, sub-integrated board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In the sub-integrated board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area of the main built-in RAM described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. As described above, the transmission information includes a game effect command, a RAM clear notification command, a test command, a prize ball abnormality notification command, a status command, a start winning command, a special 1 hold number designation command, a special 2 hold number designation command, and the like. There is. In addition to transmitting this transmission information, there is a problem in the connection state based on the value of the self-check flag set when the connection state between the main control board 1700 and the payout control board 715 is confirmed. Sometimes a connection failure command is created and transmitted to the sub-integrated board 1740.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1700a saves the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack in hardware. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU 1700a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.
[13. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 715 will be described. First, the payout control side power-on process will be described, and then the payout control side timer interruption process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation angle switch history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball spot determination process, award The winning ball stock number adding process for balls, the winning ball stock number adding process for lending, stock monitoring process, payout ball removal determination setting process, payout setting process, and ball removal setting process will be described. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control side power-on process, FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control side power-on process of FIG. 141, and FIG. 143 is a payout control side following FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control side timer interruption process, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process, and FIG. 146 is a rotation chart. FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a spherical spot determination process, and FIG. 149 is a prize. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for adding a prize ball stock for a ball. FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of payout ball removal determination setting processing, and FIG. 153 is a payout FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting process, and FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the ball removal setting process. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, ball rental prize ball number addition processing, stock The monitoring process and the payout ball removal determination setting process are performed as one process of the main operation setting process in step S356 in the payout control side power-on process described later, and the ball removal switch operation determination process, the rotation angle switch history creation process, the sprocket Priorities are set in the order of fixed position judgment skip processing, ball corner judgment processing, prize ball prize ball number addition processing, rental ball prize ball stock addition processing, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball removal judgment setting processing Has been.
[13-1. Discharge control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 performs payout control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 141 to 143. When the payout control side power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a sets an interrupt mode (step S300). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 1710a. In this embodiment, a payout control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when this payout control side timer interrupt process is interrupted, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S300, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S302). In this I / O input / output setting, the I / O port input / output setting of the payout control MPU 1710a is performed.

  Following step S302, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S304). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases. As shown in FIG. Is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d of the main control board 1700. A power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d is input when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer).

  Subsequent to step S304, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a shown in FIG. 119 is operated (step S306). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 1710a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 268a is operated in step S306, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S308), while when the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated in step S306, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S310). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in, for example, a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in RAM”) incorporated in the payout control MPU 1710a, for example, award ball stock number, real ball count, and drive command. This is a flag indicating whether or not to delete payout information (details will be described later) related to payout such as number, various flags, and various information stored in various information storage areas. Value 1 is set to 0 when the payout information is not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S308 and S310 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.

  Subsequent to step S308 or step S310, a setting for permitting access to the payout internal RAM is performed (step S312). With this setting, the payout internal RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S312, the stack pointer is set (step S314). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S314, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are loaded on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S314, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S316). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S316, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S318). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout internal RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S318, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S320). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S322). Whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG stores and holds payout backup information such as payout information, a checksum value, and a value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG in the payout built-in RAM in the payout control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout control side power-off process is normally terminated, and to a value of 0 when the payout control side power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S322, that is, when the payout control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the payout internal RAM is set as power recovery (step S324). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 0, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 1710a (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in ROM”). Electric time information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM. Here, “when power is restored” includes, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after the power failure or the instantaneous power failure as described above.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S316, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S320, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S322, that is, if the payout control side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout built-in RAM is cleared (step S326). Then, the work area of the payout internal RAM is set as an initial setting (step S328). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S324 or step S328, interrupt initialization is performed (step S330). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S330, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S332). With this setting, the payout control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S330, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S332, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S334). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as shown in FIG. Input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d of the control board 1700. The determination in step S334 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S334, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S336). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms in a payout control side timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S334 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 0 is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG (step S338), and FIG. An external WDT clear signal is output to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 1710c shown (turned ON, step S340). The external WDT 1710c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 1710a. When the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b shown in FIG. A reset signal is output for resetting (periodically diagnosing whether the payout control MPU 1710a system is out of control).

  Subsequent to step S340, port output processing is performed (step S342). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700 have been normally received, drive information for controlling drive to the payout motor 465, and the payout motor 465 are actually stored. Information on the number of award balls for which the number of game balls has been paid out, LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator 1730 shown in FIG. 119, and reception completion information indicating that the rental request signal from the CR unit has been received normally. Are stored, and when a variety of commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b based on this output information, the payer ACK signal is sent as the main information. Output to control board 1700, output drive signal to payout motor 465, payout motor 465 actually pays out game ball 119 is output as an award ball number information signal to the external terminal board 700a shown in FIG. 119 (in this embodiment, every time the payout motor 465 actually pays out 10 game balls, it is output to the external terminal board 700a. A prize ball number information signal is output), a display signal is output to the error LED display 1730, and a reception completion signal is output to the CR unit when a rent request signal from the CR unit is normally received. To do.

  Subsequent to step S342, port input processing is performed (step S344). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the error release switch 1731, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505, the detection signal from the counting switch 462, the detection signal from the full switch 545, the lending request signal from the CR unit shown in FIG. A detection signal from various signals such as a connection signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1700 that informs that the main control board 1700 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, respectively, Stored in the input information storage area as input information.

  Subsequent to step S344, timer update processing is performed (step S346). In this timer update process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but when determining whether or not the above-described sprocket 457 is in a stagnation state, a sphere detection time set as a determination condition thereof, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed, the ball removal determination set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged as described above. Time, full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the above-mentioned full tank unit 520 is full of game balls, detection from the ball break switch 426 shown in FIG. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the above-described ball passage unit 420 by the signal is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the determination condition is set. By performing time management of burn out determination time is. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, and the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms. Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal is performed. The judgment time, the full tank judgment time and the ball breakage determination time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0 so that the ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time and the ball breakage judgment time are accurately measured. . These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout internal RAM as time management information.

  Following step S346, CR communication processing is performed (step S348). In this CR communication process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not a lending request signal from the CR unit is input based on this input information. When a lending request signal is input and the lending request signal is normally received, the reception completion information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area, and the lending request signal is paid out as lending information. Store in the rented ball information storage area of the built-in RAM. On the other hand, when the ball rental request signal cannot be normally received, the ball rental request error information indicating that fact is stored in the state information storage area of the payout built-in RAM.

  When a connection signal is input from the CR unit, CR connection information indicating that the connection with the CR unit is normal is stored in the state information storage area. When no connection signal is input, CR connection information that indicates that the connection with the CR unit is abnormal is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S348, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed (step S350). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-mentioned full-unit unit 520 is filled with game balls based on a detection signal from the full-tan switch 545. Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 420 described above by the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 shown in FIG. Judgment. For example, whether or not the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls is determined by detecting from the full tank switch 545 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using a timer interruption period of 1.75 ms. When the signal is ON, the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is turned OFF in the last full (1.75 ms before) full ball and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is changed from OFF to ON. When this is done, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the full tank unit 520 is not full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 420 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms, When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned OFF in the previous full (1.75ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON from OFF When the transition is made, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 is ON in this full tank and ball break check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 is ON, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 420 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is sent to the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 is OFF, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 420 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. To remember.

  Following step S350, command reception processing is performed (step S352). In this command reception process, various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, connection abnormality information that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1700 and the payout control board 715 is stored in the state information storage area described above. . A detailed description of various commands related to payout from the main control board 1700 will be described later.

  Following step S352, command analysis processing is performed (step S354). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S352 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S354, main operation setting processing is performed (step S356). In the main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. A detailed description of these operation settings and monitoring will be described later.

  Following step S356, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S358). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 1730 of the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. Stored in the output information storage area. For example, the above-described ball break information is read from the state information storage area, display data corresponding to the ball break information (display value 1 in this embodiment) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S358, command transmission processing is performed (step S360). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, a command is created based on the various information, and is transmitted to the main control board 1700. A detailed description of these commands will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S360, output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 1710c is stopped (turns OFF, step S362). As a result, the external WDT 1710c is cleared so that the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b are not reset. The external WDT 1710c starts counting the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped.

  Following step S362, the process returns to step S334 again to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal has not been input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S336. When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 0 is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S338. In step S340, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 1710c, port output processing is performed in step S342, port input processing is performed in step S344, timer update processing is performed in step S346, and CR communication is performed in step S348. Processing, and in step S350, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed. In step S352, command reception processing is performed. In step S354, command analysis processing is performed. In step S356, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S358, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S360, command transmission processing is performed. In S362, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 1710c is stopped (OFF), and Steps S334 to S362 are repeated. The processing from step S334 to step S362 is referred to as “payout control side main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1700, the processing content of the payout control side main process differs. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 1710a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 1710a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1700 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1700 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S342. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 1710a ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S334, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S364). With this setting, payout control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S364, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is stopped (step S366). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Subsequent to step S366, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 1710c and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S368). This clears the external WDT 1710c. Subsequent to step S368, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S370). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S318 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S370, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1. (Step S372) This completes the storage of the payout backup information. Subsequent to step S372, prohibition of access to the payout built-in RAM is set (step S374). With this setting, access to the payout internal RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the internal payout RAM is protected. Following step S374, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 1710c. Therefore, the external WDT 1710c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b to reset it. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 1710a performs the payout control side power-on process again. The processing from step S364 to step S374 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 1710a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the payout control side power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.

In step S320, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout internal RAM is normal. In step S322, it is determined whether or not the payout control side power-off process has been normally completed. I am inspecting. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the payout backup information is stored by fraud.
[13-2. Discharge control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, payout control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 141 to 143.

  When the payout control side timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 144 (step S380). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control-side main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control side timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control side main process from being destroyed.

Subsequent to step S380, the value 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S382). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control side timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Set to 0 when no 75 ms has elapsed. Subsequent to step S382, the register is switched (returned) (step S384). This restoration is performed by reading the contents saved on the stack in step S380 and writing them to the register. Subsequent to step S384, interrupt permission is set (step S386), and this routine ends.
[13-3. Ball removal switch operation determination process]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination process will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 1732 shown in FIG. 119 is operated.

  When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the ball removal switch 1732 is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (step S390). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S390, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732. When there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 1732 is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 1732 has not been operated.

  When the ball removal switch 1732 is operated in step S390, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S392). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410, and is 1 when the game balls are discharged. The value is set to 0 when the ball is not discharged.

  Subsequent to step S392, the above-described ball removal determination time is set to be valid (step S294), and this routine is terminated. When the ball removal determination time becomes valid, the ball removal determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 1732 is not operated in step S390, this routine is finished as it is. The ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S392 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.
[13-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, a rotation angle switch history creation process is created. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 505 shown in FIG. 119 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creating process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 146 (step S400). The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and the detection signal history from the rotation angle switch 505 is provided as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. It is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM. In step S400, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S400, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 (step S402). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S402, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the input information, the detection notch 501 for grasping the rotation position of the sprocket 457 described above is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state. Is determined. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the input information, the detection notch 501 determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state in step S402, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S400 is the lowest bit B0. After shifting by one bit toward the upper bit B7, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 (step S404), and this routine is finished.

  On the other hand, when the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S402, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S400 is the least significant bit B0. After shifting from 1 to the most significant bit B7, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 (step S404), and this routine is terminated.

Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection notch 501 is generated. The value of the least significant bit B0 according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state or the detection notch 501 has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 505 can be created.
[13-5. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the sprocket 457 is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is also performed when the game ball payout by the prize ball unit 450 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the motor shaft of the dispensing motor 465 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S410). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is performed. The fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is 1 when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed (when skipping). When position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed), the value is set to 0.

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S410, that is, when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is performed, the rotation angle switch is detected from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. The history information RSW-HIST is read (step S412), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S414). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S414, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection notch 501 described above is the light of the rotation angle switch 505, continuously in four timer interruption cycles. It means that the shaft is in a state of transition from the shut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 119 rotates four steps. As described above, the rotation of the payout motor 465 is the rotation of the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500. Since the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 have play (backlash), even if the sprocket 457 is stopped at a fixed position, the rotating shaft described above is used. It will rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by the amount of backlash around 458.

  The rotation of the sprocket 457 due to the backlash corresponds to the rotation of about two steps of the payout motor 465 as described above. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is performed, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW in the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. -HIST is created, based on the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 due to the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. Yes. As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, since the payout motor 465 rotates four steps, it rotates more than the rotation of the sprocket 457 caused by backlash, and the rotation of the sprocket 457 caused by backlash can be absorbed. . Therefore, erroneous detection of the fixed position of the sprocket 457 due to backlash can be prevented, so that the rotational position of the sprocket 457 can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 465. In the present embodiment, the four timer interruption periods are 7 ms (= 1.75 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S414, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S412 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the fixed position determination skip flag A value 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S416). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 may not be performed (skip). The payout control MPU 1710a sets the rotational position of the sprocket 457 in step S416 to the fixed position of the sprocket 457.

  Subsequent to step S416, the skip determination time is set to be valid (step S418), and this routine is terminated. Here, the above-described detection notches 501 are three in the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 457, and are formed on the outer circumference of the detection disk 500 equally (every 120 degrees). Further, the rotation of the payout motor 465 becomes the rotation of the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 as described above. Therefore, the rotation between the detection notches 501 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 500 (sprocket 457) corresponds to the 18-step rotation of the payout motor 465.

  The payout control MPU 1710a manages the rotational position of the sprocket 457 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 465. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection notch 501 transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 from a shut-off state to a non-cut-off state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection notch 501 A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determined state”); It is managed in three states: a state transitioned to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 465, the fixed position fixed state of (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 465, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). This corresponds to 13-step rotation of the payout motor 465, and the rotation position between the detection notches 501 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 500, that is, the rotation position of the sprocket 457, is managed by a total of 18-step rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, and therefore the skip determination time rotates 13 steps of the payout motor 465. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (= 1.75 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S418, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 1710a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S410, that is, when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed, or in step S414, in step S412 If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the read rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, this routine is ended as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S416 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.

  As described above, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410, taken into the ball path unit 420, and guided to the prize ball unit 450. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. Therefore, the prize ball unit 450 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. As described above, the sensor board 504 of the prize ball unit 450 is provided with the rotation angle switch 505, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. In addition, the wiring (harness) that connects the prize ball unit terminal 717 of the payout control board 715 and the payout control board connector 480f of the prize ball unit 750 (the relay terminal board 480 in the prize ball unit) is also electrostatic discharge of the game ball. It is easily affected by noise.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection notch 501 blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In this state, the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is improved. Note that the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the sprocket 457 can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.
[13-6. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this sphere collision determination process, it is determined whether or not the above-described sphere collision state by the sprocket 457 occurs.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 obtains the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. Read (step S420).

  Following step S420, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 described above (step S422). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S422, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the input information, the detection notch 501 for grasping the rotation position of the sprocket 457 described above is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state. Is determined. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the input information, the detection notch 501 determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S422, a value 0 is set to the ball collision determination flag VAL-FLG (step S424). End the routine. This sphere collision determination flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sphere collision state is generated by the sprocket 457. The value is 1 when the sphere collision state occurs, and the value when the sphere collision state does not occur. Set to 0 respectively.

  In step S424, the detection notch 501 is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the sprocket 457 is rotating. A value of 0 is set in the determining flag VAL-FLG.

On the other hand, when the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has not changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S422, it is determined that a sphere stagnation state has occurred, and the sphere scrutiny determination flag VAL− A value of 1 is set in FLG (step S426), the ball sag determination time is set valid (step S428), and this routine is terminated. When the ball stagnation determination time becomes valid, the sphere stagnation determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. . Note that the ball staking determination flag VAL-FLG set in steps S424 and S426 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.
[13-7. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball prize ball number addition process is performed from the main control board 1700. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later, and the prize ball stock number adding process for renting is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit. . First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the above-mentioned prize ball unit 450, a setting is made so that the number of prize ball stocks for lending is added.
[13-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the award ball stock number addition process for a prize ball is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 149 (step S430). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S354 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S430, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area to determine whether the command is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is a prize ball command in step S430, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is read from the prize ball number information table (step S432). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S432, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S434). The award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not been paid out by the award ball unit 450, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 65535.

  The prize ball number PBV read in step S432 is added to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S434 (step S436), and this routine is terminated. After the addition in step S436, the prize ball command read in step S430 is erased from the received command information storage area.

On the other hand, if the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S430, this routine is ended as it is.
[13-7-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the processing for adding the number of prize balls for rent is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not there is a lending request signal as shown in FIG. 150 (step S440). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S440, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is a ball rental request signal in step S440, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S442), and the ball rental number RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S444), and this routine is terminated. To do. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S444, the rental request signal read in step S440 is erased from the input information storage area. In the present embodiment, priority is given to prize balls (the prize balls and the rental balls are managed separately). For this reason, even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held, and the ball is paid out when the prize ball is paid out. Accordingly, the rented ball is paid out after the prize ball stock PBS becomes zero.

On the other hand, when there is no lending request signal in step S440, this routine is ended as it is.
[13-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the player continues the game in a state where the game ball is filled in the full tank unit 520 described above during the game (stocked state).

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout built-in RAM (step S450) as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the threshold value is equal to or greater than a careful threshold value TH (step S452). The alert threshold value TH is set to a value of 50 in this embodiment.

  If the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S452, a value 1 is set to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S454). This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started to stock game balls in the full tank unit 520, and the number of game balls that have not been paid out (the number of prize balls described above) has reached the caution threshold TH or higher. This flag indicates that the value is 1 when the threshold value exceeds the alert threshold value TH, and is set to 0 when the threshold value is not greater than the alert threshold value TH.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S452, the value 0 is set in the caution flag CA-FLG (step S456), and this routine is terminated.

  If the gaming state is a big hit and the player relaxes and sees the effect unfolded on the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. 119, or the effect by moving the movable member of the loop unit 1570 described above, The player may inadvertently remove the game ball paid out as a prize ball for one round by operating the ball discharge button 30a from the storage tray 30 described above. When the game is continued in this state, the storage tray 30 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the full tank unit 520. When the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold TH, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. The door frame decoration lamp 5g shown in FIG. 119 blinks. By blinking the door frame decoration lamp 5g, for example, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player is careful about the game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that the game ball is to be removed from the storage tray 30, and the player continues the game with the storage ball 30 (full tank unit 520) full of game balls. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH1 is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.
[13-9. Dispensing ball removal judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball removal determination setting process, a game ball is paid out to the above-described storage tray 30 by the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 119, or the game is stored in the above-described prize ball tank 400 and tank rail member 410. This is a process for setting whether the ball is discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 or whether such a payout or discharge is not performed.

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the ball ball flag PBE-FLG is 1 as shown in FIG. 152 (step). S470). As will be described later in detail, the ball-in-battering flag PBE-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout motor 465 is performing a ball-bending operation, and is set to a value of 0 when the ball-bending operation is not being carried out. Is done.

  When it is determined in step S470 that the ball pitch flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the ball stroke operation is not performed, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout internal RAM (step S472). It is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock PBS is larger than 0 (step S474). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 465.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 in step S474, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the above-described full tank unit 520 is full of game balls (step S476). This determination is made on the basis of the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process in step S350 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S476, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls.

  If the full tank unit 520 is not full of game balls in step S476, a payout setting process described later is performed (step S478), and this routine is ended. Thereby, game balls are paid out to the storage tray 30.

  On the other hand, when the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls in step S476, this routine is ended as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the full tank unit 520 is full with game balls, the payout motor 465 is forcibly stopped. If a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 465 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 465 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, in step S470, when the ball pitch flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when a ball stroke operation is performed, or in step S474, the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0). That is, when there is no unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 (step S480). As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged. The determination in step S480 is made based on the determination result in step S390 in the ball removal switch operation determination process shown in FIG. That is, when an operation signal (detection signal) is input from the ball removal switch 1732 shown in FIG. 119, the value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S392 in the ball removal switch operation determination process.

  When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 in step S480, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged, a ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S482). This routine is terminated. Thereby, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged.

  In this way, when the ball removal switch 1732 is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S482 of the payout ball removal determination setting process, and the game stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 is stored. The ball can be discharged. When this discharge is completed, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 0 in step S480, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are not discharged, this routine is finished as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out or discharged.
[13-9-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 119 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout internal RAM as shown in FIG. 153 (step S490). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS.

  Subsequent to step S490, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S492). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S492, that is, when the number of game balls paid out by the payout motor 465 is zero, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set ( Step S494). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 465 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S494, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S496), and the real ball count PB is read (step S498). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 465. Although the detailed description will be given later, this count is output from the count switch 462 shown in FIG. 119 in the port input process in step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal.

  Subsequent to step S498, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S498 from the winning ball stock number PBS read in step S496 is set in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S500). The actual ball count PB is set to 0 (step S502), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S502, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S496 is set as it is to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S492, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465, an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set. (Step S504). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set and stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S504, it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination flag VAL-FLG is 0 (step S506). As described above, the sphere collision determination flag VAL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a sphere collision state has occurred due to the sprocket 457. The value is set to 0 when no data state has occurred.

  When the ball collision determination flag VAL-FLG is 0 in step S506, that is, when the ball collision state has not occurred, the drive command number DRV is decremented by 1 (decremented, step S508), and the count switch 462 It is determined whether there is a detection signal from (step S510). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 462 in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S510, the input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 462.

  If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 462 in step S510, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S512), and this routine is terminated. In step S512, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the counting switch 462 in step S510, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the sphere collision determination flag VAL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the sphere collision state has occurred, it is determined whether or not the sphere collision determination time has elapsed. (Step S514). This determination is made based on the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S514, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed. Note that the payout motor 465 performs a ball-balling operation during the ball-balloon determination time. This ball collapsing operation is performed in order to eliminate the ball collapsing state by the sprocket 457 of the prize ball unit 450 described above.

  When the ball collision determination time has not elapsed in step S514, an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set so as to perform the ball collision operation (step S516). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S516, a value of 1 is set in the sphere ball flag PBE-FLG (step S518), and this routine is terminated. This ball squeezing flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1 when the ball staking operation by the payout motor 465 is being performed (during sphere squeezing operation), and when the ball squeezing operation is not being performed (end of the ball staking operation). ) Set to each value 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S514, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set so as to end the ball collision operation (step S520). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 465 and stored in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S520, the value “0” is set in the ball-pushing flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-pushing operation (step S522), and this routine is finished.
[13-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In the ball removal setting process, the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 119 is driven to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 described above.

  When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 154 (step S530). This determination is made based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S530, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the payout motor 465 performs a ball removal operation. This ball removal operation is performed to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410.

  When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S530, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set to perform the ball removal operation (step S532). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S532, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to 1 (step S534), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S530, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S536), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 465 and stored in the output information storage area.
[14. Various commands related to payout]
Next, various commands related to payout will be described. First, the payout command (prize ball command) transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 119 will be described, and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 sent from the payout control board 715 to the main control board 1700. A state command, and a shaped state command obtained by shaping the state command will be described. FIG. 155 is a prize ball number information table showing an example of a command related to payout, FIG. 156 is a table showing an example of a status command, and FIG. 157 is a table showing an example of a shaping status command obtained by shaping the status command.
[14-1. Prize ball command]
The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the payout control board 715. As in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected to the CR unit (communication with the pachinko gaming machine and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine (prize ball unit) is driven to store Is connected to a payout device (referred to as “CR machine”)), as shown in FIG. 155 (a), a prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the payout control board 715. Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared, one award ball is designated by the command 10H, two award balls are designated by the command 11H,... In the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 715 controls to pay out game balls by driving the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 119 for the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a ball rental machine (not shown) (an apparatus for directly paying out game balls as a ball rental to a storage tray (referred to as a “general machine”)) adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. As shown in b), commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the general machine. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, and prize balls are designated by the command 21H. Two are designated, and ... 15 prize balls are designated in the command 2EH. The general machine performs control for paying out game balls for the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 155 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 715 confirms the connection state with the CR unit.
[14-2. Status command]
The status command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and is a command transmitted from the payout control board 715 to the main control board 1700. As shown in FIG. 156, the status command is divided into a frame status 1, an error cancellation navigation, and a frame status 2. The priority order is set in the order of the frame status 1, the error cancellation navigation, and the frame status 2. Yes.

  In the frame state 1, a broken ball, full tank, 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR unconnected are prepared, and when the ball is broken, the value is 0 (B 0, “B” represents a bit). 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1 when full, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1 in more than 50 stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1 when connection is abnormal Is set, bit 1 (B4) is set to the value 1 when the CR is not connected. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the frame status is 1 are set to a value of 1 for B5, a value of 0 for B6, and a value of 0 for B7.

  In the error canceling navigation, a ball seeing, a count switch error and a retry upper limit error are prepared. In the ball seeing, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in a count switch error, a value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) in the retry upper limit error. Here, the “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 462 shown in FIG. 119 has occurred. The “retry upper limit error” indicates that a payout that is not consistent is repeatedly performed. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the error cancellation navigation is performed are set to a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and a value 0 for B7.

In the frame state 2, a ball removal is prepared, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) indicating that the frame status is 2 are set to a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and a value 0 for B7.
[14-3. Formatting state command]
The main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 119 transmits various commands to the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). Of these 2 bytes, the storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) is used as a status indicating the type of command, and the remaining 1 byte. A storage capacity of (8 bits) is used as a mode indicating a variation of production.

When the main control MPU 1700a receives the above-described state command from the payout control board 715, as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU 1700a sets the additional information “10000001B (= 81H)” to the status and sets the received state command to the mode. It is set and shaped into a shaping state command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). This shaping state command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 1740 as one process of the sub-integrated board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Note that the detailed description of the shaping state command is the same as the contents of the state command described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.
[15. Various control processing of sub-integrated board]
Next, various processes of the sub integrated board 1740 (sub integrated MPU 1740a) that receives various commands from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) shown in FIG. 119 will be described. First, sub-integration side power-on processing will be described, followed by sub-integration-side timer interrupt processing, sub-integration-side command reception interruption processing, sub-integration-side command reception end interruption processing, stock notification processing, and ball removal notification processing. . FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side power-on process, FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side timer interrupt process, and FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side command reception interrupt process. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side command reception end interrupt process, FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of the liquid crystal serial command control process, and FIG. 163 shows an example of the transmission buffer empty interrupt process. 164 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a DSP-ACK signal interrupt process, FIG. 165 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a stock notification process, and FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball removal notification process. The liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S766 in a sub-integration side timer interrupt described later, and the stock notification process and the ball removal notification process are a payout state determination process in step S728 in a sub-integration side power-on process described later. As one process. Also, priority is set in the order of sub integration side command reception interrupt processing, sub integration side command reception end interrupt processing, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing, transmission buffer empty interrupt processing, sub integration side timer interrupt processing, and 16 ms steady processing. Has been.
[15-1. Sub-integration side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 performs a sub-integration-side power-on process as shown in FIG. When the sub integration-side power-on processing is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a performs initial setting processing (step S700). In this initial setting process, the process of initializing the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230 shown in FIG. The initial data composed of the data for generating the pattern to be generated and the data for generating the pattern for turning on the gradation lamp 1240 is transmitted to the gradation control IC 1760b at one time. In this initial setting process, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a first performs a process of initializing itself, thereby outputting various commands related to control of game effects and various conditions related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 output from the main control board 1700. The command can be received, and interrupt permission is set. The time required to initialize the sub integrated MPU 1740a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the sub integrated MPU 1740a can be initialized in a very short time.

  Subsequent to step S700, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a value 1 (step S702). This 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a flag for counting 16 ms in the sub integration side timer interrupt processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, a value 0 is set in the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S704), and a value 1 is set in the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG. Set (step S706). The 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when starting 16 ms steady processing, which will be described later, and a value of 0 when ending.

  Subsequent to step S706, the measurement of the processing time measurement timer PCT is started, and 16 ms steady processing is started (step S708). This processing time measurement timer PCT measures the processing time of 16 ms steady processing.

  Subsequent to step S708, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) (turned ON, step S710). This external WDT monitors the operation (system) of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and resets the sub-integrated MPU 1740a when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time (the system of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is not running out of control). Or make regular diagnoses). Note that the sub-integrated MPU 1740a has a built-in WDT, and in step S710, the external WDT clear signal is turned ON, and the built-in WDT is cleared. As described above, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a diagnoses whether the system of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is running out of control by using the built-in WDT and the external WDT together.

  Subsequent to step S710, it is determined whether or not the test mode flag TM-FLG has a value of 0 (step S712). This test mode flag TM-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) in a command analysis process to be described later is a test command. Set to 0 when not a test command. In step S712, the process is performed based on a command analyzed by a command analysis process described later 16 ms before.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is not a test command, the gradation control of the lamp driving board 1760 shown in FIG. A value 0 is set (cleared) in the transmission counter to the IC 1760b (step S714). This transmission counter is composed of a write counter and a read counter. The write counter counts the number of times data to be transmitted is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter counts the number of times the data is read from the transmission buffer. is there. When the value 0 is set in the transmission counter, the values of the write counter and the read counter become the value 0.

  Subsequent to step S714, an effect selection switch input process is performed (step S716). In this effect selection switch input process, it is determined whether or not an effect selection signal is input from the effect selection switch 31 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S716, a command to the gradation control IC 1760b is set as transmission data, and transmission to the lamp driving substrate 1760 is started (step S718). When transmission is started, the write counter is incremented every time transmission data is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter is incremented every time transmission data written to the transmission buffer is transmitted. Here, in step S718, the sub-integrated board 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 has the door frame side lighting / flashing command described above based on the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) in the command analysis processing described later. When the game board side lighting / flashing command and the gradation lighting command are transmitted to the lamp driving board 1760, the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760 performs the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting. The command is received and stored in a command register (not shown) in the gradation update control unit 1760bc of the gradation control IC 1760b. As described above, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command are the number of the terminal in which the input / output terminal group 1760bm is set as the output terminal, the number of the terminal of the output terminal group 1760bp, Any gradation number from 0 gradation to 31 gradation, any waveform table number from waveform table 0 to waveform table 2, waveform transition time which is time until transition to next waveform, waveform counter Initial value (any waveform number from 0 to 89 waveforms), waveform counter maximum value (any waveform number from 0 to 89 waveforms), any of ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 The ON time setting table number and the like. The gradation control IC 1760b is an output terminal of the input / output terminal group 1760bm based on the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command stored in a command register (not shown) of the gradation update control unit 1760bc. The lighting signal, the blinking signal, and the gradation lighting signal are output from the terminal set to “1” or the terminal of the output terminal group 1760 bp. In step S718, the process is performed based on a command analyzed by a command analysis process described later 16 ms before.

  Following step S718, the sound source IC 1740c shown in FIG. 119 is initialized (step S720). In the initialization of the sound source IC 1740c, an analog amount of a volume knob (not shown) is detected, and the master volume value of the sound source IC 1740c is set so that a sound volume corresponding to the analog amount flows from the speaker 31 shown in FIG.

  Following step S720, it is determined whether a DSP-RUN signal is input (step S722). The DSP-RUN signal is a signal that is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750 shown in FIG. 119 and indicates that the liquid crystal control board 1750 is operating normally. The reading of the DSP-RUN signal is performed in a sub-integration side timer interrupt process described later, and the determination in step S722 is performed based on the DSP-RUN signal read in the sub-integration side timer interrupt process.

  When the DSP-RUN signal is input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control board 1750 is operating normally, the RAM-CLR signal is output to the liquid crystal control board 1750 (ON, step S724). This RAM-CLR signal is a signal for forcibly resetting the liquid crystal control board 1750, and is turned on when not resetting and turned off when resetting.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-RUN signal is not input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control board 1750 is not operating normally, or following step S724, command analysis processing is performed (step S726). In this command analysis process, various commands from the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 119 are received in a sub-integration side command reception interrupt process and a sub-integration side command reception end interrupt process, which will be described later. Perform analysis. It should be noted that the received command is a type of the command according to the game information created in the start winning command, the special 1 hold number designation command, the special 2 hold number designation command, or the power-on command creation process (step S38). If the command includes information and the RAM clear notification command created in the RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S44), these commands are displayed as display commands in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S726, a payout state determination process is performed (step S728). In this payout state determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 is the shaping state command shown in FIG. 157. Various notification processes are performed based on the command.

  Subsequent to step S728, effect selection switch main processing is performed (step S730). In this effect selection switch main process, various processes relating to effects are performed based on the determination result of the effect selection switch input process in step S716 (the determination result of whether or not the effect selection signal from the effect selection switch 31 is input).

  Following step S730, scheduler main processing is performed (step S732). In the scheduler main process, data related to the sound source IC 1740c, the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760, the motor of the loop unit 1570, etc. shown in FIG. 119 are updated (the pointer is updated).

  Subsequent to step S732, symbol main processing is performed (step S734). In this symbol main process, a display command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 is prepared. This display command indicates a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 as described above. In the symbol main process, the display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM. This "sub-integration side transmission ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is a test command, test command acquisition processing is performed. (Step S736). In this test command acquisition process, a test command for performing various inspections of the sound source IC 1740c, the liquid crystal control board 1750, and the lamp driving board 1760 is prepared based on the test command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726.

  Subsequent to step S736, a test process is performed (step S738). In this test process, the test command prepared in the test command acquisition process of step S36 is transmitted to the sound source IC 1740c, the liquid crystal control board 1750, and the lamp driving board 1760.

  Subsequent to step S734 or step S738, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT is stopped (turned OFF, step S740). This clears the external WDT and prevents the sub-integrated MPU 1740a from being reset. The external WDT starts measuring the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped. Note that the sub-integrated MPU 1740a clears the built-in WDT only in step S710, and clears the built-in WDT every time the 16 ms steady process starts, that is, every 16 ms. Thus, if the built-in WDT is not cleared every 16 ms, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is reset.

  Subsequent to step S740, the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 0 (end of 16 ms steady processing) (step S742), and the process returns to step S702 again.

  On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step 702, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 is completed. Determination is made (step S744). This determination is performed based on the transmission counter described above, and whether or not the value of the write counter that counts the number of times of writing to the transmission buffer matches the value of the read counter that counts the number of times of reading from the transmission buffer Do by. When the transmission is completed, the value of the write counter matches the value of the read counter.

  When transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 is completed in step S744, a processing time measurement timer PCT is acquired (step S746). As described above, the processing time measurement timer PCT measures the processing time of the 16 ms steady process. In step S746, the processing time taken from step S708 to step S746 is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S746, transmission data to the gradation control IC 1760b is set and transmission to the lamp driving substrate 1760 is started (step S748). When transmission is started, as described above, the write counter is counted up every time transmission data is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter is counted up every time transmission data written to the transmission buffer is transmitted. Here, in step S748, a remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time acquired in step S746 from 16 ms is calculated, and data that can be transmitted in the remaining time of 16 ms is extracted from the same initial data as the initial data transmitted in step S700. Therefore, the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be is not abnormal data due to the influence of noise. Yes. As described above, the size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is 3072 bits, and the size of data stored in the waveform table register group 1760be is 1350 bits. The size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be is 4422 bits. Since the bit rate from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the lamp driving board 1760 is set to 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs) as described above, the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be The transmission time of the stored data is 17.688 ms (= 4422 bits × 4 μs), and all the initial data cannot be overwritten in the 16 ms steady process. Therefore, in the present embodiment, data that can be transmitted in the remaining time of 16 ms from the same initial data as the initial data transmitted in step S700 is transmitted as transmission data to the gradation control IC 1760b, and the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and waveform The initial data stored in the table register group 1760be is overwritten little by little using the remaining time of 16 ms. As a result, the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be are repeatedly overwritten little by little within the remaining time of 16 ms. In step S748, when calculating the remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time acquired in step S746 from 16ms, sub integration side timer interrupt processing, sub integration side command reception interrupt processing, and sub integration side command reception end, which will be described later, are performed. The number of occurrences of various interrupt processes such as interrupt processes, that is, the time required for various interrupt processes is taken into consideration, and the remaining time of 16 ms is the time obtained by subtracting the process time acquired in step S746 and the time required for various interrupts from 16 ms. It has become.

  Subsequent to step S748, the process returns to step S702 again, and it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a value of 1.

  On the other hand, when transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 is not completed in step S744, the process returns to step S702 again.

Returning to step S702, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1. When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed flag in step S704. A value of 0 is set in ST-FLG, a value of 1 is set in 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG in step S706, a 16 ms steady processing in steps S708 to S740 is performed, and a 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S742. The value 0 is set and the process returns to step S702 again. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, it is determined in step S744 whether or not the transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 has been completed. Is completed in step S746, the remaining time is calculated in step S748, data that can be transmitted in this remaining time is reset, and transmission to the lamp driving board 1760 is started. On the other hand, when transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 is not completed in step S744, the process returns to step S702 again.
[15-2. Sub-integration timer interrupt processing]
Next, sub integration side timer interrupt processing will be described. When this sub integration side timer interrupt process is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a of the sub integration board 1740 determines whether or not the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 159 (step S760). ). As described above, the test mode flag TM-FLG indicates that the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) in the command analysis process in step S726 in the sub-integration-side power-on process shown in FIG. This flag is set to 1 when the command is a test command, and 0 when it is not a test command.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S760, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is not a test command, motor 2 ms timer interrupt processing is performed (step S762). In this motor 2 ms timer interruption process, based on the data (driving pattern) set in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the sub integration side power-on process shown in FIG. 158, the loop unit 1570 shown in FIG. Control is performed to output a drive signal to a motor or the like.

  Subsequent to step S762, switch input processing is performed (step S764). In this switch input process, it is determined whether or not the above-described original position detection signals of the movable member of the loop unit 1570 are input from the loop unit 1570 via the lamp driving board 1760, and these original position detection signals are included in these original position detection signals. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the movable member of the loop unit 1570 is in the original position.

  Subsequent to step S764, liquid crystal serial command control processing is performed (step S766). In this liquid crystal serial command control process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the display command indicating the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 shown in FIG. As described above, this display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM, and the sub integration MPU 1740a extracts the display command from the sub integration side transmission ring buffer and performs liquid crystal control. Transmit to substrate 1750.

  The display command is transmitted from a serial input / output port different from the initial data transmitted to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 described above. This transmission counter is composed of a write counter and a read counter. The write counter counts the number of times data to be transmitted is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter counts the number of times the data is read from the transmission buffer. is there. When the transmission is completed, the value of the write counter matches the value of the read counter. Note that when the value 0 is set in the transmission counter, the values of the write counter and the read counter become the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step 760, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is a test command, or following step S766, The value 1 is added to the 2 ms update counter C (step S768). The 2 ms update counter C is a counter that counts the number of times that the sub integration side timer interrupt processing has been performed, and a value 1 of the 2 ms update counter C corresponds to a time of 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S768, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter C has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter C × 2 ms) (step S770). If 16 ms in step S770, the value 1 is set in the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S772), and the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, in the sub integration side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the 16 ms steady process in steps S708 to S740 is being performed (step S774).

  When the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S774, that is, when the 16 ms steady processing is not performed, the work area is backed up (step S776), and this routine ends. In this work area backup, the information processed in the 16 ms steady process of steps S708 to S740 in the sub integration side power-on process shown in FIG. 158 is copied to the copy area on the work area provided in the sub integration built-in RAM To do.

On the other hand, if 16 ms has not elapsed in step S770, or if no information is set during the 16 ms steady process in step S774, this routine is terminated as it is.
[15-3. Sub-integration side command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the sub integration side command reception interrupt process will be described. When this sub integration side command reception interrupt process is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a of the sub integration board 1740 starts receiving a command from the main control board 1700 (hereinafter referred to as "WR signal") as shown in FIG. And a signal for selecting various boards from the main control board 1700 (hereinafter referred to as “SEL signal”) are determined to be 1 (step S780). The main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 first sets the SEL signal corresponding to the sub-integrated board 1740 to the value 1 and the WR signal to the value 1, and transmits a command to the sub-integrated board 1740.

  This command is composed of 4 nibbles per packet. This “nibble” means 4 bits, which is 8 bits (1 byte) in 2 nibbles, that is, 16 bits (2 bytes) in 4 nibbles. In the extraction of 1 nibble data, the WR signal rises from the value 0 to the value 1 (referred to as “up edge”) and is held for a predetermined time (for example, 20 microseconds (μs) to 50 μs). This is performed by falling from the value 1 to the value 0 (referred to as “down edge”).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S780, that is, when the main control MPU 1700a transmits a command to the sub-integrated board 1740, command reception processing is performed (step S782), and this routine is ended. In this command reception process, the received 1 nibble command (one of the four divided commands) is stored in the sub integration side reception ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM. This "sub-integration side reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. The data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember.

  After storing in the sub-integration side ring buffer, the buffer write counter is incremented by “1”. This buffer write counter increments by one each time a command reception process is performed. Therefore, when 1 packet (4 nibbles) is stored, the buffer write counter has a value of 4.

On the other hand, when both the SEL signal and the WR signal are 0 in step S780, that is, when the main control MPU 1700a does not transmit a command to the sub-integrated board 1740, this routine is ended as it is. Note that when transmitting a command from the main control board 1700 to the sub integrated board 1740, as described above, a predetermined time (for example, 20 μs to 50 μs) from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal, the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 Bit) is held constant, but the signal may be disturbed due to noise and the command may not be received normally. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this noise, when the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) (first time), after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 1 μs), the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4) again. Bit). Then, it is determined whether or not it matches the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time. If it matches the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time, it is determined in step S780 whether the WR signal and the SEL signal are both 1 or not. On the other hand, when it does not match the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time, the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) are received again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and received at the first time. The determination is repeated until it matches the selected SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits).
[15-4. Sub-integration side command reception end interrupt processing]
Next, sub integration side command reception end interrupt processing will be described. When the sub integration side command reception end interrupt process is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a of the sub integration board 1740 determines whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 as shown in FIG. Step S790). When the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 completes the transmission of the command to the sub-integrated board 1740, the main control board 1700a sets the WR signal to the value 0 and then sets the SEL signal to the value 0 (down edge).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 1700a completes command transmission to the sub-integrated board 1740, command reception end processing is performed (step S792), and this routine is ended. . In this command reception end process, a value 0 is set in the buffer write counter added in the sub integration side command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. When the command is normally received, the buffer write counter has a value of 4 because one packet is 4 nibbles. Further, when reception of one packet cannot be performed, that is, when the buffer write counter is less than 4, the received command is discarded.

On the other hand, when both the WR signal and the SEL signal are not 0 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 1700a has not completed transmission of the command to the sub-integrated board 1740, this routine is finished as it is. As described above, as a noise countermeasure, when the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the SEL signal (first time), the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 1 μs), and the first received SEL signal It is determined whether or not they match. If it matches the SEL signal received for the first time, it is determined in step S790 whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are zero. On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the SEL signal received for the first time, the SEL signal is received again after a predetermined time, and the determination is repeated until it coincides with the SEL signal received for the first time.
[15-5. LCD serial command control processing]
Next, the liquid crystal serial command control process will be described. In this liquid crystal serial command control process, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 134 is output from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  When the liquid crystal serial command control process is started, the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 determines whether there is a display command as shown in FIG. 162 (step S800). As described above, this display command indicates a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, and is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM. In step S800, it is determined whether or not a display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer.

  When there is a display command in step S800, that is, when a display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer, it is determined whether or not the transmission flag TX-FLG is 1 (step S802). This transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a display command is being transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and is 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. When the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, the value is set to 0.

  When the transmission flag TX-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S802, that is, when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is empty (step S804). . This determination determines whether or not the transmission buffer is empty based on the status indicating the state of the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port that transmits the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  If the transmission buffer is empty in step S804, a sum value is calculated (step S806). This sum value is determined based on the display command stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer. Here, the display command is composed of one or more basic commands composed of a status having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). ing. The status indicates the type of command, while the mode indicates a variation of the production. The basic command is assigned a status as the first byte and a mode as the second byte. As a base command, for example, in addition to the shaping state command transmitted from the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. And a game state information command indicating. In step S806, the information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command and the information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value) is calculated. . Then, a base command for transmission is created by adding the calculated sum value to the base command, that is, expanding and assigning the third byte of the base command. In other words, the base command status for transmission is assigned the status of the base command as the first byte, the mode of the base command is assigned as the second byte, and the status of the base command and the mode of the base command are regarded as numerical values as the third byte. A sum value is calculated to calculate the sum. As described above, the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes and is handled as a packet composed of 3 bytes.

  Subsequent to step S806, the first byte is set in the transmission buffer (step S808). Here, by setting the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, status information is transmitted bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. Thereby, transmission of the display command as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is started.

  Subsequent to step S808, the value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC (step S810). The transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the transmission base command are set in the transmission buffer. When the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the transmission counter TXC has a value of 1. When the second byte is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3. The transmission counter TXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S810, a DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set (step S812). This DSP-ACK signal waiting time sets a period during which the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 134 can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750. In this embodiment, an asynchronous serial is adopted as a transmission method from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER format is 8-bit communication, LSB First, even parity added, 1 stop bit. As a result, since the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes (24 bits) as described above, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time including the processing time is 1.6 milliseconds (ms ) Is set. Here, as described above, the DSP-ACK signal is a signal indicating that the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 has received the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER. When the display command started to transmit is received within the DSP-ACK signal waiting time, a DSP-ACK signal notifying that is output to the sub-integrated board 1740 (sub-integrated MPU 1740a).

  Subsequent to step S812, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, a value 1 is set to the transmission flag TX-FLG (step S814), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the transmission flag TX-FLG is 1 in step S802, that is, when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, it is determined whether the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out (step S816). .

  When the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal exceeds the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, the display command stored in the sub integration side ring buffer is configured. In order to retransmit the base command, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is empty in step S804, and when the transmission buffer is empty, information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command in step S806 and , The information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command is regarded as a numerical value and the total (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value is extended and allocated as the third byte of the base command. Create a sending command. In step S810, it is determined that the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set in step S812, and the DSP-ACK signal is liquid crystal controlled. A period input from the substrate 1750 is set, and in step S814, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, and this routine is terminated. In the present embodiment, the number of retransmissions is set to 4 times, and the same transmission base command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 up to 5 times.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has not timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal is within the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, two bytes of the base command for transmission created in step S806. Since the mode allocated as the eye and the sum value allocated as the third byte are transmitted in order, this routine is terminated. The mode and the sum value will be described in detail later when the transmission buffer becomes empty, but an interrupt occurs when this occurs. Each bit is transmitted from the port to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  On the other hand, when there is no display command in step S800, that is, when no display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer, there is no display command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750, so this routine is ended as it is, and step S804 is completed. When the transmission buffer is not empty, the routine is terminated as it is to wait for the transmission buffer to become empty.

  As described above, the liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S766 in the sub integration side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. That is, it is repeated every 2 ms. When the sub integrated MPU 1740a creates a transmission base command in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process and sets the first byte in the transmission buffer, the sub integrated MPU 1740a starts transmission bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750, In step S812, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set, and in step S814, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. As a result, even if the liquid crystal serial command control processing is started after the elapse of 2 ms, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG on the assumption that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Unless the time is up, that is, within the period when the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, the second and third bytes following the first byte of the transmission base command are not set in the transmission buffer. It is like that. When the transmission of the first byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer is emptied, the second byte of the base command for transmission is interrupted. Then, transmission is started bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission of the second byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer is emptied, the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer in this interrupt processing, and the serial input / output port Transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750 is started bit by bit. As described above, in the liquid crystal serial command control process, when the transmission base command is created in step S806 and the first byte is set in the transmission buffer, the second and third bytes of the transmission base command are transmitted. It comes to be separated. As a result, the load of the sub integration side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 159 performed every 2 ms is reduced.

In the case where the display command is composed of a plurality of base commands, when the liquid crystal control board 1750 receives all of the base commands, the liquid crystal control board 1750 controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display 1315. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board may transmit a base command bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750 and transmit the sum value after completing the transmission of all the base commands. it can. This sum value is a value obtained by regarding the transmitted base command as a numerical value and calculating the sum. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 receives all the base commands and the sum value, then regards the received base commands as numerical values, calculates a sum value, and calculates the sum value, By determining whether or not the received sum value matches, it is possible to confirm whether or not all received base commands, that is, display commands are correctly transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750. . If they do not match, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a retransmits the same display command to the liquid crystal control board 1750. However, after all the base commands have been transmitted, the sum value is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a determines whether the display command is correctly transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750 by the above-described determination based on the sum value. For example, when the display command is large, that is, when the number of base commands is large, one of the base commands is used as a harness for electrically connecting the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750 between the boards. If it happens to change due to the influence of the intruding noise, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a determines that the display command is correctly determined by the above-described determination based on the sum value even though other base commands are correctly transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750. Not transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750 It will be determined as the sub-integration MPU1740a becomes possible to retransmit the same display command to the liquid crystal control circuit board 1750. Then, it is impossible to maintain the synchronism between the uppermost main control board 1700 and the lowermost liquid crystal control board 1750 by spending unnecessary transmission time between the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a sum value is calculated based on the base command, the calculated sum value is added to the base command to create a base command for transmission, and the generated base command for transmission is used as the liquid crystal control board 1750. Is sending to. As a result, even if the transmission base command happens to change due to the influence of noise that has entered the harness that electrically connects between the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a remains the same. By retransmitting the base command for transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750, it is not necessary to retransmit all the base commands constituting the display command to the liquid crystal control board 1750, and useless transmission time is not consumed. Therefore, by adopting a method of creating a transmission base command for each base command and transmitting it to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the synchronism between the main control board 1700 which is the highest level and the liquid crystal control board 1750 which is the lowest level is achieved. Can be maintained.
[15-6. Transmit buffer empty interrupt processing]
Next, the transmission buffer empty interrupt process will be described. This transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started when the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port built in the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 becomes empty.

  When the transmission buffer empty interrupt process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 determines whether or not the transmission counter TXC is a value 3 as shown in FIG. 163 (step S820). As described above, the transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the base command for transmission are set in the transmission buffer. When the first byte of the base command for transmission is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 When the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3.

  When the transmission counter TXC is not 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is not set in the transmission buffer, the next byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer (step S822), The value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC (increment, step S824), and this routine is finished.

  On the other hand, when the transmission counter TXC is 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, this routine is terminated as it is.

Specifically, in step S808 in the liquid crystal serial command transmission control process shown in FIG. 162, as described above, the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer. The byte is output bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started. In step S822, the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and it is determined that the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer. In step S824, the value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC, The counter value is set to 2 and the routine is terminated. The second byte of the base command for transmission set in the transmission buffer is output bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started again. . In step S822, the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and it is determined that the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer. In step S824, the value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC. The counter value is set to 3 and this routine is terminated. The third byte of the base command for transmission set in the transmission buffer is output bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started again. . In this case, since the transmission counter TXC has already reached the value 3, this routine is terminated as it is in step S820. In this way, the liquid crystal serial command transmission control processing shown in FIG. 162 sets only the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, and the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing performs the second and third bytes of the transmission base command. It is set in the transmission buffer.
[15-7. DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing]
Next, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing will be described. This DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing is started when the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 134 is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750 to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740.

  When the DSP-ACK signal interrupt process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 sets a value 0 to the transmission flag TX-FLG (step S830), and this routine is ended. The transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER as described above, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Is set to 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted.

When the DSP-ACK signal is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a determines that the liquid crystal control board 1750 has received the transmission base command created based on the base command that constitutes the display command, in step S830. A value 0 is set in the transmitting flag TX-FLG. Note that the sub-integrated MPU 1740a sets the transmission flag TX-FLG to 0 in step S830, and sets the next command constituting the display command stored in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub-integrated built-in RAM. If there is a command, the pointer is advanced to the address where the next command is stored so that the next command can be extracted.
[15-8. Stock notification processing]
Next, the stock notification process will be described. When the stock notification process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 determines whether there are 50 or more stocks as shown in FIG. 165 (step S840). This determination is performed on the basis of the analyzed command by analyzing various commands from the transmission information transmitted from the main control board 1700 in the command analysis processing in step S726 in the sub-integration side power-on processing shown in FIG. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the analyzed command is a shaping state command indicating the frame state 1 (status: 81H, mode: B7, B6 = value 0, B5 = value 1), and the frame state 1 is indicated. If it is a shaping state command, it is determined whether or not the value 1 is set in the bit B2 of the mode shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S840 that there are not more than 50 stocks, that is, if the value 1 is not set in the bit B2 of the state command indicating the frame state 1 (the value 0 is set), this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there are 50 or more stocks in step S840, that is, when the value 1 is set in the bit B2 of the status command indicating the frame status 1, for example, pay attention to the player's game to the hall clerk. In order to convey the effect, blinking control of the door frame decoration lamp 5g shown in FIG. 119 is performed as a notice effect (step S842), and this routine is ended. This blinking control is performed by transmitting the door frame side lighting blinking command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760, and when the gradation control IC 1760b receives the door frame side lighting blinking command, the door frame decoration lamp is transmitted. A blinking signal is output to 5g. When the stock status becomes less than 50, a status command is output from the payout control board 715 to the sub integrated board 1740 via the main control board 1700. Based on the analyzed status command (determines whether or not the value B is set to 0 in the status command), the sub-integrated board 1740 sends a door frame side lighting / flashing command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760. Stop sending Thereby, the gradation control IC 1760b stops outputting the blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamp 5g.

Here, as described above, when the game state is a big hit, if the player is inadvertently about 50, the player must not operate the ball discharge button 30a from the storage tray 30 to remove the game ball. There is. As described above, if the game balls are not pulled out, the number of unpaid balls (the above-mentioned prize ball stock number PBS) increases, and a caution effect is performed. Then, for example, if the game state is a big hit, if it is inadvertently, a cautionary effect will be performed, and there is a possibility that the player may feel frustrated despite being in a relaxed state of a big hit is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame decoration lamp 5g is kept blinking in order to notify the store clerk that there are 50 or more stocks as a warning effect.
[15-9. Ball removal notification process]
Next, the ball removal notification process will be described. When the ball removal notification process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 determines whether or not the ball is being removed as shown in FIG. 166 (step S850). This determination is performed on the basis of the analyzed command by analyzing various commands from the transmission information transmitted from the main control board 1700 in the command analysis processing in step S726 in the sub-integration side power-on processing shown in FIG. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the analyzed command is a shaping state command indicating the frame state 2 (status: 81H, mode: B7 = value 0, B6, B5 = value 1), and the frame state 2 is indicated. When there is a shaping state command, it is determined whether or not a value 1 is set in bit B0 of the mode shown in FIG.

When the ball is not being removed in step S850, that is, when the value 1 is not set to the bit B0 of the state command indicating the frame state 2 (the value 0 is set), this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the ball is being removed in step S850, that is, when the value 1 is set in the bit B0 of the state command indicating the frame state 2, the blinking control of the door frame decoration lamps 5g and 5h shown in FIG. 119 is performed. (Step S852), this routine is finished. This blinking control is performed by transmitting the door frame side lighting blinking command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760, and when the gradation control IC 1760b receives the door frame side lighting blinking command, the door frame decoration lamp is transmitted. A blinking signal is output at 5g and 5h. When the ball removal is completed, a status command is output from the payout control board 715 to the sub integrated board 1740 via the main control board 1700. Based on the analyzed status command (determines whether or not the value B0 of the status command is set to 0), the sub-integrated board 1740 sends a door frame side lighting / flashing command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760. Stop sending Thereby, the gradation control IC 1760b stops the output of the blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamps 5g and 5h.
[16. Various control processing of LCD control board]
Next, various processes of the liquid crystal control board 1750 shown in FIG. 119 for receiving a display command from the sub integrated board 1740 (sub integrated MPU 1740a) will be described. First, the liquid crystal control side power-on process will be described, and then the DMAFLAG interrupt process and the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing on the liquid crystal control side, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of DMAFLAG interrupt processing, FIG. 169 is a timing chart showing generation of drawing data, and FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a control-side command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 171 is a timing chart illustrating transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data. The priority order is set in the order of the sub integration side command reception interrupt processing and the DMAFLAG interrupt processing.
[16-1. LCD control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 performs a liquid crystal control side power-on process as shown in FIG. When the liquid crystal control side power-on process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a boot process (step S1000). In this boot processing, various programs stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 119 are copied to the liquid crystal built-in RAM. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a reads out various programs from the liquid crystal built-in RAM as necessary. In the present embodiment, the schedule data described above is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b without being copied due to the limitation of the capacity of the liquid crystal built-in RAM. Also good.

  Subsequent to step S1000, SIO initial setting processing is performed (step S1002). In this SIO initial setting process, serial input / output built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is initialized, and a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 from the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. Sets permission for command interrupt processing received as data DSP-SER. As a result, when the serial input / output reception buffer built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives the display command, it informs the CPU core which is the central processing unit built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a that the interrupt has been received.

  Subsequent to step S1002, transfer IC initial setting processing is performed (step S1002). In this transfer IC initial setting process, the access conditions and the like in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1004, sprite data resident area transfer start processing is performed (step S1006). In this sprite data resident area transfer start process, various setting values such as a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are written and set in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m shown in FIG. Is output to the transfer IC 1750m. When this sprite data transfer start signal is input, the transfer IC 1750m starts to transfer the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z based on various setting values written in the register group 1750ma. When the sprite data resident area transfer start processing is performed, the transfer IC 1750m is stored in the character ROM 1750d based on various setting values written to the register group 1750ma without being controlled by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Transfer of the existing sprite data to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z. Specifically, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a first writes and sets various setting values such as a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m to notify that the power supply is being restored. The sprite data transfer start signal is output to the transfer IC 1750m. The transfer IC 1750m transfers and copies the sprite data with the characters “currently restoring power” to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z. As a result, in the DMAFLAG interrupt processing described later, the VDP 1750c extracts the “power is being restored” sprite data (including information to be drawn at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display 1315) from the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z. Then, the extracted sprite data is developed into a bitmap on the canvas CV which is a virtual screen to generate drawing data. Thereafter, when this liquid crystal power-on process is started on the liquid crystal display 1315, the characters “power is being restored” are first drawn. While the characters “power is being restored” are being drawn, sprite data for unexpected drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315 such as background sprite data and sprite data such as “big hit” characters. Are continuously transferred to the resident area 1750za. In this embodiment, since the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is extremely large, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred from the start to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z until the transfer is completed. It takes 10 seconds (s).

  Subsequent to step S1006, port setting processing is performed (step S1008). In this port setting process, various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a are set. Specifically, the input / output direction of various input / output ports is set.

  Subsequent to step S1008, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1010). In this VDP initial setting process, the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. 134 is initialized. Specifically, among the drawing condition setting data, data related to the environment setting of VDP 1750c is written into the VDP register 1750cb of VDP 1750c. As described above, the drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) that is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area), and displaying it on the screen. Data for setting a composite screen by arranging grouped sprites in layers, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the above-described line buffer, data for setting resolution, etc. It is composed of Here, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, is cut out in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, and a portion of the canvas CV is cut into a window shape (rectangular area) as data related to the environment setting of the VDP 1750c. Data to be displayed on the screen, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and data for setting the resolution are written. The VDP 1750c completes the preparation for output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG shown in FIG. 134 by the VDP initial setting process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, scaler IC initial setting processing 1 is performed (step S1012). In the scaler IC initial setting process 1, the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. 134 is initialized. Specifically, field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to configure register group 1750fa shown in FIG. Field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, memory access control register MDACT, memory access start address register MDAST, memory access end address register MDAEND, etc. Write the set value. These set values are set by transmitting them as write serial data SCL-S0 shown in FIG. 134 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL.

  Subsequent to step S1012, non-interrupt-side steady processing is repeatedly performed (step S1014). In this non-interrupt-side steady process, it is determined whether or not to display a sprite that is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. 119 and does not affect the game result.

  Here, a variety of other pachinko gaming machines are installed in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. For this reason, there is a possibility that an instantaneous stop in which the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stopped may occur depending on the power situation of the hall. If a momentary power failure occurs while the player is playing a game with the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 performs the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Then, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 performs the sub-integration side power-on process of FIG. 158, and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 performs the liquid-crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  The main control MPU 1700a is a process that waits until the boot process of step S1000 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process is completed in the wait timer 2 of step S26 in the main control power-on process. After the interrupt permission is set in step S46 in the time process, the game progresses by the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 140 every 4 ms. After the sub-integration MPU 1740a initializes itself in an extremely short time of microsecond (μs) order in the initial setting process of step S700 in the sub-integration-side power-on process and sets the interrupt permission, FIG. It becomes possible to receive a game effect command from the main control board 1700 by the sub-integration side command reception process interruption process shown, and the progress of the effect is made by the sub-integration side timer interruption process shown in FIG. 159 every 2 ms. Is going. In the sub integration side timer interrupt process, the display command or the like can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 by the liquid crystal serial command control process in step S766. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the boot process in step S1000 in the liquid crystal control turn-on process, and then performs the SIO initial installation process in step S1002. In this SIO initial setting process, as described above, a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 from the sub-integrated board 1740 can be received as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER. When the transfer IC 1750m performs the sprite data resident area transfer start process by the SIO initial setting process in step S1002, the transfer IC initial setting process in step S1003, and the sprite data resident area transfer start process in step S1006, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the process. Transfer of sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z is started based on the set values written in the various registers without going through the control.

In this way, even if a momentary power failure occurs, at the time of power recovery, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a can perform the SIO initial setting process in step S1002 in the process following the boot process in step S1000 in the power-on process. Therefore, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER from the sub-integrated board 1740 can be received without missing. In addition, when the setting value is written in the various register group 1750ma of the register group 1750ma by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, the transfer IC 1750m does not go through the control by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a based on the setting value, that is, independently The sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is started to be transferred to the character RAM 1750z on the basis of the setting value written in. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the port setting process of step S1008 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process without waiting for the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to be transferred to the character RAM 1750z until the transfer is completed. Then, the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 is performed to complete the preparation for output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG, so that the DMAFLAG interrupt process described later can be performed promptly. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, the game can be resumed promptly upon power recovery.
[16-2. DMAFLAG interrupt processing]
Next, DMAFLAG interrupt processing will be described. This DMAFLAG interrupt processing is performed based on the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. As described above, the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is a signal that informs that the VDP 1750c does not accept screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, specifically, sprite setting data. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG. When this is stopped, DMAFLAG interrupt processing is performed. Since the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is stopped every 16 milliseconds (ms) as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs DMAFLAG interrupt processing every 16 ms. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs the external WDT clear signal shown in FIG. 134 from its built-in input / output port to the flip-flop 1750i shown in FIG. 134 every time this DMAFLAG interrupt processing is started. ing.

  When the DMAFLAG interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sets the multiple interrupt permission (step S1020). In the multiple interrupt permission setting, various interrupt processes such as an interrupt by the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 1750c and an interrupt when receiving a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 are set to be valid. If these various interrupt processing settings are changed from valid to invalid due to the influence of noise, for example, there is a possibility that various interrupt processing cannot be performed, and the game must be interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple interrupt permission is set in the DMAFLAG interrupt processing, that is, every 16 ms.

  Subsequent to step S1020, noise cancellation determination processing is performed (step S1022). In this noise cancellation determination process, the influence of noise at the terminal to which the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is input is determined. Specifically, the signal input to the terminal is sampled (referred to as “terminal level”), and whether or not the noise removal time is exceeded is determined.

  Following step S1022, it is determined whether the terminal level is normal (step S1024). This determination is made based on the terminal level in step S1022. Specifically, when the terminal level exceeds the noise elimination time, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal that is not affected by noise, the terminal level is determined to be normal. When the removal time has not been exceeded, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, it is determined as abnormal.

  When the terminal level is normal in step S1024, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is not affected by noise, it is determined whether or not the up / down flag UD-FLG is 0. Is performed (step S1026). This up / down flag UD-FLG is a flag indicating whether to generate drawing data for the upper screen or drawing data for the lower screen, and has a value of 0 when generating drawing data for the upper screen. Set to 1 when generating drawing data for the lower screen.

  In step S1026, when the up / down flag UD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when drawing data for the upper screen of one screen is generated, port setting processing is performed (step S1028). In this port setting process, the same process as the port setting process in step S1008 in the liquid crystal control power-on process shown in FIG. 167 is performed to set various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a.

  Subsequent to step S1028, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1030). In this VDP initial setting process, the same process as that performed in the VDP initial setting process of step S1010 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 is performed, and the VDP 1750c environment setting of the VDP 1750c is performed in the VDP register 1750cb. As data, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, data for cutting out a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, right and left of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer Data for setting the size of one line for drawing the direction and data for setting the resolution are written. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Following step S1030, scaler IC initial setting processing 2 is performed (step S1032). In this scaler IC initial setting process 2, among the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3, the field 1750g [0] shown in FIG. ] Write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Write respective setting values to write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, and memory access control register. That is, each setting value is overwritten. These set values are set by transmitting them as write serial data SCL-S0 shown in FIG. 134 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL.

  Subsequent to step S1032, command analysis processing is performed (step S1034). In this command analysis process, a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. 119 is received by a liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process described later, and the received display command is analyzed.

  Subsequent to step S1034, drawing condition setting data setting processing is performed (step S1036). In this drawing condition setting data setting process, schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1034 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 134, and the first screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. Of the extracted first screen data, the drawing condition setting data is output to the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, or when the schedule data is in progress, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is displayed. Next, the next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and among the extracted screen data, drawing condition setting data is output to the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c. As described above, the drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) that is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area), and displaying the data on the screen. Data to set the composite screen by arranging the sprites in layers, data to set the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, data to set the resolution, etc. ing. Specifically, among the drawing condition setting data, data other than the data related to the environment setting of VDP 1750c is written into the VDP register 1750cb of VDP 1750c. Here, in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, as data other than the data related to the environment setting of the VDP 1750c, a part of the canvas CV is cut into a window shape (rectangular area) and displayed on the screen, and the grouped sprite is layered Write the data to place and set the composite screen. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequent to step S1036, sprite setting data setting processing is performed (step S1038). In this sprite setting data setting process, schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1034 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 134, and the top screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. Of the extracted first screen data, sprite setting data is output to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c, or when the schedule data is in progress, one screen data arranged in time series is added to the schedule data. The next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b and sprite setting data is output to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c among the extracted screen data. As described above, the sprite setting data is composed of data for displaying a plurality of characters on a screen as sprites, data for setting a sprite drawing color, data for setting a sprite drawing position, and the like.

  When performing the sprite setting data setting processing, the sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c is DMA-transferred from the first buffer of the sprite register 1750ca to the second buffer of the sprite register 1750ca 16 ms before the first buffer. In addition, the same sprite setting data is written in the second buffer. The VDP 1750c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 1750m by the transfer IC 1750m based on the sprite setting data DMA-transferred to the second buffer, that is, the sprite setting data of 16 ms before, and the extracted sprite data is a virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. Drawing data is generated by expanding into a bitmap with a canvas CV that is not. In the present embodiment, as described above, the case where the drawing data for the upper screen is generated is set as a reference. For this reason, when generating drawing data for the upper screen, drawing data expanded into a bitmap on the canvas CV is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin of the canvas CV. Already placed in the area. The VDP 1750c will be described in detail later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the generated drawing data is held in the line buffer as it is for the upper screen as it is in the upper screen, and the drawing data held in this line buffer is stored in the line buffer. Output to scaler IC 1750f.

  Subsequent to step S1038, sprite data non-resident area transfer start processing is performed (step S1039). In the sprite data non-resident area transfer start process, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S1034 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. First, the non-resident area transfer data is extracted. Based on the extracted head non-resident area transmission data, the transfer source address, the transfer destination address, etc. are written and set in various registers in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m shown in FIG. When the sprite data is transferred to the non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z, or when the non-resident area transfer schedule data is in progress, one non-resident area transfer data arranged in time series is added to the non-resident area transfer schedule data. Next, the next non-resident area transfer data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and based on the extracted non-resident area transfer data, the transfer source address, the transfer destination address, etc. are written into various registers in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m. In setting the transfer IC1750m is or start transferring sprite data stored in the character ROM1750d of characters RAM1750z nonresident region 1750Zb. As described above, the non-resident area transfer schedule data includes time-series arrangement of non-resident area transfer data defining the order when the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred to the non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z. It is configured. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance to the sprite data from the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z non-resident area 1750zb. In other words, the non-resident area transfer schedule defines the time when the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred to the character RAM 1750z in time for the time when the sprite is drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the schedule data. Thereby, the transfer timing of sprite data from the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z can be managed. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a advances the drawing of the liquid crystal display 1315 by proceeding in parallel with the two schedulers of schedule data and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the display command. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs a sprite data transfer start signal to the transfer IC 1750m when various setting values are written and set in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m. The transfer IC 1750m to which the sprite data transfer start signal is input starts to transfer the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z based on various setting values written in the register group 1750ma.

  Subsequent to step S1039, sprite optimization is performed (step S1040). In this sprite optimization, sprites outside the display area of the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. 134 are deleted from the drawing data when the canvas CV is expanded into a bitmap. As a result, unnecessary sprites are eliminated from the VDP 1750c, so that the arithmetic processing capability of the VDP 1750c can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S1040, a value 1 is set in the up / down flag UD-FLG (step S1042). Thereby, the generation of the drawing data for the upper screen is completed, and the drawing data for the lower screen can be generated.

  Subsequent to step S1042, the output of the field signal FIELD to the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. 134 is stopped (the field signal FIELD is turned OFF, step S1044), and this routine is terminated. When the output of the field signal FIELD is stopped, the scaler IC 1750f is ready to write the drawing data of the upper screen into the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the up / down flag UD-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1026, that is, when drawing data for the lower screen is generated, port setting processing is performed (step S1046). In this port setting process, the same process as the port setting process in step S1028, that is, the same process as the port setting process in step S1008 in the liquid crystal control power-on process shown in FIG. 167 is performed, and is incorporated in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Set various input / output ports.

  Subsequent to step S1046, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1048). In this VDP initial setting process, the same process as the VDP initial setting process in step S1030, that is, the same process as the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 is performed. In the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, as data relating to the environment setting of the VDP 1750c, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen, a part of the canvas CV is cut into a window shape (rectangular area) and displayed on the screen Data to be displayed, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and data for setting the resolution are written. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Following step S1048, scaler IC initial setting processing 2 is performed (step S1050). The scaler IC initial setting process 2 is the same process as the scaler IC initial setting process 2 in step S1032, and among the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 shown in FIG. Field 1750g [3] Read start address register OSFILD3, Field 1750g [0] Write start address register ISFILD0 to Field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3, Memory read line feed width register OMWI, Memory write line feed width register IMWI, Memory access Each set value is written to the control register. That is, each setting value is overwritten. These set values are set by transmitting them as write serial data SCL-S0 shown in FIG. 134 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL.

  Subsequent to step S1050, drawing condition setting data setting processing is performed (step S1052). This drawing condition setting data setting process is the same drawing condition setting data setting process as in step S1036, and relates to the environment setting written in the drawing condition setting data setting process in step S1036 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process the last time, that is, 16 ms before. Write out the same data other than the data, the data that cuts a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displays it on the screen, and the data that sets the composite screen by arranging the grouped sprites in the layer . That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequent to step S1052, a sprite setting data coordinate change setting process is performed (step S1054). In the sprite setting data coordinate change setting process, the sprite drawing position of the sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c in the sprite setting data setting process in step S1038 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process is set last time, that is, 16 ms ago. The y coordinate value of the data to be set is subtracted by the value 300.

  When the sprite setting data coordinate change setting process is performed, the sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c in the sprite setting data setting process of step S1038 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process 16 ms earlier is the first buffer of the sprite register 1750ca. To the second buffer of the sprite register 1750ca and the same sprite setting data is written in the first buffer and the second buffer. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a subtracts the y-coordinate value of data for setting the drawing position of the sprite from the sprite setting data written in the first buffer by a value 300. Thus, the next time, that is, 16 ms later, the sprite setting data whose y-coordinate value has been changed is DMA-transferred from the first buffer of the sprite register 1750ca to the second buffer of the sprite register 1750ca, and is identical to the first buffer and the second buffer. The sprite setting data has been written. The VDP 1750c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m based on the sprite setting data DMA-transferred to the second buffer, that is, the sprite setting data in which the y coordinate is changed, and the extracted sprite data is displayed on the virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. The drawing data is generated by expanding it into a bitmap with a canvas CV (not shown). The drawing data is arranged in a cutout area which is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin set at the upper left of the canvas CV. The VDP 1750c will be described in detail later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the generated drawing data is held in the line buffer as it is for the lower screen as it is for the lower screen, and the drawing data held in this line buffer is stored in the line buffer. Output to scaler IC 1750f.

  Subsequent to step S1054, a code comparison check process is performed (step S1056). In this code comparison check process, various programs copied from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b to the liquid crystal built-in RAM in the boot process of step S1000 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 are stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. Check the consistency of whether it matches the program. If there is a program that does not match, the program is copied from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b to the liquid crystal built-in RAM. In this way, various programs with consistency are stored in the liquid crystal built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1056, the work area is backed up (step S1058). In this work area backup, the information processed in the DMAFLAG interrupt process is copied to a copy area on the work area provided in the liquid crystal built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1058, the value 0 is set in the up / down flag UD-FLG (step S1060). Thus, the generation of the drawing data for the lower screen is completed, and the drawing data for the upper screen, which is the next one screen, can be generated.

  Subsequent to step S1060, the output of the field signal FIELD to the scaler IC 1750f is started (the field signal FIELD is turned on, step S1062), and this routine is ended. When the output of the field signal FIELD is started, the scaler IC 1750f is ready to write the drawing data of the lower screen into the frame memory 1750g.

  On the other hand, when the terminal level is abnormal in step S1024, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, this routine is ended as it is.

  Note that the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sequentially performs the port setting process in step S1028, the VDP initial setting process in step S1030, and the scaler IC initial setting process 2 in step S1032 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms, or step S1046. Port setting processing, VDP initial setting processing in step S1048, and scaler IC initial setting processing 2 in step S1050 are sequentially performed.

  In the port setting processing in step S1028 and step S1046, if the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is affected by noise, the input / output direction of the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a changes, making it difficult to exchange electrical signals with the VDP 1750c and the scaler IC 1750f, and control is impossible. Or fall into. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is less susceptible to the influence of noise by performing the port setting process in step S1028 or step S1046 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms.

  In the VDP initial setting process in steps S1030 and S1048, when the VDP 1750c is affected by noise, the data related to the environment setting written in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c changes, and a bit is displayed on a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen. It becomes difficult to arrange the drawing data developed on the map in the cutout area described above, and the drawing data that cannot be generated correctly, or whose resolution is increased or decreased is transferred to the scaler IC 1750f. It will output. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the VDP initial setting process in either step S1030 or step S1048 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms, so that the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c has the VDP 1750c environment setting data as Data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer By writing data for setting the size of one line and data for setting the resolution, that is, by overwriting, the data is less affected by noise.

  In scaler IC initial setting processing 2 in steps S1032 and S1050, when scaler IC 1750f is affected by noise, for example, field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] in register group 1750fa of scaler IC 1750f. The setting value set in the read start address register OSFILD3 changes, and the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data cannot be read correctly. Then, even if the drawing data for one screen is read, the drawing data becomes chaotic. In addition, the set value set in the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD3 changes, and the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data are stored in the field 1750g [0]. The field 1750g [3] cannot be correctly written. Then, drawing data for one screen that is chaotic is generated in the frame memory 1750g. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the scaler IC initial setting process 2 in either step S1032 or step S1050 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms, thereby configuring the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f, the field 1750g [ 0] Read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Read start address register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] Write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write Write setting values to the line feed width register IMWI and the memory access control register MDACT. Thus, it is less affected by noise by words overwritten. Therefore, even if it is affected by noise, it is possible to draw and display correct drawing data for one screen on the liquid crystal display 1315.

  Next, a drawing data generation method will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. When the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG shown in FIG. 169 (e) input from the VDP 1750c to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is stopped and the signal falls (referred to as “down edge”, timing T0), the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a , DMAFLAG interrupt processing shown in FIG. 168 is performed.

  When the DMAFLAG interrupt processing is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs VDP initial setting processing (timing T1, DMAFLAG interrupt processing step S1030). In this VDP initial setting process, as described above, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, is stored in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. , Data to cut out a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and display it on the screen, data to set the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and the resolution are set Write data to be used. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a scaler IC initial setting process 2 (timing T2, step S1032 of the same process). In the scaler IC initial setting process 2, as described above, in the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. 169 (b), the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address. Register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, and memory access control register Write. That is, each setting value is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a sprite setting data setting process (timing T3, step S1038 of the same process). In this sprite setting data setting process, as described above, schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1034 of the process is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. The first screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b from the schedule data thus obtained, and the sprite setting data among the extracted first screen data is output to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c or when the schedule data is in progress. Then, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is advanced by one and the next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and the sprite setting data of the extracted screen data is spliced to the VDP 1750c. Or output to the register 1750ca.

  Subsequently, when the VDP 1750c outputs the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 169 (f) and the signal rises (referred to as “up edge”, timing T4), the VDP output shown in FIG. N-1) The drawing data of the lower screen is held in the line buffer one line at a time, and the drawing data held in the line buffer is output to the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. The drawing data of the (N-1) th lower screen is set to the sprite drawing position among the sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c by the sprite setting data setting processing of step S1038 in the DMAFLAG interrupt processing 16 ms ago. The y coordinate value of the data to be generated is generated by subtracting only the value 300. At timing T4, the scaler IC 1750f receives the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 169 (f) as an up-edge, and based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. 169 (g), VDP 1750c. IFLD0 shown in FIG. 169 (h) and IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 169 (i), which are signals that tell whether the drawing data output from the drawing data is the upper screen drawing data or the lower screen drawing data. Are output to the frame memory 1750g, and the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g and the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. The drawing data on the lower screen is sequentially read out, and FIG. Via the LVDS transmitter 1750h shown in 4, and outputs to the liquid crystal display device 1315. The frame memory 1750g receives (N−1) in the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. 169 (m) by the input IFLD0 shown in FIG. 169 (h) and the IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 169 (i). ) Write the drawing data of the lower screen.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a down-edges the field signal FIELD shown in FIG. 169 (g) (timing T5, step S1044 of the process), and ends the DMAFLAG interrupt process.

  Subsequently, when 16 ms elapses from the timing T0 and the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG shown in FIG. 169 (e) goes down (timing T6), the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the DMAFLAG interrupt processing again.

  When this DMAFLAG interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a VDP initial setting process (timing T7, step S1048 of the DMAFLAG interrupt process). In this VDP initial setting process, as described above, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, is stored in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. , Data to cut out a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and display it on the screen, data to set the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and the resolution are set Write data to be used. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a scaler IC initial setting process 2 (timing T8, step S1050 of the process). In the scaler IC initial setting process 2, as described above, in the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. 169 (b), the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address. Register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, and memory access control register Write. That is, each setting value is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a sprite setting data setting coordinate change setting process (timing T9, step S1054 of the same process). In this sprite setting data coordinate change setting process, the y-coordinate value of the data for setting the drawing position of the sprite is subtracted by a value 300 from the Nth sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c at timing T3. As a result, the generated drawing data is arranged in a cutout area which is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin set at the upper left of the canvas CV.

  Subsequently, the VDP 1750c up-edges the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 169 (f) (timing T10), and draws the drawing data of the Nth upper screen as one line as the VDP output shown in FIG. 169 (d). The drawing data held in the line buffer one by one is output to the scaler IC 1750f. The drawing data of the Nth upper screen is generated from the sprite setting data written in the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c at the timing T3. At timing T10, the scaler IC 1750f receives the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 169 (f) as an up-edge, and based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. 169 (g), VDP 1750c. IFLD0 shown in FIG. 169 (h) and IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 169 (i), which are signals that tell whether the drawing data output from the drawing data is the upper screen drawing data or the lower screen drawing data. Are output to the frame memory 1750g, and the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. Read the drawing data on the lower screen sequentially, Through DS transmitter 1750h, and outputs to the liquid crystal display device 1315. In response to the input IFLD0 shown in FIG. 169 (h) and the IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 169 (i), the frame memory 1750g displays the Nth upper screen in the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. 169 (m). Write drawing data.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a up-edges the field signal FIELD shown in FIG. 169 (g) (timing T11, step S1062 of the process), and ends the DMAFLAG interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 169 (n), the scaler IC 1750f sequentially reads the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0] at the timing T10 and the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1]. The data is output to the liquid crystal display 1315 via the LVDS transmitter 1750h. Subsequently, 16 ms elapses from the timing T0, the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0] and the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1] are sequentially read out via the LVDS transmitter 1750h. It outputs to the liquid crystal display 1315. Thus, the same screen is drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 for 32 ms, and one screen drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is updated every 32 ms. Yes.
[16-3. LCD control side command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process will be described. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 incorporates the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a when the transmission of the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the serial input / output port. When this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and this liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt processing is performed. As described above, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is a base command for transmission created based on the base command constituting the display command, and the status of the base command is assigned as the first byte of the base command for transmission. The base command mode is assigned as the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the sum value is calculated as the third byte of the base command for transmission, regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values. It is.

  When the liquid crystal control command reception interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 170 (step S1100). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740. Then, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is fetched (step S1102), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter RXC (increment, step S1104). This reception counter RXC is a counter that indicates the number of times it has been extracted from the reception buffer. If the status that is the first byte of the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, that is, the base command for transmission, is extracted from the reception buffer from the sub-integrated board 1740, the value is 1. When the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter RXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the DSP-ACK signal is set from ON to OFF (step S1106). By setting the DSP-ACK signal from ON to OFF, the sub integrated board 1740 is informed that reception of the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission has started.

  Subsequent to step S1106, it is determined whether or not the reception counter RXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1108). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter RX is not 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the transmission base command, the mode that is still the second byte of the transmission base command, and the third byte of the transmission base command When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1110), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1110, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter RXC is 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the transmission base command, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command, and the transmission base command 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter RXC (step S1112), and the sum value is calculated (step S1114). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission and the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission that have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1114, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 matches the sum value calculated in step S114 (step S1114). S1116). The sum value, which is the third byte of the transmission base command already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1102, is calculated in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process shown in FIG. 162 as described above. It should match the sum value calculated in S1116. However, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they generate electrostatic discharge and generate noise. 1 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the base command for transmission is created on the sub-integrated board 1740 side based on the base command constituting the display command. As described above, in this basic command for transmission, the status of the basic command is allocated as the first byte of the basic command for transmission, and the mode of the basic command is allocated as the second byte of the basic command for transmission. As the third byte, the sum value is calculated by regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values and calculating the sum. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control board 1750 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode assigned as the second byte as numerical values, and calculates the sum (sum value). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the received transmission base command. Thus, it is determined whether or not the transmission base command has been changed to a transmission base command different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the sub integrated substrate 1740 and the liquid crystal control substrate 1750.

  In step S116, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the transmission base command already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102, matches the sum value calculated in step S114, the received transmission base command is The data is stored in the liquid crystal control side reception ring buffer (step S1118). This "liquid crystal control side reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Remember. When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a stores in the liquid crystal control side reception ring buffer in step S1118, the status assigned as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode assigned as the second byte are displayed. It is stored in association with each other, and the thumb value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

  Subsequent to step S1118, the DSP-ACK signal is set from OFF to ON (step S1120), and this routine is terminated. By setting this DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte, and the fact that the sum value that is the third byte has been received are sub-integrated. This is transmitted to the substrate 1740.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, it exceeds the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740. If the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 and the sum value calculated in step S114 do not match at step S116, End the routine. As a result, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a cannot set the DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON. As described above, in step S816 in the liquid crystal serial command control process shown in FIG. 162, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set. It is determined that the time has expired, a transmission base command is created again from the same base command, and transmission of the first to third bytes is sequentially started.

  Next, transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the asynchronous serial is adopted as the transmission method from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER format is used. 8-bit communication, LSB first, even parity addition, 1 stop bit.

  When the display command is stored in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub-integration built-in RAM, the sub-integration MPU 1740a of the sub-integration board 1740 creates a transmission base command based on the base command constituting the display command. The status STTS allocated as the first byte of the created transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port built in the sub-integrated MPU 1740a (timing S0, liquid crystal serial command control processing shown in FIG. 162) Step S808). By setting the status allocated as the first byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the bit is sent from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 171 (a). Transmission starts (transmission contents are status STTS shown in FIG. 171 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 uses the serial I / O port reception buffer built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to display the status assigned as the first byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740. When the capture is completed, the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command is captured from the reception buffer, and the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 171 (b) is set from ON to OFF (timing S1, FIG. Step S1106 in the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process shown at 170).

  Subsequently, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a outputs the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750, and when the transmission buffer becomes empty, sends it to the transmission buffer. The mode allocated as the second byte of the trust command is set (timing S2, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt process shown in FIG. 163). By setting the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the serial input / output port sets the mode to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 171 (a). Transmission starts (transmission contents are in the mode MODE shown in FIG. 171 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a captures the mode allocated as the second byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port. The status allocated as the second byte of the trust group command is fetched. At this time, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 171 (b) remains off.

  Subsequently, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a outputs the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command for transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750 bit by bit from the serial input / output port. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, the mode is transmitted to the transmission buffer. The sum value allocated as the third byte of the trust command is set (timing S3, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt process shown in FIG. 163). By setting the sum value allocated as the third byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the liquid crystal control board 1750 is liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 171 (a) bit by bit from the serial input / output port. (Transmission contents are the sum value SUM shown in FIG. 171 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a captures the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 with the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Is completed, the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command is fetched from the reception buffer, the status already allocated from the reception buffer as the first byte of the transmission basic command, and the transmission base command The mode allocated as the 2nd byte is considered as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value) is calculated. The calculated sum value and the received reception buffer are allocated as the 3rd byte of the basic command for transmission. It is determined whether or not the sum value matches. If they match, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 171 (b) is set from OFF to ON (timing S4, step S1120 in the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 170).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of holds is displayed in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the start winning command, the special 1 hold number designation command, and the special 2 hold number designation command. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of holdings of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the number of holdings of the lower special symbol display 1490 of up to 4 in total, the total number of holdings of up to 8 in total is five holding number display areas. The information is displayed on the hold number display unit 2100 configured by 2100a to 2100e. Hereinafter, a display mode of the reserved number in the liquid crystal display 1315 will be described.

  FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, and FIGS. 173A to 173 E are enlarged views of the hold number display unit 2100. As shown in FIG. 172, the liquid crystal display 1320 has a reserved number display unit 2100 for displaying the reserved number at the lower end of the display area 1320. The reserved number display unit 2100 is configured by five reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e surrounded by a white outline, and the display color inside the outline of each area differs from the normal display color and the outline of each area The number of holds is notified by displaying the number of holds corresponding to the inside.

  For example, when the number of hold is 1, the display color inside the outline of the hold number display area 2100a is different from the normal display color and “1” is displayed as the corresponding hold number, and when the number of hold is 2, the hold number display area The display color inside the outlines of 2100a and 2100b is made different from the normal display color, and “1” is displayed as the hold number corresponding to the hold number display area 2100a, and “2” is displayed as the hold number corresponding to the hold number display area 2100b. When the number of holds is 3, the display color inside the outline of the hold number display areas 2100a to 2100c is different from the normal display color, and “1” is set as the hold number corresponding to the hold number display area 2100a. “2” is displayed as the number of holdings corresponding to 2100b, “3” is displayed as the number of holdings corresponding to the holding number display area 2100c, and the number of holdings is four. The display color inside the outline of the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100d is made different from the normal display color, and “1” is set as the reserved number corresponding to the reserved number display area 2100a, and the reserved number corresponding to the reserved number display area 2100b is “ “2” is displayed as “3” as the number of holds corresponding to the number-of-holds display area 2100c, “4” is displayed as the number of holds corresponding to the number-of-holds display area 2100d (FIG. 173 (B)), In the case of eight, the display color inside the outline of the hold number display areas 2100a to 2100e is different from the normal display color, and “1” is set as the hold number corresponding to the hold number display area 2100a and the hold number display area 2100b. “2” as the number of holds, “3” as the number of holds corresponding to the hold number display area 2100c, and the number of holds corresponding to the hold number display area 2100d 4 ", to display a 5 to eight as pending number corresponding to the number of holding display region 2100e (FIG 173 (C), FIG. 173 (D)).

  For example, by displaying the inside of the outline of the area less than the corresponding reserved number among the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e in the same color as the background color (black in this example) of the reserved number display unit 2100, the outline of the area is displayed. The state in which only the display is made visible is referred to as normal, and the state in which there is no reserved ball corresponding to the area is referred to. Specifically, this is the state shown in FIG.

  Many pachinko gaming machines notify the total number of holdings by means of a barometer display that is an increase or decrease in the number of display colors different from the normal display color. The barometer display has an advantage that it is possible to easily grasp the increase / decrease in the number of reservations because all the number of reservations is notified by the increase / decrease in the number of areas of display colors different from normal.

  By the way, when notifying all the number of reservations by barometer display, it is necessary to secure a number of areas corresponding to the number of reservations in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. In the area for displaying the number of reservations, it is not possible to execute an effect display related to the above-mentioned variation display of the decorative symbol (for example, an effect display that improves the expectation for the big hit by displaying the character in association with the variable symbol variation display). It becomes a dead space. Many of the conventional pachinko machines have only one special symbol display and the maximum value of the number of reservations is set to four, so it was enough to secure four areas as the areas corresponding to the number of reservations . However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has two special symbol displays and the maximum number of reservations is set to eight, so that the area corresponding to the number of reservations is twice that of conventional pachinko gaming machines. Thus, there is a problem that the dead space is enlarged.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time-short state control is not executed, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the lower start winning opening 1340, and the time-short state control is executed. If it is, it is easy for game balls to enter the lower start winning opening 1340. That is, opening / closing control of the opening / closing blade 1380 is performed in a different opening / closing manner when the time-short state control is not executed, and the normal symbol change time in the normal symbol display 1520 is shortened. This makes it easier for a game ball to enter the lower start winning opening 1340. The upper start winning opening 1270 is provided on the upper stage 1250a of the center accessory apparatus 1200 so as to be able to enter a game ball that has entered the warp hole 1260, and the center accessory apparatus from other than the warp hole 1260 by jumping up or the like. The game ball that has entered the inside of 1200 does not reach the upper stage 1250a, but falls on the lower stage 1250b and swings on the lower stage 1250b. Therefore, the game that has entered the inside of the center accessory device 1200 from the warp hole 1260b. Except for the ball, almost no ball enters the upper start winning opening 1270.

  In this way, when the time-short state control is not executed, game balls enter the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 related to increase / decrease of the number of holds corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490. It is hard to do. As described above, when notifying all the number of reservations by barometer display, a number of areas corresponding to the number of reservations is secured. Further, even when each region is displayed in a normal display color, it is possible to grasp the maximum value of the number of reservations by displaying it so that its outline can be visually recognized. When the control in the short time state is not executed, it is difficult for game balls to enter the upper start winning opening 1270 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 related to the increase or decrease in the number of holds corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490. Therefore, the number of reservations corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 is mainly displayed, and the maximum value of the number of reservations is obtained even though eight areas are secured and each area is displayed so as to be visible. The notification of the number of holds is performed only by the four areas of about half of the eight. For this reason, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced by comparing the maximum number of reserved numbers or the number of areas displayed in the normal display color with the number of areas displayed in a display color different from the normal display color. It was. In other words, there is a possibility that the gaming interest will be lowered by the fact that the actual number of reservations is small with respect to the maximum value of the number of reservations.

  In addition, since the area for displaying the number of reservations is usually provided at the end of the display area, when the display area is elliptical like the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 of this embodiment, eight areas are displayed. It was difficult to secure the area. In these cases, it is possible to secure an area for eight by reducing the area for displaying the number of holds, but it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize and cannot fulfill the original function of notifying the number of holds. It was.

  In addition, there is a pachinko machine that notifies all the holding numbers by a count display that is an increase / decrease of the total number of holdings. In the count display, since the increase / decrease in the number of holds is notified in one area, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to secure an area corresponding to the number of holds and the dead space can be reduced. However, unlike barometer display, the number of counts must be determined. For example, when displaying with a 7-segment LED, it is easy to mistake the display of “5” and “6” and immediately grasp the number of holds. It was difficult to do.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with five areas surrounded by a white outline as the number-of-holds display areas 2100a to 2100e for notifying the maximum value of the number of eight. Then, the number of hold 1 to 5 is notified by barometer display, and the number of hold 6 to 8 is notified by count display, thereby notifying all the hold numbers without providing an area corresponding to each hold number. It is possible.

  Specifically, when the number of holds is 1 to 5, the number of areas whose display is controlled with a display color different from the normal display color is increased as the number of holds increases. In addition, the number of holds is notified by displaying the number of holds corresponding to each area, and when the number of holds increases to 6 to 8 holds, it is displayed in the hold number display area 2100e. The number of holds is notified by updating the number of holds to the total number of holds and displaying it. That is, when the number of holdings is 6 or more, all the holding numbers are notified by updating the holding number displayed in the holding number display area 2100e.

  As described above, when the number of holdings is 1 to 5, barometer display for notifying the number of holdings by increasing or decreasing the number of holding number display areas 2100a to 2100e different from the normal display color, and the number of holdings is six. In the case of ˜8, the count is displayed to notify the number of holds by increasing / decreasing the total number of holds displayed in the hold number display area 2100e. This makes it possible to notify all the hold numbers without providing an area corresponding to each hold number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the number-of-holds display areas 2100a to 2100e are configured with five areas, the dead space can be reduced as compared with the case where areas corresponding to the number of holds are provided. In addition, even when the number of reserves is less than 5 due to the five areas surrounded by the white outline, it can be recognized as a pachinko gaming machine in which the maximum number of reserves is set to 5 or more. Since the number of areas displayed in the normal display color can be reduced when the number of hold is less than 5, the number of areas displayed in the normal display color is different from the normal display color. Even if it is a case where the number of the area | regions displayed by (2) is compared, it can make it difficult to reduce a game entertainment interest.

  In this example, the number-of-holds display area 2100e corresponding to the largest number of holds among the number-of-holds display areas 2100a to 2100e is used for both barometer display and count display, but only barometer display is executed. You may comprise so that an area | region and the area | region which performs only a count display may be provided separately. That is, in the above-described example, the hold number display area 2100e is displayed in the same manner (shape, pattern, color, etc.) as the other hold number display areas 2100a to 2100d, and is held when the hold number is 1 to 5 When the number of areas 2100a to 2100e is notified by the barometer display that controls the display in a display color different from the normal display color, and when the number of reservations further increases and the number of reservations becomes 6 to 8 Although the number of holds is notified by a count display that updates the value of the number of holds displayed in the hold number display area 2100e, the hold number display area 2100e is different from the other hold number display areas 2100a to 2100d. When the number of holds is 1 to 4, the hold number display areas 2100a to 2100d are displayed by a barometer display that controls display with a display color different from the normal display color. And may be configured to notify the count display number pending updates the value of the number of holding when 5 to eight.

  Further, in this example, the configuration is such that 1 to 5 hold numbers are notified by barometer display and 6 to 8 hold numbers are notified by count display, but the range of hold numbers to be notified by barometer display In addition, the range of the pending number to be notified by the count display is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that 1 to 4 hold numbers are notified by barometer display and 5 to 8 hold numbers are notified by count display.

  Further, in this example, the reserved balls corresponding to the special symbols variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the special symbols variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490 are displayed in different modes. I have control. Specifically, the inside of the outline of the area that is less than the corresponding reserved number among the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e is displayed in the same color as the background color (black in this example) of the reserved number display unit 2100 (for example, FIG. 173). In (B), the number of reserved areas 2100e), the inside of the outline corresponding to the reserved ball of the upper special symbol display 1480 among the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e is displayed in blue (for example, in FIG. 173 (B)) Number display areas 2100a to 2100d) and the inside of the outline of the area corresponding to the reserved number of the lower special symbol display 1490 in the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e is displayed in red (for example, the reserved number display area in FIG. 173 (C)) 2100c). Accordingly, the reserved ball corresponding to each area of the number-of-holding display areas 2100a to 2100e is displayed with the special symbol variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the special symbol variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490. It becomes possible to determine which is the corresponding holding ball.

  The reserved number display area 2100e is controlled to be displayed in a display color different from the normal display color when the reserved number is 5 to 8, and the upper special symbol display 1480 is used as a reserved ball corresponding to the reserved number display area 2100e. If both the reserved sphere corresponding to the special symbol variably displayed at 1 and the reserved sphere corresponding to the special symbol variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490 are present, a problem occurs. In this example, when the reserved sphere corresponding to the reserved number display area 2100e includes the reserved sphere corresponding to the special symbol variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490, the inside of the outline of the reserved number display area 2100e Display control is performed in red corresponding to the reserved ball of the symbol display 1490.

  Specifically, when the number of reservations shown in FIG. 173 (C) is five and the reserved ball corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 is displayed as the fifth reserved ball in the held number display area 2100e. In other words, when the inside of the outline of the hold number display area 2100e is controlled to be displayed in blue, the hold number display areas 2100a to 2100e are moved to the hold number display areas 2100a to 2100e based on the winning of the game ball in the upper start winning prize opening 1270 or the lower start winning prize opening 1340. When displaying a reserved ball corresponding to the special symbol display 1490, a reserved ball corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 and a hold corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 as a reserved ball corresponding to the number-of-holds display area 2100e. Including both spheres. In this case, the presence of a holding ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 is notified by controlling the display of the inside of the outline of the holding number display area 2100e in red.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation display is started in the lower special symbol display 1490, if it is determined that the big hit is based on the special symbol judgment random number, the game state is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state. Do not generate C to 2R probability variation big hit H. The probability that it is determined that a small hit is generated based on the special symbol determination random number when the special symbol variation display is started in the lower special symbol display 1490 is the special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1480. Is set lower than the probability of determining that a small hit will be generated based on the special symbol determination random number when starting the fluctuation display, and the lower special symbol display 1490 increases the rate of 15R big hit. . Thereby, when the lower special symbol display 1490 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, the expectation for the 15R big hit is increased, and the game entertainment is improved.

  That is, by controlling the display of the number-of-holds display areas 2100a to 2100e in red, the presence of a reserved ball corresponding to the special symbol variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490 is notified, and the expectation for 15R big hit is increased. . In addition, in this example, when a reserved ball corresponding to a special symbol variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490 is displayed on the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved number display area 2100e (5 reserved number to 8 reserved number). The inside of the outline of the number-of-holding display area 2100e is controlled to be displayed in red, and the presence of a holding ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 is notified. As a result, when at least one reserved ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 is included, the inside of the outline of the reserved number display area 2100e is controlled to be displayed in red, so that the inside of the outline of the reserved number display area 2100e is displayed in red. When the display control is performed, the expectation for the 15R big hit gaming state can be increased regardless of the number of holdings, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In this example, the display color of the area corresponding to the reserved ball of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the display color of the area corresponding to the reserved ball of the lower special symbol display 1490 among the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e are displayed. It is configured to display differently, but the display is not limited to the above example as long as the reserved ball of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the reserved ball of the lower special symbol display 1490 are displayed in a distinguishable manner. Absent. For example, if the mode (shape, pattern, color) of the area corresponding to the reserved sphere of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the area corresponding to the reserved sphere of the lower special symbol display 1490 among the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e are different. The display control may be performed.

  Next, processing executed on the liquid crystal control board 1750 based on a command transmitted from the main control MPU 1700a will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 (C) to 173 (E).

  As described above, the main control MPU 1700a receives the detection signal from the middle start port switch 1360 via the main control I / O port based on the fact that the game ball has won the middle start winning port 1330. “01100000B (= 60H)” is set in the status, “XXXX0001 (= Y1H)” is set in the mode, a start winning command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) is formed, and the main built-in RAM is used as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. If the counter value of the upper special symbol holding memory counter is not the maximum value of 4, it indicates the effective number of game balls entering the middle start winning opening 1330 (the number of holding balls = the counter value of the upper special symbol holding memory counter). As a special 1 reserved number designation command, “01100010B (= 62H)” is set in the status, and if the counter value of the upper special symbol hold storage counter is 1, “0010B (= 02H)” is set. If the counter value is 2, “0011B (= 03H)” is set. If the counter value of the upper special symbol hold storage counter is 3, “0100B (= 04H)” is set. If the counter value is 4, the counter value of the upper special symbol hold storage counter is 4. If so, “0101B (= 05H)” is set to the mode, a special 1-hold number designation command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) is formed, and the transmission information Stored in the transmission information storage region of the main internal RAM as.

  When the detection signal from the upper start port switch 1272 is input via the main control I / O port based on the fact that the game ball has won the upper start winning port 1270, the main control MPU 1700a receives “01100000B (= 60H) ”is set to status,“ XXXX0003B (= Y3H) ”is set to mode, and a start winning command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) is formed, and a game ball wins in the lower starting winning opening 1340 When the detection signal from the lower start port switch 1370 is input via the main control I / O port based on the above, “01100000B (= 60H)” is set to the status, and “XXXX0002 (= Y2H)” is set. The start winning command which is set to the mode and the start winning command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) is shaped and shaped. Stored in the transmission information storage region of the main internal RAM as the transmission information. Also, if the counter value of the lower special symbol storage memory counter is not the maximum value of 4, the number of effective balls entered into the upper starting winning port 1270 and the lower starting winning port 1340 (reserved number = lower special symbol reserved memory counter) "01100011B (= 63H)" is set in the status as the special 2 reserved number designation command indicating the counter value of "2", and if the counter value of the lower special symbol storage counter is 1, "0010B (= 02H)" If the counter value of the special symbol hold memory counter is 2, “0011B (= 03H)” is set. If the counter value of the lower special symbol hold memory counter is 3, “0100B (= 04H)” is set, and the lower special symbol hold memory is set. If the counter value of the counter is 4, “0101B (= 05H)” is set to the mode, and the special 1 holding number designation having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) is specified. Molding the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM as the transmission information.

  When executing the sub integrated board command transmission process (step S92), the main control MPU 1700a reads the transmission information from the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM and transmits it to the sub integrated board 1740.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a executes predetermined processing based on the reception of the start winning command, the special 1 hold number designation command, and the special 2 hold number designation command from the main control MPU 1700a, and applies a start prize command to the liquid crystal control board 1750, The special 1 hold number designation command and the special 2 hold number designation command are stored as display commands in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer. When executing the liquid crystal serial command control process (step S766), the sub integrated MPU 1740a extracts the display command from the sub integrated side transmission ring buffer and transmits it to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives the start winning command, the special 1 hold number designation command and the special 2 hold number designation command as display commands from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, the start prize command, the special 1 hold number designation command and the special 2 hold number designation command Based on the calculation result, sprite setting data is output to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c based on the calculation result.

  The liquid crystal built-in RAM of the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a has a reserved storage area that is the same storage area as the startup information storage area stored in the main internal RAM, and a reserved number counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 8. Is provided. The hold storage area is provided with hold information storage blocks 0 to 7 (eight hold information storage blocks), the hold information storage block 0, the hold information storage block 1, the hold information storage block 2,. The start winning command according to the detection signal of the middle starting port switch 1360, the starting winning command according to the detection signal of the upper starting port switch 1272, and the starting winning command according to the detection signal of the lower start port switch 1370 in the order of the information storage block 7 The identification information indicating which of these has been received is stored. In other words, in the hold information storage blocks 0 to 7, which one of the detection signals of the start start switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 corresponds to the start winning command is stored in time series. (That is, the history is stored so that the history can be understood).

  The counter value of the hold number counter is also used as an area pointer for designating a hold storage block for storing identification information corresponding to the received start winning command among the hold storage blocks 0 to 7 in the hold storage area. Specifically, when the counter value of the hold number counter is 0, the hold information storage block 0 is designated as the hold storage block for storing the identification information corresponding to the received start winning command, and the counter value of the hold number counter is 1. Sometimes the hold information storage block 1 is designated as a hold storage block for storing the identification information corresponding to the received start winning command, and when the counter value of the hold number counter is 7, the identification information corresponding to the received start winning command Is designated as a pending storage block for storing. Since the identification information is not stored in the hold storage block when the counter value of the hold number counter is 8, no hold storage block is designated. Thus, the hold number counter stores the identification information in the hold storage block obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value of the hold storage counter (for example, the hold storage block 6 obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value 7 of the hold storage counter). In addition, the number of reservations (total number of reservations) obtained by adding the number of reservations corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 and the number of reservations corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 is shown.

  If the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives both the start winning command and the special 1 hold number designation command corresponding to the detection signal of the middle start port switch 1360 in the command analysis process (step S1034), the hold in the hold storage area is received. After storing the identification information indicating that the start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the middle start port switch 1360 is received in the hold information storage block designated by the number counter, the counter value of the hold number counter is counted up (counter 1), and if both the start winning command and the special 2 hold number designation command corresponding to the detection signal of the upper start switch 1272 or the lower start port switch 1370 are received, the hold in the hold storage area Upper start switch 1272 or lower start to the reserved storage block specified by the number counter After storing the identification information indicating the reception of the start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the switch 1370, and counts the count value of the pending counter up (the counter value 1 is added). For example, when the counter value of the hold number counter is 7, that is, when the identification information is stored in the hold information storage blocks 0 to 6, the start winning command and the special 1 hold according to the detection signal of the middle start port switch 1360 If both the number designation command and the number designation command have been received, the pending information storage block 7 designated by the pending number counter in the pending storage area is stored in the pending information storage block 7 with a start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the middle start port switch 1360. After storing the identification information indicating that there is, the counter value of the hold count counter is updated to 8.

  Further, if only the special 1-number-holding number designation command is received without receiving the start winning command in the command analysis process (step S1034) (when the variable display of the special symbol is started in the upper special symbol display 1480), it is suspended. The count value of the number counter is counted down (the counter value is decremented by 1), the identification information of the hold information storage block 1 is stored in the hold information storage block 0, the identification information of the hold information storage block 2 is stored in the hold information storage block 1, The identification information of the hold information storage block 7 is shifted to the hold information storage block 6, respectively. If only the special 2 reserved number designation command is received without receiving the start winning command in the command analysis process (step S1034) (when the special symbol variable display is started in the lower special symbol display 1490), The count value of the hold number counter is counted down (the counter value is decremented by 1), the identification information of the hold information storage block 1 is stored in the hold information storage block 0, the identification information of the hold information storage block 2 is stored in the hold information storage block 1, ..., Shift the identification information of the hold information storage block 7 to the hold information storage block 6. That is, when only the special 1 hold number designation command is received without receiving the start winning command and when only the special 2 hold number designation command is received without receiving the start winning command, the reserved storage block N (N = 1) To 7) shift the identification information stored in the pending storage block (N-1) and shift the identification information stored in the pending storage block N (N = 1 to 7) into the pending storage block (N-1). The identification information stored in the pending storage block 0 before the operation is discarded.

  In addition, the reserved storage blocks 0 to 7 in the reserved storage area are associated with each of the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100d (position information and the like). That is, the reserved storage block 0 is associated with the reserved number display area 2100a, the reserved storage block 1 is associated with the reserved number display area 2100b, and the reserved storage block 2 is associated with the reserved number display area 2100c. 3 is associated with the reserved number display area 2100d, and the reserved storage blocks 4 to 7 in the reserved storage area are associated with the reserved number display area 2100e.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sets the screen data composed of the drawing condition setting data and the drawing condition setting data by reflecting the calculation result based on the identification information stored in the holding storage blocks 0 to 7 in the holding storage area. That is, the screen data is set by adding information about the number of holds. Specifically, in the drawing condition setting data setting process (step S1036), if the count value of the holding number counter is not 0, the drawing condition setting data reflecting the calculation result based on the holding storage blocks 0 to 7 in the holding storage area. In the sprite setting data setting process (step S1038), if the counter value of the hold number counter is not 0, sprite setting data reflecting the calculation result based on the hold storage blocks 0 to 7 in the hold storage area is created. In other words, data for displaying a reserved character to be displayed in the reserved display area on the liquid crystal display 1315 as a display device is created, and is composed of drawing condition setting data and sprite setting data stored in advance in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. VDP1750c V is added to the created screen data for one screen. P register 1750cb, set to the sprite register 1750ca.

  If the identification information is stored in the reserved storage block 0 of the reserved storage area in the command analysis process (step S1034), the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a determines the character corresponding to the identification information (the reserved ball corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480). Alternatively, the character that displays the number of holds 1 among the characters corresponding to the holding ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490) is displayed in the number of holdings display area 2100a, and the identification information is stored in the holding storage block 1 of the holding storage area. If so, the character corresponding to the identification information (the character displaying the number of reservations 2 among the characters corresponding to the reserved ball corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 or the reserved ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490) is reserved. If the identification information is stored in the reserved storage block 2 of the reserved storage area. A character corresponding to the identification information (a character that displays the number of reserved 3 among the characters corresponding to the reserved ball corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 or the reserved ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490) is displayed as the reserved number display area 2100c. If the identification information is stored in the reserved storage block 3 of the reserved storage area, the character corresponding to the identification information (the reserved ball corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 or the lower special symbol display 1490 In the drawing condition setting data setting process (step S1036) and the sprite setting data setting process (step S1038) so as to display in the hold number display area 2100d a character corresponding to the holding ball is displayed on the holding number display area 2100d. Set the data.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the 5th to 8th holding balls include the holding ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490, the holding ball is held in a mode corresponding to the holding ball of the lower special symbol display 1490. The number display area 2100e is displayed and controlled, and the number of reservations (total number of reservations) obtained by adding the number of reservations corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 and the number of reservations corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 is displayed. If the identification information is stored in the reserved storage blocks 4 to 7 in the command analysis process (step S1034), the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a responds to the detection signal of the upper start port switch 1272 or the lower start port switch 1370 in the identification information. It is determined whether or not identification information indicating that the start winning command has been received is included, and identification information indicating that the starting winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the upper start switch 1272 or the lower start switch 1370 has been received is displayed. If it is included, a character that displays the number of holdings indicated by the counter value of the holding number counter among the characters corresponding to the holding ball according to the lower special symbol display 1490 (for example, holding if the counter value of the holding number counter is 5) (Character displaying number 5) is displayed in the reserved number display area 2100e, and the upper start port switch is displayed. If it does not include the identification information indicating that the start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of 1272 or the lower start port switch 1370 is received, the number-of-holds counter among the characters corresponding to the holding balls corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 Drawing condition setting data setting process so that a character that displays the number of holds indicated by the counter value (for example, a character that displays the number of holds 7 if the counter value of the hold number counter is 7) is displayed in the hold number display area 2100e. Screen data is set in (step S1036) and sprite setting data setting processing (step S1038).

  As described above, drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 is generated by the VDP 1750c, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display 1315, whereby the reserved number display areas 2100a to 2100e in the liquid crystal display 1315 are output according to the reserved number. Display control is executed. That is, when display control is performed on the hold display areas 2100a to 2100e in the state shown in FIG. 173 (C), the count value of the hold number counter is 5, and the hold storage block 2 out of the hold storage blocks 0 to 4 is increased. Identification information indicating that the start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the start opening switch 1272 or the lower start opening switch 1370 has been received is stored, and other reserved storage blocks (the reserved storage blocks 0 to 1 and the reserved storage blocks 3 to 4). ) Stores identification information indicating that a start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the middle start port switch 1360 has been received.

  When both the start winning command and the special 2 hold number designation command corresponding to the detection signal of the upper start port switch 1272 or the lower start port switch 1370 are received from the state shown in FIG. 173 (C), the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Stores the identification information indicating that the start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the upper start port switch 1272 or the lower start port switch 1370 is received in the hold storage block 5 designated by the hold number counter, and then the hold number counter The counter value is updated to 6. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sets the screen data by reflecting the calculation result based on the reserved storage blocks 0 to 5. That is, a character corresponding to the identification information stored in each of the reserved storage blocks 0 to 3 is displayed in the corresponding area of the reserved storage areas 2100a to 2100d, and the upper start switch 1272 or the lower switch is displayed in the reserved storage blocks 4 to 5. Based on the determination that the identification information indicating that the start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the start port switch 1370 has been received is included, the reserved storage area 2100e has the number of holds 6 among the characters corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490. By setting screen data for displaying a character for displaying and outputting the screen data to VDP 1750c, drawing data to be displayed on liquid crystal display 1315 is generated by VDP 1750c, and the generated drawing data is output to liquid crystal display 1315. In the liquid crystal display 1315 Display control of the number of holding the display area 2100a~2100e is performed (FIG. 173 (D)).

  In the state shown in FIG. 173 (D), when only the special 1-holding number designation command is received without receiving the start winning command (when the special symbol variable display on the upper special symbol display 1480 is executed). The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a discards the identification information stored in the hold storage block 0, shifts the identification information stored in the hold storage blocks 1 to 5 to the hold storage blocks 0 to 4, and the counter value of the hold count counter Is updated to 5. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sets the screen data by reflecting the calculation result based on the reserved storage blocks 0 to 4. That is, a character corresponding to the identification information stored in each of the reserved storage blocks 0 to 3 is displayed in the corresponding area of the reserved storage areas 2100a to 2100d, and the upper start opening switch 1272 or the lower start opening is displayed in the reserved storage block 4. Based on the determination that the identification information indicating that the start winning command corresponding to the detection signal of the switch 1370 has been received is included, the reserved number 5 among the characters corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 is displayed in the reserved storage area 2100e. Screen data for displaying a character to be displayed is set, and the screen data is output to the VDP 1750c, thereby generating drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 by the VDP 1750c and outputting the generated drawing data to the liquid crystal display 1315. The liquid crystal display 1315 Display control of the number display area 2100a~2100e is performed (FIG. 173 (E)).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when the total number of holds is 0 to 5, display control is performed in a mode different from the normal one of the five areas of the hold number display areas 2100a to 2100e. The total number of holds is notified by a barometer display that changes the number of areas to be displayed, and when the total number of holds is 6 to 8, the five hold numbers display areas 2100a to 2100e are displayed and controlled in a manner different from normal. The total holding number is notified by a count display for updating the total holding number displayed in the number display area 2100e. This makes it possible to notify the total number of holds without increasing the dead space.

  Further, the holding ball corresponding to the upper special symbol display 1480 and the holding ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 are controlled to be displayed in different modes, and when the total number of holdings is 6 to 8, If the reserved ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 is included in the eighth reserved ball, the display of the reserved number display area 2100e is controlled in a manner corresponding to the reserved ball corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490. Also, when the big special symbol display 1490 is a big hit, the player is more advantageous to the player than when the big special symbol display 1480 is a big hit (the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the big hit gaming state is larger (big hit) The maximum number of rounds in the gaming state, the period in which the grand prize winning opening 1400 is opened in one round, etc., and the gaming state controlled after the big hit gaming state (normal state, short time state, High probability state (high probability short-time state in which control of short-time state is controlled in parallel, high probability non-short-time state in which control of time-short state is not performed in parallel) is more advantageous). If the sixth to eighth reserved balls include the reserved balls corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 when the total number of held is six to eight, the reserved balls corresponding to the lower special symbol display 1490 By controlling the display of the number-of-holds display area 2100e in a manner according to the game, the game can be enjoyed by notifying the reserved ball corresponding to the change display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1490 that may become a more advantageous jackpot. Can be improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, for example, the middle start winning opening 1330 and the liquid crystal display 1315 are provided in the game area 255 formed in the game board 4, and the ball is hit toward the game area 255. Drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 is performed based on the fact that a game ball driven from the launching device 300 has entered the middle start winning opening 1330.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 1700, a sub-integrated board 1740, and a liquid crystal control board 1750. The main control board 1700 controls the progress of the game, and is mounted with a main control MPU 1700a which is a microprocessor that generates and outputs a game effect command based on the progress of the game. The sub-integrated board 1740 receives the game effect command from the main control board 1700, and based on the received game effect command, the base command is configured from the status indicating the command type and the mode indicating the effect variation. A sub-integrated MPU 1740a, which is a microprocessor that sequentially stores one or more of them as display commands in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer and sequentially transmits the base commands from the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer, is implemented. The sub integration side transmission ring buffer is provided in a sub integration built-in RAM that is a RAM built in the sub integration MPU 1740a. The liquid crystal control board 1750 receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740, and a liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, which is a microprocessor that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 based on the received display command, is mounted. In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various commands are transmitted in one direction from the uppermost main control board 1700 to the lowermost liquid crystal control board 1750, and are sub-integrated with the main control board 1700. A board and the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750 are electrically connected by a harness so that various commands can be transmitted.

  The main control MPU 1700a, which is a microprocessor, starts to start the main control MPU 1700a in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The main control MPU 1700a sets the interrupt permission in step S48 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 138, and then advances the game in the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. 140 every 4 milliseconds (ms). ing. Note that “recovery” refers to, for example, power recovery after a power failure or instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped).

  The main control MPU 1700a detects, for example, whether or not a game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 1330 in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. Of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S86 in the main control side timer interruption process of FIG. 140, a game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 1330 in the game process, for example, the switch input process of step S74. On the basis of this, whether or not it is a big hit is determined, and a game effect command is created based on this determination result. The main control MPU 1700a is a sub integrated board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process in FIG. 140, and the game effect command created in the game process is included in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S86. Sending to sub-integrated board.

  The sub integrated MPU 1740a, which is a microprocessor, has a built-in serial input / output port that transmits a base command to the liquid crystal control board 1750. In the sub integration side power-on processing of FIG. The integrated MPU 1740a has started to start. The sub-integration MPU 1740a sets the interrupt permission of the sub-integration MPU 1740a in the initial setting process in step S700 in the sub-integration-side power-on process of FIG. 158, and then sets the sub-integration timer of FIG. 159 every 2 milliseconds (ms). The production is controlled by interrupt processing. When the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port becomes empty, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a performs the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing of FIG. 163 as a trigger, and when the DSP-ACK signal is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, As a trigger, the DSP-ACK signal interrupt process of FIG. 164 is performed.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a is based on the game effect command from the main control board 1700 in the command analysis process of step S726 to the symbol main process of step S734 in the sub-integration side power-on process of FIG. 158 every 16 milliseconds (ms). Thus, one or a plurality of base commands are concatenated and stored as a display command in a sub integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM.

  The sub integrated MPU 1740a extracts the base command from the sub integrated side transmission ring buffer and transmits it to the liquid crystal control board 1750 in the liquid crystal serial command control processing of FIG.

  The liquid crystal serial command control process of FIG. 162 determines whether or not a base command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer in step S800. Only when it is determined in step S806 that the base command is stored in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer in step S800, the status and mode of the base command is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum value is calculated. A base command for transmission is created by adding the calculated sum value to the base command. In step S808, the status of the transmission base command created in step S806 is set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port, and transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750 is started bit by bit. In step S816, it is determined whether the DSP-ACK signal is input within the DSP-ACK signal waiting time. When the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out in the determination in step S816, the status of the same transmission base command set in step S808 is set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port, and the liquid crystal control board 1750 bit by bit. Re-sending has started.

  In the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing of FIG. 163, after the transmission of the transmission base command status is completed, the mode of the transmission base command is subsequently set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port, and the liquid crystal is output bit by bit from the serial input / output port. After output to the control board 1750 and transmission of the transmission base command mode is completed, the sum value of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port, and the liquid crystal control board is set bit by bit from the serial input / output port. 1750. In this way, in step S808 of the liquid crystal serial command control process of FIG. 162, the status of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port, and when the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port becomes empty, this is triggered. The transmission buffer empty interrupt processing of FIG. 163 sets the mode of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port following the status of the transmission base command, and outputs it to the liquid crystal control board 1750 bit by bit from the serial input / output port. doing. When the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port becomes empty, the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing sets the sum value of the basic command for transmission in the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port following the mode of the basic command for transmission. The data is output to the liquid crystal control board 1750 bit by bit from the serial input / output port. That is, in the liquid crystal serial command control process of FIG. 162, when the status of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port in step S808 of the liquid crystal serial command control process, the mode and the sum value of the transmission base command are transmitted. It is designed to be disconnected from control. As a result, the load on the sub integration side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 159 including the liquid crystal serial command control processing performed every 2 ms is reduced.

  In the DSP-ACK signal interruption process of FIG. 164, when the DSP-ACK signal is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, the next base command stored in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer is set as a transmission target. As a result, the transmission target of the base command stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer is advanced.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, which is a microprocessor, has a built-in serial input / output port for receiving a transmission base command from the sub-integrated board 1740. In the liquid crystal control side power-on process in FIG. Sometimes, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is started. When the reception buffer of the serial input / output port receives any of the status, mode, or sum value of the transmission base command, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process of FIG.

  In the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process of FIG. 170, in step S1102, the status, mode, and sum value of the transmission base command are fetched in order from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port. In step S1108, it is determined in step S1102 whether the status, mode, and sum value of the transmission base command have been fetched in order from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port. In step S1114, only when it is determined in step S1102 that the status, mode, and sum value of the transmission base command have been captured in order from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port in step S1108, the transmission base command captured in step S1102 The sum value is calculated by regarding the status and the mode of the base command for transmission as numerical values. In step S1116, it is determined whether or not the sum value calculated in step S1114 matches the sum value of the transmission base command fetched from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port in step S1102. In step S1120, the DSP-ACK signal is sub-integrated only when the sum value calculated in step S1114 matches the sum value of the base command for transmission fetched from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port in step S1102. Output to the substrate 1740.

  In this way, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 calculates the sum value that is the sum of the status and mode of the base command, taking the status and mode of the base command as numerical values, based on the base command constituting the display command. A base command for transmission is created by adding a value to the base command. Then, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a sequentially transmits the status, mode, and sum value of the generated transmission base command to the liquid crystal control board 1750. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 considers the status and mode of the received transmission base command as numerical values, calculates a sum value, and calculates the calculated sum value and the received transmission base command sum. The DSP-ACK signal is output to the sub-integrated board 1740 only when the values match. When the DSP-ACK signal is not input within the DSP-ACK signal waiting time, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a transmits the same transmission base command to the liquid crystal control board 1750 again. Thus, even if noise suddenly enters the harness between the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the correct transmission base command is not transmitted, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a sends the transmission base command to the liquid crystal control board. By retransmitting to 1750, a correct base command for transmission can be transmitted. That is, even if the main control board 1700 which is the uppermost layer cannot grasp a problem occurring between the sub integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750, the sub control board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750 side. By quickly solving the problem, a gap is hardly generated between the progress of the game by the main control board 1700 and the progress of the drawing of the liquid crystal display 1315 by the liquid crystal control board 1750. Therefore, even when affected by noise, the synchronism between the uppermost main control board 1700 and the lowermost liquid crystal control board 1750 can be maintained.

In addition, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 receives the status of the transmission base command from the serial input / output reception buffer by turning off the DSP-ACK signal (timing S1 in FIG. 171). To the sub-integrated board 1740, and when the base command mode for transmission and the sum value of the base command for transmission are fetched from the serial I / O reception buffer, the DSP-ACK signal is kept OFF to receive the signal. The state (timing S1 to timing S4 in FIG. 171) is notified to the sub-integrated board 1740, the status and mode of the received transmission base command are regarded as numerical values, and the sum value is calculated. When the sum value matches the sum value of the received base command for transmission Reception completed state by the SP-ACK signal to ON are transmitted to the effect that the (timing S4 in FIG. 171) to the sub-integrated substrate 1740. The sub-integration MPU 1740a of the sub-integration board 1740 monitors (monitors) the DSP-ACK signal of the transmission base command from the liquid crystal control board 1750, so that which stage of the status, mode, and sum value of the transmission base command is selected. It can be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred. In the development stage, the DSP-ACK signal from the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the status, mode and sum value of the transmission base command are input to the inspection apparatus (for example, an oscilloscope) via the probe, and the DSP- The sub integrated substrate 1740 and the liquid crystal are monitored by monitoring (monitoring) the correspondence relationship between the reception start state, the reception state, the reception completion state of the ACK signal, and the status, mode and sum value of the transmission base command. In addition to the state of transmission / reception between the control board 1750 and the board, a trouble on the sub-integrated board 1740 side and a trouble on the liquid crystal control board 1750 side can be confirmed.
[17. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example. However, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than a pachinko gaming machine, such as a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that uses a game ball to play a slot game).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation display is performed on one of the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490, the special symbol variation display is not performed on the other. However, it is not limited to this. That is, the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1490 may be executed simultaneously. In this case, the display on the liquid crystal display 1315 is possible. As a decorative symbol to be controlled, a decorative symbol that is displayed in a synchronized manner in synchronization with a variation display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1480, and a decorative symbol that is displayed in a synchronized manner with a variation display of the special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1490 May be provided individually.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko game machine. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is the front view (A) of an outer frame, sectional drawing (B) cut | disconnected by the BB line of a front view, and sectional drawing (C) of the side frame board 12 cut | disconnected by the AA line of a front view. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame concerning other embodiments. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the same outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 14, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 16 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the state which isolate | separated the door frame and the glass unit. It is a perspective view which shows the manufacture process of the glass unit detachably attached to a door frame. It is an expansion perspective view of the desiccant insertion part of a glass unit. It is the side view (A), front view (B), and perspective view (C) of the completed glass unit. It is the sectional view on the AA line (A) of FIG. 25 (B), and the sectional view on the BB line (B). It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus with which a door frame is attached. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of an operation handle part. They are a perspective view (A) and an exploded perspective view (B) of the joint unit. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. It is a front view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame 3 before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko gaming machine cut along the horizontal line of the middle of the pachinko gaming machine (game control board box portion). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the game board incorporating a removal prevention mechanism. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame incorporating the removal prevention mechanism. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle part, and a launch rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relation of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 68. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a full tank unit. It is a perspective view which shows the flow of the sphere in a full tank unit. It is a top view for demonstrating the effect | action of a full tank rocking | fluctuation plate. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is sectional drawing which similarly shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the prize ball unit and full tank unit which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom opening-and-closing plate part provided in the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the frame substrate holder. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the delivery control board box and the external terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view of the pachinko gaming machine showing the wiring and the like between the payout control board and the board unit. It is a front view of the game board for demonstrating the cross-sectional location of sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body 8 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which open | released the cover body. It is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine which attached the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is the pachinko game machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is the pachinko game machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the axial support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which attached the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine of the state where the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps and contacts the lower part of the cover object concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inner side of the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of a function display unit. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker through the game window. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is the schematic of various detection signals and various drive signals input / output to / from the main board (main control board). It is a part of block diagram of a lamp drive substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the noise countermeasure circuit and ground circuit of a power supply board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a hot wire failure prevention circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the equivalent circuit of drive IC. It is a circuit diagram which shows input circuits, such as an error cancellation switch. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the input circuit of a launch control part. It is the mounting drawing etc. of a payout control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the transmission circuit etc. of a launch control part. It is a block diagram of a liquid crystal control board. It is a table which shows an example of a register group of a scaler IC. It is a simplified diagram showing the inside of the frame memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | generation of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 138 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. 138. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control side of FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on process following FIG. 142. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. It is a prize ball number information table which shows an example of the command regarding payout. It is a table which shows an example of a status command. It is a table which shows an example of the shaping state command which shaped the state command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of sub integration side power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub integration side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub integration side command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub integration side command reception end interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal serial command control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a transmission buffer empty interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a DSP-ACK signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal notification process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of liquid crystal control side power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a DMAFLAG interruption process. It is a timing chart which shows the production | generation of drawing data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal control side command reception interruption process. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image by which display control is carried out in the display area of a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pending | holding number display part.

Explanation of symbols

1 ... Pachinko machines (pachinko machines)
2 ... Outer frame 3 ... Body frame 3a ... Door frame release switch 3b ... Body frame release switch 4 ... Game board 5 ... Door frames 5aa, 5b-5h ... Door frame decoration lamp 30 ... Storage tray 30a ... Ball discharge button 42 ... Game Window 50... Glass unit 60... Glass plate 70. 270 ... Drawer connector 270a ... Terminal 300 ... Hitting ball launcher 400 ... Prize ball tank 410 ... Tank rail member 420 ... Ball passage unit 450 ... Prize ball unit 457 ... Sprocket 426 ... Out of ball switch 462 ... Count switch 465 ... Discharge motor 480 ... Inward ball unit relay terminal plate 493... First gear 494. ... third gear 500 ... detection disk 501 ... detection notch 502 ... gear portion 504 ... sensor substrate 505 ... rotation angle switch 651 ... frame substrate holder 653 ... power supply substrate box 655 ... delivery control substrate box 656 ... shield heat sink 656a ... unevenness Surface 657 ... Main drawer relay board 658 ... Sub drawer relay board 686 ... Power supply board 700a ... External terminal board 700b ... CR unit terminal board 715 ... Discharge control boards 724a, 724b ... Foil removal area 730 ... Drawer connector 730a ... Contact 1200 ... Center An accessory unit 1210 ... a prize opening unit 1220 ... a decoration unit 1225 ... a function display unit 1225a ... a function display board 1230 ... a production lamp 1240 ... a gradation lamp 1315 ... a liquid crystal display 1330 ... a middle start prize opening 1340 ... a lower start prize opening 1350 ... Grand prize opening device 1 60 ... Middle start port switch 1370 ... Lower start port switch 1380 ... Open / close blade 1390 ... Open / close blade solenoid 1455 ... Gate 1460 ... Gate switch 1480 ... Upper special symbol display 1490 ... Lower special symbol display 1500a, 1500b ... Upper special symbol memory Lamps 1510a, 1510b ... Lower special symbol memory lamp 1520 ... Normal symbol indicators 1530a-1530d ... Normal symbol memory lamp 1540 ... Game status indicator lamp 1550 ... Two round indicator lamp 1560 ... 15 round indicator lamp 1595A ... Function indicator seal 1700 ... Main Control board (main control board)
1700a: Main control MPU (main control microprocessor)
1700f ... Hot line failure prevention circuit 1710 ... Discharge control unit 1710a ... Discharge control MPU
1720 ... Launch control unit 1730 ... Error LED indicator 1731 ... Error release switch 1732 ... Ball removal switch 1740 ... Sub-integrated board (sub-integrated board)
1740a: Sub-integrated MPU (sub-integrated microprocessor)
1750 ... Liquid crystal control board (liquid crystal control board)
1750a ... Liquid crystal control MPU (liquid crystal control microprocessor)
1750b ... Liquid crystal control ROM
1750c ... VDP
1750ca ... Sprite register 1750cb ... VDP register 1750d ... Character ROM
1750m ... Transfer IC
1750ma ... register group 1750f ... scaler IC
1750fa ... Register group 1750g ... Frame memory 1750m ... Transfer IC
1750ma ... Register group 1750z ... Character RAM
1750za ... Resident area 1750zb ... Non-resident area 1755 ... Inverter board 1760 ... Lamp drive board 1760b ... Gradation control IC
1760ba ... Noise removal unit 1760bb ... Serial unit 1760bc ... Tone update control unit 1760bd ... ON time setting table register group 1760be ... Waveform table register group 1760bf ... Pulse generation unit 2100 ... Hold number display units 2100a to 2100e ... Hold number display Regions C1, C101, C103, C50 ... Electrolytic capacitor FBD1 ... Flyback voltage absorption diode FBD2 ... Flyback voltage absorption diode FBD3 ... Flyback voltage absorption diode FBD4 ... Flyback voltage absorption diodes Grp1, Grp2, Grp3 ... Group IC50 ... Drive IC
PTr1... Darlington power transistor PTr2. Field 1750g [1] Write start address register ISFILD2 ... Field 1750g [2] Write start address register ISFILD3 ... Field 1750g [3] Write start address register OSFILD0 ... Field 1750g [0] Read start address register OSFILD2 ... Field 1750g [2] Read Start address Star

Claims (3)

A game area formed on the front surface of the game board and into which game balls fired from the launching means are driven,
A plurality of types of winning holes provided in the game area;
Whether or not to control to a profit granting state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the game ball has entered the first start winning slot among the plurality of types of winning holes First profit grant determination means for determining whether or not
Whether or not to control to a profit granting state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the game ball has entered the second start winning hole among the plurality of types of winning holes A second profit grant determination means for determining whether or not
First display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information and deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the determination by the first profit grant determination means;
And a second display means for deriving display a predetermined display result varies displaying a plurality of symbols information based on the determination by the second profit applying judging unit has been made,
A specific display result is derived and displayed on the first display means based on the determination that the first profit grant determining means controls the profit grant state, and the second profit grant determining means controls the profit grant state. then the specific display results deriving displayed on the second display means on the basis that has been determined, a game machine control before Symbol interests applied state,
A movable member that can be changed between a first state that facilitates entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening and a second state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening;
A movable determination means for determining whether or not to change the movable member to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Based on the fact that the movable determining means determines that the movable member is to be changed to the first state, the movable member is changed to the second state after being changed to the first state for a predetermined period. Control means;
Yet the second initiation of the gaming balls which have entered the special still the first starting condition is first pending before Symbol second start winning hole not established among the gaming balls which have entered the special first starting winning opening conditions composite pending second pending Metropolitan not satisfied, pending you identifiable stores the occurrence order to limit the number of which is predetermined for each of the said second holding and said first hold Number storage means;
Controls pending number of display means based on the first coercive Tome及 beauty before Symbol second Hold stored in said number of holding memory means, said composite pending identifiable displayed is to hold the number of display control of the total number of Means, and
The on-hold number display means has a predetermined number of display units smaller than the upper limit number arranged in a predetermined order ,
The predetermined number of display portions are arranged so that each has a similar shape and is close to each other at substantially equal intervals,
The holding number display control means includes:
The composite when the total number of pending is equal to or less than the predetermined number, identifiable displayed among the predetermined number of the display unit for each occurrence of the ball entrance of game ball into the first start winning hole and the second start winning opening a display unit for increasing in a predetermined order, the barometer displays to allow identifying the total number of complex hold by identifiable to scale in which these display portions of the increase or decrease of the predetermined number of the display unit,
When said total number of complex pending is the predetermined number or more, the the combined display unit that is identifiable to appear at the end of the display portion of Rutotomoni predetermined number to identify possible to display all the display unit of the predetermined number The total number of composite holds is displayed numerically, and the total number of composite holds displayed numerically on the composite display section is displayed each time a game ball enters the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening. By displaying the count , the total number of the composite holds can be specified. A large winning opening opening / closing means for controlling the opening / closing of a large winning opening that can be changed between an open state capable of accepting a game ball and a closed state difficult to receive a game ball among the plurality of types of winning holes, thereby controlling the profit giving state. gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that it comprises. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined number is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of the first reserved number.